The following downloads are uncontrolled copies used with permission of BRE Global. All rights reserved. Please visit www.breeam.org for more information Tel: +44 (0)191 490 1547 Fax: +44 (0)191 477 5371 Email: [email protected] Website: www.heattracing.co.uk www.thorneanderrick.co.uk Scheme Document SD 5064 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only. SD 5064 © BRE Global Ltd 2012 Issue: 2.1 25/5/2012 Pages 336 BRE Global Limited (part of the BRE Group) is an independent third party approvals body offering certification of fire, security and sustainability products and services to an international market. And we aim to achieve this by: • Researching and writing standards • Testing and certification in the areas of fire, electronics, security and sustainability • Developing world leading environmental assessment methods • Undertaking research and consultancy for clients and regulators • Promulgating standards and knowledge throughout the industry through publications and events • Developing and delivering training BRE Global’s product testing and approvals are carried out by recognised experts in our world renowned testing laboratories. BRE Global Limited is custodian of a number of world leading brands including: LPCB for approval of fire and security products and services BREEAM the world’s leading environmental assessment method for buildings, sets the standard for best practice in sustainable design and has become the de-facto measure of a building’s environmental performance. BRE Global is a trading subsidiary of the BRE Trust, the registered research and education charity which owns the BRE Group. BRE Global Limited Bucknalls Lane Watford Hertfordshire WD25 9XX T +44 (0)1923 664100 F +44 (0)1923 664910 E [email protected] www.breglobal.com www.greenbooklive.com SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 2 Contents BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Contents Contents ............................................................................................................................................. 2 Terms and conditions for accessing the BREEAM Scheme Documents......................................... 5 1.0 Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 8 1.1 What is BREEAM?.................................................................................................................................... 8 1.2 Governance and Quality Standards ........................................................................................................... 9 1.3 BREEAM Credibility............................................................................................................................... 11 1.4 The BREEAM Scheme Document ............................................................................................................ 12 2.0 Scope .......................................................................................................................................... 17 2.1 Stages of assessment ............................................................................................................................... 18 2.2 Type of projects that can be assessed using BREEAM.............................................................................. 19 2.3 Type of buildings that can be assessed using this BREEAM scheme ......................................................... 22 3.0 Scoring and Rating ..................................................................................................................... 24 3.1 Rating benchmarks ................................................................................................................................. 25 3.2 Environmental section weightings ........................................................................................................... 25 3.3 Minimum standards ................................................................................................................................ 26 3.4 BREEAM credits for innovation .............................................................................................................. 28 3.5 Eligibility Criteria for Innovation Credits................................................................................................ 31 3.6 How to calculate a building’s rating ....................................................................................................... 32 3.7 BREEAM Outstanding Rating ................................................................................................................. 34 4.0 Management ............................................................................................................................... 35 5.0 Health and Wellbeing ................................................................................................................. 57 6.0 Energy ....................................................................................................................................... 101 7.0 Transport .................................................................................................................................. 141 8.0 Water ......................................................................................................................................... 158 9.0 Materials.................................................................................................................................... 172 10.0 Waste ...................................................................................................................................... 208 11.0 Land Use and Ecology ........................................................................................................... 223 12.0 Pollution .................................................................................................................................. 246 SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Contents 3 3.0 Innovation ................................................................................................................................. 273 14.0 Technical Checklists .............................................................................................................. 278 14.1 Technical Checklist A1: Man 2 Considerate Constructors..................................................................... 278 14.2 Technical Checklist A2: Man 2 Considerate Constructors..................................................................... 279 14.3 Technical Checklist A3: Man 3 Construction Site Impacts .................................................................... 289 14.4 Technical Checklist A4: LE3 Land of Low Ecological Value ................................................................. 294 14.5 Technical Checklist A5: Mat 5 Responsible Sourcing of Materials ........................................................ 295 14.6 Technical Checklist A6: Guidance for relating ecologist’s report to BREEAM ...................................... 302 15.0 Schedule of Changes to the Scheme Document ................................................................... 318 16.0 Additional Sources of Information ......................................................................................... 324 17.0 References .............................................................................................................................. 331 List of Tables Table 1 Summary of BREEAM categories and main issues ................................................................ 13 Table 2 BREEAM 2008 rating benchmarks ......................................................................................... 25 Table 3 BREEAM 2008 environmental weightings .............................................................................. 25 Table 4 Minimum BREEAM standards ................................................................................................ 26 Table 5 BREEAM issues with exemplary level criteria. ........................................................................ 28 Table 6 Example BREEAM score and rating calculation ..................................................................... 33 Table 7 Reflectance for maximum room depths and window head heights .......................................... 61 Table 8 VOC criteria by product type .................................................................................................. 76 Table 9 CO2 benchmarks and BREEAM credits ................................................................................ 101 Table 10 Size of plant for which separate metering would be required .............................................. 111 Table 11 AI benchmarks and BREEAM credits ................................................................................. 141 Table 12 Default hours of operation for a typical day......................................................................... 144 Table 13 Responsible Sourcing Tier Levels and Criteria ................................................................... 190 Table 14 EMS Criteria ...................................................................................................................... 192 Table 15 Green Guide rating points/element ..................................................................................... 197 Table 16 EMS criteria for insulation products .................................................................................... 198 Table 17 Construction waste groups ................................................................................................. 212 Table 18 General Landscape Types ................................................................................................. 234 Table 19 Vegetation Plot Types ........................................................................................................ 234 Table 20 Number of plant species by plot for different landscape types ............................................. 235 Table 21 Refrigerant GWP ............................................................................................................... 248 Table 22 Definition of flood zones by country .................................................................................... 265 Table 23 BREEAM issues with exemplary level criteria ..................................................................... 273 Table 24 Standard Road Transport Fuel Conversion Factors ........................................................... 293 Table 25 Freight road mileage conversion factors ............................................................................. 293 Table 26 Checklist of criteria for Tiers 1-4 ......................................................................................... 295 Table 27 Diagram of how the required EMS relates to the process and extraction phases................. 299 Table 28 Features of a top tier (1) comparable certification scheme: Standard setting....................... 300 SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 4 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Changes to this BREEAM Scheme Document A list of changes between this issue of the Scheme Document and previous issues is published in section 15 of this document. Issue number 1.0 Date of issue 02/01/2009 2.0 01/05/2010 2.1 25/05/2012 SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Terms and Conditions for accessing BREEAM Manuals 5 Terms and conditions for accessing the BREEAM Scheme Documents By accessing or using this website (www.breeam.org), you agree to these terms and conditions of use. Data Protection Act 1998 The Data Protection Act defines the legal responsibilities of data users such as ourselves. The Act governs the collection, storage, use and transfer of personal data, for example, name, address, email, age, etc. Accuracy, Use and Feedback We are committed to respecting the privacy of users entering this site and we recognise the importance of the responsible use of information collected on this site. We will do our best to maintain the accuracy of the personal information you supply to us. You have the right to access and correct your personal information at any time and if you wish to do so please contact us at [email protected] We will not sell or rent your personally identifiable information to anyone. On our website we may provide space for your comments and/or provide a short survey for you to complete. This is used only to help us refine the content and relevance of our website. It is not re-used or reapplied for any other purpose. Cookies We may track your visit to our site by giving you a cookie when you enter. Cookies are pieces of information sent to your browser on a web server and stored on your computer’s hard drive for record keeping purposes. We use Cookies to make visiting our site easier. Cookies allow us to save passwords for you so that you will not have to re-enter them the next time you visit. Cookies cannot be used to obtain other information from your hard disk. The Cookie is used to collect statistical information and is not used to identify individuals. Most browsers are initially set up to accept Cookies. If you prefer you can reset your browser either to notify you when you have received a Cookie or to refuse to accept Cookies. It is important to note that if you choose not to accept Cookies, or you set your browser not to accept Cookies, you may not be able to use certain features on our site. Aggregate Data In general, our service automatically gathers certain usage information about the numbers and frequency of visitors to our website. We only use such data as aggregate. This collected data helps us to determine how much our customers use parts of the site, so we can improve our site for your use. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 6 Terms and Conditions for accessing BREEAM Manuals BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 IP Address We may collect and track traffic by IP address. An IP address is a number assigned to your computer when you use your browser on internet. We log this information, but this information is never linked to any personally identifying information. It is used to audit the number of visitors coming to our website. Privacy Policy Changes If we decide to change our Privacy Policy, we will post those changes here so that you will always know what information we gather, how we might use that information and whether we will disclose it to anyone. Disclaimer BRE does not accept any responsibility for any loss or damage including, without limitation, indirect or consequential loss or damage, or any loss or damages whatsoever arising from use or loss of use of, data or profits arising out of or in connection with the use of BRE websites. BRE does not guarantee that access to and use of BRE websites will be uninterrupted or error-free. Mention of third party products, services, companies and websites on any BRE website is for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation. BRE’s websites hold a wide range of links to related websites from a variety of related organisations, companies and services. While every effort is made to check the content and accuracy of the websites we link to, BRE takes no responsibility for information contained on websites maintained by other organisations or for action taken as a result of information contained on websites maintained by other organisations. Copyright The information and images contained on our websites are the property of BRE unless explicitly stated to the contrary. They are protected by copyright laws. Material may be downloaded free of charge or printed without requiring specific permission but remains the intellectual property, technical know how and copyrighted material of BRE. Such material is not to be used in a derogatory manner, in a misleading context or for commercial purposes. If the material is being issued to others, the source including the web address and copyright status must be acknowledged. We may require you to register your details before downloading certain information or documents. Trade Marks BRE, BREEAM, EcoHomes, Smartwaste, SmartLIFE, Envest, the Green Guide, and Insight are all registered trade marks owned by BRE and may not be used without BRE’s written permission. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Terms and Conditions for accessing BREEAM Manuals 7 Governing Law These terms and conditions shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of England and Wales. Any dispute arising under these terms and conditions shall be subject to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of England and Wales. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 8 Introduction BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 1.0 Introduction 1.1 What is BREEAM? BREEAM (Building Research Establishment’s Environmental Assessment Method) is the world’s leading and most widely used environmental assessment method for buildings, with over 115,000 buildings certified and nearly 700,000 registered. It sets the standard for best practice in sustainable design and has become the de facto measure used to describe a building’s environmental performance. Credits are awarded in ten categories according to performance. These credits are then added together to produce a single overall score on a scale of Pass, Good, Very Good, Excellent and Outstanding. The operation of BREEAM is overseen by an independent Sustainability Board, representing a wide cross-section of construction industry stakeholders. Aims of BREEAM: • To mitigate the impacts of buildings on the environment • To enable buildings to be recognised according to their environmental benefits • To provide a credible, environmental label for buildings • To stimulate demand for sustainable buildings Objectives of BREEAM: • To provide market recognition to low environmental impact buildings • To ensure best environmental practice is incorporated in buildings • To set criteria and standards surpassing those required by regulations and challenge the market to provide innovative solutions that minimise the environmental impact of buildings • To raise the awareness of owners, occupants, designers and operators of the benefits of buildings with a reduced impact on the environment • To allow organisations to demonstrate progress towards corporate environmental objectives SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Introduction 1.2 Governance and Quality Standards The BRE Global “Sustainability Board” oversees BRE Global’s guides, publications, standards and certification schemes in the area of sustainability and the environment. Current standards and schemes include BREEAM, Environmental Profiles, Responsible Sourcing and ISO 14001. One of the main responsibilities of this Board is to ensure that standards, scheme documents and the way BRE Global operates meet the needs of stakeholders. The Board meets three times a year to review these issues. The Sustainability Board reports to the BRE Global Governing Body, which has an independent overview of all BRE Global's schemes and activities. Specific responsibilities of the Sustainability Board and other Boards include: • advising on the need for new standards, certification schemes and publications, including updates to existing ones • advising BRE Global on relevant legislation and technical matters • promoting certification • advising on issues that may affect the reputation and integrity of BRE Global • approving certification schemes, standards, publications or approvals and reviewing outputs from Expert Groups and Working Groups • ensuring a balanced participation with no single interest predominating • providing comments and guidance, where appropriate, on methods of assessment and testing, to review the progress of assessments and advise on content of certificates, prior to publication; and • reviewing and advising on complaints and appeals as requested. The Board represents a wide cross section of stakeholders from the construction industry including designers, developers, end users, financiers, insurers and regulators. The first independent chairman elected by the members is Bill Gething. Bill is one of the most respected figures in sustainable architecture and is the RIBA President's Sustainability Advisor, Chair of the Institute's Sustainable Futures Committee and a partner of Feilden Clegg Bradley Architects LLP. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 9 10 Introduction BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 ISO 9001 BRE Global has ISO 9001 certification for its BREEAM Buildings schemes and also for the assessment and certification of construction materials under the BREEAM LCA (Life Cycle Analysis) environmental profiles. The certification for the BREEAM schemes covers the operations relating to assessor training, licensing, quality management, and record keeping. UKAS Accreditation Assessors qualified to deliver the BREEAM buildings schemes are also covered under a UKAS accredited competent persons scheme. In addition, the operations relating to the certification of the BREEAM buildings versions and the environmental profiles are also covered under UKAS accredited product certification schemes. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Introduction 1.3 BREEAM Credibility Technical Credibility BREEAM is tried and tested, both in terms of its robust technical standards and its commercial delivery, and expert advice (based on scientific evidence) continues to inform almost every issue in BREEAM. In the UK there are over 115,000 buildings certified and over 700,000 homes and buildings currently registered for assessment. BREEAM can be used to assess any building type anywhere in the world. Robust Technical Standards BREEAM has always used objective criteria to recognise good environmental performance: • Issues for assessment are agreed to be significant, and offer worthwhile reductions in environmental impact • Issues must be assessable at the relevant stage in the building’s life • Performance levels are based on scientific evidence wherever possible • Performance levels must exceed demands of law and regulations and encourage innovation • Improvements encouraged by BREEAM are achievable and cost effective Where specific targets cannot be set using hard science or research, sensible practical measures are recommended to minimise environmental impact or enhance the environment of the building and its users. Commercial Credibility Assessments are undertaken by organisations and individuals trained and licensed by BRE Global (Assessors). This ensures: • Competition in the market for assessment services • Engagement with the whole of the industry • Assessors work to the same quality standards (monitored by BRE Global) BRE Global has gained UKAS (United Kingdom Accreditation Service) accreditation for all its BREEAM schemes. This means that its management of BREEAM is monitored and overseen by UKAS. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 11 12 Introduction BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 1.4 The BREEAM Scheme Document The following BREEAM Scheme Documents i.e. Assessor manuals are available for free download from the BREEAM website: • BREEAM Courts • BREEAM Education • BREEAM Industrial • BREEAM Healthcare • BREEAM Offices • BREEAM Retail • BREEAM Prisons • BREEAM Multi-residential • BREEAM Data Centres What is in the BREEAM Scheme Documents? • A definition of the scope of the BREEAM scheme • Full information on the technical standards and criteria of the scheme (summarised below) • Rating & scoring information • Technical checklists Using the BREEAM Scheme Documents The BREEAM Scheme Documents are technical guidance documents which have been created to aid accredited and licensed BREEAM Assessors in carrying out BREEAM assessments. Please note that a scheme document and the information detailed therein have been designed for, and to be used by trained, qualified and licensed BREEAM Assessors. This document must be used by non assessors for reference only (in accordance with the Terms and Conditions of use). SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Introduction Understanding the BREEAM Scheme Documents This BREEAM scheme covers ten categories of sustainability including: • Management • Materials • Health & Wellbeing • Waste • Energy • Land Use and Ecology • Transport • Pollution • Water • Innovation Each category is detailed in this Scheme Document and consists of a number of issues (summarised below). Each issue seeks to mitigate the impact of a new or refurbished building on the environment by defining a performance target and assessment criteria that must be met to confirm the target has been achieved. Where a performance target has been achieved the number of available BREEAM credits can be awarded. Table 1 Summary of BREEAM categories and main issues Management Waste • • • Commissioning Construction site impacts Security Health and Wellbeing • • • • • Daylight Occupant thermal comfort Acoustics Indoor air and water quality Lighting Energy • • • • Public transport network connectivity Pedestrian and Cyclist facilities Access to amenities Travel plans and information Water • • • Construction waste Recycled aggregates Recycling facilities Pollution • • • • • Refrigerant use and leakage Flood risk NOx emissions Watercourse pollution External light and noise pollution Land Use and Ecology CO2 emissions Low or zero carbon technologies Energy sub metering Energy efficient building systems Transport • • • • • • • • • • Site selection Protection of ecological features Mitigation/enhancement of ecological value Materials • • • • Embodied life cycle impact of materials Materials re-use Responsible sourcing Robustness Innovation Water consumption Leak detection Water re-use and recycling • • • Exemplary performance levels Use of BREEAM Accredited Professionals New technologies and building processes The performance targets go beyond the minimum standard needed to satisfy Building Regulation or other legislation. The targets represent good or best practice in the field of sustainable design and procurement. The majority of BREEAM issues are tradable, meaning that a design team/client can pick and choose which to comply with in order to build their BREEAM performance score. Several BREEAM SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 13 14 Introduction BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 issues do have minimum standards meaning that, to achieve a particular BREEAM rating, a defined number of credits for that issue must be achieved (BREEAM’s minimum standards are outlined in section 3.0 Scoring and Rating). Each BREEAM issue is structured as follows: • Issue Information: Issue ID, issue title, number of credits available for meeting the performance target and whether the issue forms part of BREEAM’s minimum standards. • Aim: Broadly outlines the objective of the issue i.e. the impact it intends to mitigate • Assessment Criteria: outlines the building performance target/benchmark and its criteria. Some issue have Exemplary Level Criteria. Where a building demonstrates that it meets Exemplary Level Criteria an Innovation Credit can be awarded (refer to section 13 Innovation for more detail) • Schedule of Evidence Required: outlines typical examples of the type of information that must be collected from the design team/client by the BREEAM assessor so they can assess if the building complies with the issue criteria. • Additional Information: details relevant definitions of BREEAM terminology and contains information to support the assessment and compliance of the building. The following pages contain an example BREEAM issue. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Introduction 15 Example of a BREEAM Issue Please note: this BREEAM issue has been edited for the purpose of demonstration. Information box appears at the top of each BREEAM issue. Each issue has a unique ID and title. The Aim describes the objective of the issue and the impact that the Assessment Criteria seeks to mitigate. Some BREEAM issues have Exemplary Level Criteria. If the assessed building complies with the Exemplary Level Criteria an additional BREEAM credit can be awarded for Innovation. See section 13 Innovation for further detail. This box indicates the total number of BREEAM credits available. These credits can be awarded if the assessed building complies with the assessment criteria. This box states whether or not minimum standards apply to the BREEAM issue. Section 3.3 of the guidance details the specific minimum standards for each relevant BREEAM issue. For example, one of the two available credits for the Man 2 issue must be achieved to obtain an Excellent BREEAM rating. The Assessment Criteria details the requirements that the assessed building must demonstrate compliance with for the available BREEAM credits to be awarded. Occasionally publications and other standards will be referred to within the Assessment Criteria followed by a reference number. Full references to these publications are provided in section 17 of this document. Each BREEAM issue contains a Compliance Notes table. This table provides additional guidance on the application and interpretation of the Assessment Criteria. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 16 Introduction The Schedule of Evidence Required table describes the types of information that must be provided to the BREEAM assessor as evidence of the assessed building’s compliance with the Assessment Criteria. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 The Schedule of Evidence table is split in to two sections. The first details the type(s) of evidence required at the interim design stage of assessment. The second describes the type(s) of evidence required at the final post construction stage of assessment. The numbers in the table correspond to the numbered assessment criteria in the above sections. The Additional Information section contains definitions of terms used in the Assessment Criteria and Compliance Notes section. This section will also contain further information relevant to the issue e.g. assessment guidance and relevant websites BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Scope 17 2.0 Scope This section of the guidance outlines the scope of this non-domestic BREEAM scheme and the type of buildings that it can be applied to. The following information is provided in this section: • The BREEAM assessment and certification stages • Type of building projects that can be assessed using BREEAM • Type of buildings that can be assessed using this BREEAM scheme Non-domestic BREEAM schemes can be used to assess the environmental impacts of a building in accordance with this scope document in England, Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland. Assessments using UK BREEAM schemes can also be carried out in the Republic of Ireland, but it must be recognised that BREEAM is tailored to the UK’s construction sector. No concessions are made in the schemes where the Republic of Ireland building standards and design and procurement practices differ from those in the UK. Where the building requiring assessment does not fall within the scope of this non-domestic BREEAM scheme or one of the other BREEAM schemes (domestic or non-domestic) or Code for Sustainable Homes, it can be assessed using the BREEAM Bespoke scheme. Where the building requiring assessment is outside of the UK it can be assessed using the BREEAM International scheme; this includes buildings in the Republic of Ireland where it is not appropriate to use a UK scheme. BREEAM International can be used to assess a single development or BRE Global can assist in creating a BREEAM scheme for a country or region. Further information on the BREEAM Bespoke and BREEAM International schemes is available at www.breeam.org or via the BREEAM helpdesk [email protected] SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 18 Scope BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 2.1 Stages of assessment This BREEAM scheme can be used to assess the environmental impacts arising as a result of an individual building development (including external site areas) at the following stages: 1. Design Stage (DS) - leading to an Interim BREEAM Certificate 2. Post-Construction Stage (PCS) – leading to a Final BREEAM Certificate Design Stage The DS assessment and subsequent interim BREEAM Certification represents the performance of the building at the design stage of assessment, typically prior to the beginning of operations on site. Certification at this stage does not, therefore, represent the building’s final ‘as built’ BREEAM performance. To complete an assessment at this stage the design must be advanced to the point where the relevant information is available to enable the BREEAM assessor to demonstrate, in a robust manner, the building’s performance against the reporting and evidential criteria of the technical guidance. The interim DS assessment will therefore be completed and certified at the scheme design or detailed design stages. Post-Construction Stage The PCS assessment and subsequent BREEAM Certification represents the final ‘as built’ performance and BREEAM Rating. A final PCS assessment is completed and certified after practical completion of the building works. There are two approaches to assessment at the post-construction stage: 1. A post-construction review of an interim design-stage assessment 2. A post-construction assessment A post-construction review serves to confirm the interim BREEAM rating achieved at the design stage in accordance with the reporting and evidential criteria of the technical guidance. Where a formal interim DS assessment has not been carried out and a BREEAM assessment and rating is required, a full PCS assessment can be conducted. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Scope 19 2.2 Type of projects that can be assessed using BREEAM A BREEAM assessment can be carried out at the above stages for the following types of building project: • New Construction • Major refurbishment to existing buildings • New construction to an existing building i.e. an extension of existing building • A combination of new construction and major refurbishment to an existing building • New construction or major refurbishment, which forms part of a larger mixed use building New construction Construction that results in a new stand alone structure, or extension to an existing structure, which will come into operation/use for the first time upon completion of the works. Major refurbishments to existing buildings Construction that results in the fundamental remodelling or adaptation of existing elements of the building envelope, structure and renewal of key building services. And where, on completion of the works, such remodelling / renewal will materially impact on the performance of the building. The term elements include: a. Structural/building envelope elements including walls (including glazing), roofs (including rooflights) and floors. b. Building services elements including lighting (artificial and daylighting), heating, mechanical ventilation/cooling plant and ductwork, water/drainage systems. For the purposes of this definition works to both A and B above must be taking place for the project to be classed as a major refurbishment. Where only individual elements of the structural/building envelope element (e.g. windows or doors), or individual services elements (e.g. a boiler, heating system or lighting installation) are being replaced, remodelled or upgraded, then, the project should not be classed a major refurbishment (see minor refurbishment guidance below). It should be noted that all major refurbishment projects will reuse the majority of the buildings existing supporting sub and superstructure and it is likely that in many cases the building façade will be retained, albeit with some remediation or renovation. Minor refurbishment, remodelling or redecoration This BREEAM Scheme and the requirements it sets are predominantly designed to assess the environmental impacts of buildings arising as a result of new and major refurbishment construction SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 20 Scope BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 works (as defined above). The requirements are therefore tailored according to the opportunities available to influence a buildings environmental performance when major construction work is undertaken. Unless otherwise stated, this scheme is not intended for the assessment of existing buildings undergoing minor remodelling or redecoration works. Existing building fit out works can be assessed within a number of sector schemes including Offices, Retail, Industrial, Education, Healthcare and Bespoke schemes. If there is uncertainty over the appropriateness of applying BREEAM to existing building works that do not meet BREEAM’s definition of major refurbishment, advice can be sought from and the decision informed by a BREEAM Accredited Professional or BREEAM Assessor. New build extensions to existing buildings BREEAM can be used to assess new build extensions to existing buildings and, where the existing building is undergoing major refurbishment, the new build extension and existing building. When assessing only a new-build extension to an existing building, in some BREEAM issues it is necessary to consider services/facilities within the existing building, where such services/facilities will be integral to the new extension or used by the occupants of the new extension. Assessment guidance is provided in the Compliance Notes table within the specific BREEAM issue for such instances, where relevant. Similar buildings (or units) on the same site It is possible to assess a number of separate but similar buildings, or individual units within a larger building development, within one BREEAM assessor’s report. This is subject to the following conditions: 1. The buildings/units must all be on the same site 2. The buildings/units must be of the same building type e.g. an office, with the same building functions/spaces and fitted out to a similar specification and therefore assessed using the same BREEAM issues 3. Each BREEAM issue must be assessed, and its credits awarded, based on the worst performing building/unit 4. The assessment and assessors report produces a single BREEAM rating covering all buildings/units assessed For the above scenario, a single BREEAM certificate will be issued listing all the buildings/units covered by the single BREEAM assessor’s report. Where required, a duplicate of the certificate can be produced for the purposes of display in each individual building/unit. Duplicates of certificates are not chargeable provided they are requested by the BREEAM assessor along with the initial certification request to BRE Global. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Scope 21 Alternatively, a certificate can be produced specific to each individual building/unit. In such cases an additional charge will be made for each individual certificate requested. In either case the certification criteria must be confirmed by the assessor on the Certificate Request Form submitted with their formal assessment report to BRE Global. If one or more building/unit performs markedly better than another on the same site and the client wishes to recognise this, a separate BREEAM assessment and therefore certificate is required. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 22 Scope BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 2.3 Type of buildings that can be assessed using this BREEAM scheme BREEAM Multi-residential is intended for use on multi-occupancy residential buildings which are not suitable for assessment under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH) in England, Wales and Northern Ireland, or EcoHomes in Scotland. The BREEAM Multi-residential scheme provides a whole building assessment methodology which can also be applied to buildings which contain dwellings assessed under the CSH, but also communal facilities within the same building, to allow assessment of the whole building. BREEAM Multi-residential can be used to assess the following types of buildings: • Student halls of residence • Key worker accommodation • Care homes that do not consists of extensive medical facilities (consulting rooms and medical rooms are acceptable) • Sheltered housing • Other multi-residential buildings which contain a mix of residential accommodation with communal areas that make up 10% or more of the total Net Internal Floor area The building functions/areas listed below are covered by the scope of BREEAM Multi-Residential where they form a part of one of the above building types: • • Individual bedrooms • Self contained dwellings (which may also require a separate CSH rooms • Kitchen and catering areas: servery; dining • café areas) • • Leisure areas: gyms; fitness rooms; therapy rooms; hairdressers assessment/certificate) • Meeting rooms: training rooms; conference Health areas: consulting rooms; medical/1st Aid rooms; treatment rooms General communal areas: lounges; day • Laundry: communal laundry, drying rooms rooms; reading rooms • Other spaces: small internal shop/kiosk; Offices: admin areas, IT rooms workshop spaces The following buildings are currently not suitable for assessment under BREEAM Multi-residential: • Hotels, bed and breakfast type accommodation and youth hostels • Military accommodation SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Scope 23 The above list is not exhaustive, but serves to indicate the type of areas covered by the scope of this BREEAM scheme. Where a proposed building contains a small additional function/area that is not listed above, the building can still be assessed using this scheme. If the assessor has reason to believe that this scheme is not appropriate given the small additional function/area type, BRE Global can be contacted for scheme classification advice. Building types not covered by the scope of BREEAM Multi-residential could be assessed using another BREEAM scheme. All BREEAM Scheme Documents can be downloaded from www.breeam.org each document details the scope of that particular scheme. Alternatively, if the building does not fall within the scope of an existing BREEAM scheme it can be assessed using the BREEAM Bespoke scheme. BREEAM Multi-residential and the Code for Sustainable Homes BREEAM Multi-residential provides a whole building assessment methodology which can also be applied to a building containing self contained dwellings and communal facilities. In this case, please note that a minimum of 10% of the total net floor area of the building needs to consist of communal areas in order for a BREEAM Multi-residential assessment to be appropriate. Please note that student halls of residences can always be assessed using the BREEAM Multiresidential scheme regardless of whether the building consists of less than 10% communal areas or not. Where both a Code for Sustainable Homes and a BREEAM Multi-residential assessment are required, to avoid duplication of effort evidence collected for the CSH assessment can be used towards demonstrating compliance with the equivalent Multi-residential assessment criteria and vice versa. A large number of issues within BREEAM Multi-residential are assessed on the same basis as the CSH and where such similarities exist, this has been noted in the compliance notes for each BREEAM Multiresidential issue to simplify the assessment process. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 24 Scoring and Rating BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 3.0 Scoring and Rating This section of the BREEAM Scheme Document explains how an assessed building’s certified BREEAM rating is calculated. There are a number of elements that determine the BREEAM rating; these are as follows: • BREEAM rating benchmarks • BREEAM environmental weightings • Minimum BREEAM standards • BREEAM credits for Innovation Each of these elements is described in the sections on the following pages; this is followed by guidance and an example describing how a BREEAM rating is calculated. In addition, there is a section describing the conditions that must be met in order to award an assessed building a ‘BREEAM Outstanding’ rating, the highest achievable BREEAM rating. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Scoring and Rating 25 3.1 Rating benchmarks The rating benchmarks for the 2008 version of BREEAM are outlined in table 2 below for new buildings, major refurbishments and, where applicable to the BREEAM scheme (refer to scope document), fit-out projects: Table 2 BREEAM 2008 rating benchmarks BREEAM Rating % score UNCLASSIFIED <30 PASS ≥30 GOOD ≥45 V GOOD ≥55 EXCELLENT ≥70 OUTSTANDING* ≥85 * Please note: there are additional criteria for achieving a BREEAM Outstanding rating. Please refer to the guidance below. 3.2 Environmental section weightings Table 3 below outlines the environmental weightings for the nine BREEAM sections for the type of building projects that BREEAM Buildings can be used to assess (refer to scope of the scheme document): Table 3 BREEAM 2008 environmental weightings Weighting (%) Management 12 Building fit-out only (where applicable to scheme) 13 Health & Wellbeing 15 17 Energy 19 21 Transport 8 9 Water 6 7 Materials 12.5 14 Waste 7.5 8 Land Use & Ecology 10 N/A Pollution 10 11 Innovation 10 10 BREEAM Section New builds, extensions & major refurbishments SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 26 Scoring and Rating BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 3.3 Minimum standards To achieve a BREEAM rating, the minimum percentage score must be achieved (as outlined in table 2 above) and the minimum standards (i.e. number of credits achieved) applicable to that rating level (below) complied with. Table 4 Minimum BREEAM standards PASS GOOD VERY GOOD EXCELLENT OUTSTANDING BREEAM Rating / Minimum number of credits Man 1 - Commissioning 1 1 1 1 2 Man 2 - Considerate Constructors - - - 1 2 Man 4 - Building user guide - - - 1 1 Man 9 - Publication of building information (BREEAM Education only) - - - - 1 Man 10 - Development as a learning resource (BREEAM Education only) - - - - 1 Hea 4 - High frequency lighting 1 1 1 1 1 Hea 12 - Microbial contamination 1 1 1 1 1 Ene 1 - Reduction of CO2 emissions - - - 6 10 Ene 2 - Sub-metering of substantial energy uses - - 1 1 1 Ene 5 - Low or zero carbon technologies - - - 1 1 Wat 1 - Water consumption - 1 1 1 2 Wat 2 - Water meter - 1 1 1 1 Wst 3 - Storage of recyclable waste - - - 1 1 LE 4 - Mitigating ecological impact - - 1 1 1 BREEAM issue BREEAM’s minimum standards and minor refurbishment projects BREEAM’s minimum standards applicable to the PASS, GOOD and VERY GOOD rating levels may be exempt for smaller scale refurbishment or fit out projects where the design/project team confirms the SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Scoring and Rating 27 following to the BREEAM Assessor (who in turn will determine which of BREEAM’s minimum standards apply1): • That the project meets BREEAM’s refurbishment/fit-out definition (see note 2 below) • The proposed scope of works and budget • That the scope of the works excludes the area/function to which the minimum standard(s) relate(see note 3 below) • The approximate cost of complying with a particular minimum standard and therefore it’s potential for feasibly complying given the projects scope/budget • The environmental impact, if any, of ensuring the existing system/building will comply, when such works fall outside of the projects initial scope. For example; for issue Hea 4, having to replace/upgrade an existing but functioning lighting system that does not require replacement. • The design team demonstrates what feasible measures, if any, they can and will take to meet the aim of the BREEAM issue, if not the criteria. It should be noted that the relevant BREEAM assessment issues, for which there are minimum standards, are still applicable to all refurbishment and fit out projects and must still be assessed for compliance. The above exemption simply means that, if the credit for one of the issues is not feasibly achievable given the scope of the project, it will not prevent the building from achieving a PASS, GOOD or VERY GOOD rating. The above exemption cannot be applied to those refurbishment or fit out projects seeking to achieve an Excellent or Outstanding rating i.e. to achieve the higher rating levels the project must comply with the minimum standards applicable to that rating level (as defined in the table above). 1 The BREEAM Assessor will in turn need to identify the relevant issues to BRE Global, who will then provide an amended Assessment Tool for the specific project. 2 Where the project is part new-build-part-refurbishment this policy can apply to the refurbishment element, provided it complies with the above. However, the new build element of the building must meet the relevant minimum standards. 3 If for example the scope of the refurbishment work includes replacing sanitary fittings, then it would not be appropriate to exempt the project from the minimum standards for BREEAM issue Wat 1 Water Consumption, likewise for other BREEAM issues with minimum standards. Where feasible the project must comply with all, or the relevant minimum standards. The BREEAM Assessor will determine, based on the evidence provided to them by the project/design team, those minimum standards which can justifiably be exempt. Any exemption must be verifiable, in accordance with the above guidance and will be subject to BRE Global’s BREEAM Quality Assurance procedures. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 28 Scoring and Rating BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 3.4 BREEAM credits for innovation Innovation credits provide additional recognition for a building that innovates in the field of sustainable performance, above and beyond the level that is currently recognised and rewarded within standard BREEAM issues. Innovation credits therefore enable clients and design teams to boost their building’s BREEAM performance and in addition, help support the market for new innovative technologies and practices. An additional 1% score can be added to a building’s final BREEAM score for each Innovation credit achieved. The maximum number of Innovation credits that can be awarded for any one building assessed is 10; therefore the maximum available score achieved for ‘innovation’ is 10%. Innovation credits can be awarded regardless of the final BREEAM rating i.e. they are awardable at any BREEAM rating level. There are three different ways in which a building can achieve an Innovation credit (all of which are summarised below and detailed in section 13 Innovation). The first is by meeting exemplary performance criteria for an existing BREEAM issue (table 5 outlines the BREEAM issues with exemplary performance criteria). Table 5 BREEAM issues with exemplary level criteria. Man 2 - Considerate Constructors Hea 1 - Daylighting Hea 14 - Office Space (BREEAM Retail & Industrial Schemes only) Ene 1 - Reduction of CO2 emissions Ene 5 - Low or Zero Carbon Technologies Wat 2 - Water Meter Mat 1 - Materials Specification Mat 5 - Responsible Sourcing of Materials Wst 1 - Construction Site Waste Management The second route is where the client/design team sets a specific BREEAM performance targets/objectives and appoints a BREEAM Accredited Professional (AP) throughout the key project work stages to help deliver a building that meets the performance objectives and target BREEAM rating. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Scoring and Rating 29 The final and third route is where an application is made to BRE Global by the BREEAM Assessor to have a particular building feature, system or process recognised as ‘innovative’. If the application is successful an Innovation credit can be awarded. The flow chart and eligibility criteria below outline the decision-making process to be used when applying for an Innovation credit (see also section 13 Innovation for further detail on the application and judging process). An additional fee is charged for each innovation credit application received. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 30 Scoring and Rating BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 BREEAM Innovation credit: application flow chart Identify innovative feature or process not covered by existing BREEAM criteria Does innovation comply with the eligibility criteria? No Is there a BREEAM credit which already includes the issue? Yes No Feature or process is not relevant, so an innovation credit will not be awarded Yes Does it exceed the standard credit criteria? Submit a completed innovation credit application form No Yes Does it meet the criteria of the Exemplary Performance level? Application will be reviewed by a judging panel. No Yes Yes Does the credit application meet the criteria of the judging panel? No Yes Innovation credit can be awarded SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 Has additional evidence or information been requested? No An exemplary performance credit can be awarded in the innovation section No Innovation credit will be available BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Scoring and Rating 31 3.5 Eligibility Criteria for Innovation Credits The following criteria will be used to evaluate the eligibility of claims for proposed Innovation credit status: 1. Does the feature, system or process aim to reduce the building’s impact on one of the following overarching environmental/social issues? • Mineral Resource Depletion • Waste Disposal • Fossil Fuel Depletion • Water Use • Acidification • Deforestation • Climate Change • Urban Sprawl • Nuclear Waste • Reduction of Biodiversity • Stratospheric Ozone Depletion • Noise and Nuisance • Eco-toxicity • Loss of Heritage • Eutrophication • Indoor comfort • Human Toxicity • Health and Safety • Photochemical • Access and Inclusion Ozone Creation (Summer Smog) 2. Can the impact of the feature, system or process be assessed objectively using clearly defined criteria? 3. Can the sustainability benefits of the feature, system or process be demonstrated? 4. Have a draft aim, assessment criteria and information required to demonstrate compliance been developed (in accordance with the Innovation credit application form)? A BREEAM assessor can obtain the Innovation credit application form from the BREEAM Office at BRE Global or via the Assessor’s Extranet. The form details the eligibility criteria listed above and the fee payable for each submitted application for an Innovation credit. Innovation credits cannot be awarded until written approval is received from the BREEAM Office. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 32 Scoring and Rating BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 3.6 How to calculate a building’s rating A BREEAM assessor must determine the BREEAM rating using the BREEAM Assessor’s Spreadsheet Tool and associated calculators. An indication of performance against the BREEAM scheme can also be determined using a BREEAM Pre-Assessment Estimator. The Pre-Assessment Estimators are available from the BREEAM website for each scheme. The process of determining a BREEAM rating is outlined below and in table 6: 1. For each BREEAM section the number of credits awarded must be determined by a BREEAM assessor in accordance with BREEAM’s assessment criteria (detailed in the technical sections of the Scheme Document). 2. The percentage of the credits achieved is calculated for each BREEAM section. 3. The percentage of credits achieved is then multiplied by the corresponding BREEAM section weighting (see note below). This gives the section score. 4. The section scores are then added together to give the overall BREEAM score. The BREEAM score is compared to the benchmarks in table 2 and, provided all minimum standards have been met, the relevant BREEAM rating is achieved. 5. An additional 1% can be added to the final BREEAM score for each Innovation credit achieved (up to a maximum of 10%). Note: Where applicable to the BREEAM scheme (see Scope of the BREEAM Scheme), Fit-Out only assessments do not assess the BREEAM issues under the Land Use & Ecology section. The section weighting for Land Use and Ecology is re-distributed amongst the remaining eight sections. The redistribution is determined based on the relative weighting of the remaining sections, so for example, the Energy section receives a greater proportion of the Land Use and Ecology weighting than the Water section. See Table 3 above for details of the respective section weighting. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Scoring and Rating 33 BREEAM Section Credits Achieved Credits Available % of Credits Achieved Section Weighting Section score Table 6 Example BREEAM score and rating calculation Management 7 10 70% 0.12 8.40% Health & Wellbeing 11 14 79% 0.15 11.79 % Energy 10 21 48% 0.19 9.05% Transport 5 10 50% 0.08 4.00% Water 4 6 67% 0.06 4.00% Materials 6 12 50% 0.125 6.25% Waste 3 7 43% 0.075 3.21% Land Use & Ecology 4 10 40% 0.10 4.00% Pollution 5 12 42% 0.10 4.17% Innovation 1 10 10% 0.10 1% Final BREEAM score 55.87% BREEAM Rating VERY GOOD Minimum Standards for BREEAM ‘Very Good’ rating Achieved? Man 1 - Commissioning P Hea 4 - High frequency lighting P Hea 12 - Microbial contamination P Ene 2 Sub-metering of substantial energy uses P Wat 1 - Water consumption P Wat 2 - Water meter P LE 4 - Mitigating ecological impact P SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 34 Scoring and Rating BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 3.7 BREEAM Outstanding Rating The following conditions must be met in order to certify a building at the Outstanding BREEAM rating level: 1. The building must achieve a final BREEAM Score ≥85% 2. The minimum performance standards (table 4) for the Outstanding rating level must have been met 3. Provision of material for the production and publication of a case study (refer to guidance below) on the Outstanding rated building. In addition to the above, the ‘BREEAM Outstanding’ building is required to obtain a BREEAM In Use Certification of Performance within the first three years of the building’s operation and use (with regular reviews in accordance with that scheme) in order to maintain the rating. Where the building is not certified against BREEAM In Use during this period, the Outstanding rating will be downgraded to an Excellent BREEAM rating after the expiry of the three years from issue of the Final BREEAM 2008 (Post Construction) certificate. Production of case study One of the most important aspects of the Outstanding BREEAM rating will be that projects receiving this rating will act as exemplars for the industry. It is therefore a very important aspect of the new rating that a good-quality case study is produced that design teams can refer to. The design team and client will be asked via the certificate request form to agree to provide relevant building/project information to allow BRE Global to produce a case study. This information will be required with the formal post construction stage BREEAM assessor’s report for the assessed building. Subject to approval from the design team/client, BRE Global will publish the case study on either the BREEAM website, Green Book live website and other BRE/BREEAM-related publications (as appropriate). Where information is not provided for the production of a case study, the building will be certified to a BREEAM Excellent rating level. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Man 1 Commissioning 35 4.0 Management Issue ID Man 1 Issue Title Commissioning No. of credits available 2 Minimum standards Yes Aim To recognise and encourage an appropriate level of building services commissioning that is carried out in a co-ordinated and comprehensive manner, thus ensuring optimum performance under actual occupancy conditions. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: First credit 1. An appropriate project team member(s) is appointed to monitor and programme precommissioning, commissioning and, where necessary, re-commissioning on behalf of the client. 2. Commissioning to be carried out in line with current Building Regulations and BSRIA1 and CIBSE2 guidelines, where applicable. 3. The main contractor accounts for the commissioning programme, responsibilities and criteria within the main programme of works. 4. A specialist commissioning manager is appointed (by either client or contractor) for complex systems such as: • • • • • • Air conditioning Mechanical ventilation, displacement ventilation, complex passive ventilation Building management systems (BMS) Renewable energy sources Microbiological safety cabinets and fume cupboards Cold storage enclosures and refrigeration plant The specialist commissioning manager must have been appointed during the design stage and the scope of their responsibility includes: • Design input: commissionability design reviews • Commissioning management input to construction programming • Commissioning management input during installation stages • Management of commissioning, performance testing and handover/post handover stages. 5. Where BMS specified, the following commissioning procedures must be carried out: a. Commissioning of air and water systems is carried out when all control devices are installed, wired and functional SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 36 Man 1 Commissioning BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 b. In addition to air and water flow results, commissioning results include physical measurements of room temperatures, off coil temperatures and other key parameters as appropriate c. The BMS/controls installation should be running in auto with satisfactory internal conditions prior to handover d. All BMS schematics and graphics (if BMS is present) are fully installed and functional to user interface before handover e. The occupier will be fully trained in the operation of the system. Second credit 1. The first credit has been achieved. 2. The above appointment(s) include the following seasonal commissioning responsibilities over a minimum 12 month period, once the building becomes occupied: Complex Systems – Specialist commissioning manager a. Testing of all building services under full load conditions, i.e. heating equipment in midwinter, cooling/ventilation equipment in mid-summer, and under part load conditions (spring/autumn) b. Where applicable, testing should also be carried out during periods of extreme (high or low) occupancy c. Interviews with building occupants (where they are affected by the complex services) to identify problems or concerns regarding the effectiveness of the systems d. Re-commissioning of systems (following any work needed to serve revised loads), and incorporating any revisions in operating procedures into the O&M manuals. Where specialist building services systems such as fume cupboards, microbiological safety cabinets and a cold storage system are present then the assessor must ensure that these systems are included in the specialist commissioning agent’s responsibilities. Simple Systems (naturally ventilated) – External Consultant/Facilities Manager a. Review thermal comfort, ventilation, and lighting, at three, six and nine month intervals after initial occupation, either by measurement or occupant feedback. b. Take all reasonable steps to re-commission systems following the review and incorporate any relevant revisions in operating procedures into the O&M manuals. Compliance Notes New Build Refurbishment Extensions to existing buildings Commissioning monitor (simple systems) Specialist commissioning manager Naturally ventilated buildings There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. The commissioning monitor can be a person from within the contractor or sub-contractor organisation, provided they are not involved in the general installation works. The commissioning manager for complex systems must be a specialist contractor rather than a general sub-contractor. Where the building is largely naturally ventilated, using simple cross-flow ventilation relying solely on openable windows and/or trickle vents (except in areas where mechanical ventilation is legally required), the appointment of a specialist commissioning agent is not required to award this credit. If a BMS system is employed, however, to control the natural ventilation and/or if renewable energy sources are utilised in the development, the requirement for a specialist commissioning agent remains. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Man 1 Commissioning 37 Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage First Credit 1&4 A copy of a letter or commissioning responsibilities schedule confirming the appointment of [or commitment to appoint]: • Design team member(s) as commissioning monitor and scope of their commissioning role. • Specialist commissioning manager and scope of their commissioning role. Commissioning records/reports confirming: • Monitoring actions carried out by the nominated design team member. • Specialist commissioning manager’s actions/role. 2 A copy of the specification clause stating: • The standards and codes of practice to which commissioning procedures are to comply with. A copy of the specification clause confirming: • The managing contractor’s responsibilities with respect to this requirement. Commissioning records/reports confirming: • Commissioning procedures executed in compliance with relevant standards. 3 A copy of the main contract programme highlighting; • Commissioning, performance testing and handover period. OR 5 A copy of a commissioning schedule highlighting: • Managing contractor’s commissioning responsibilities. A copy of the specification clause/commissioning schedule confirming: • The stages of the BMS/Controls commissioning procedures. Second Credit 1 Evidence (as outlined above) confirming compliance with the first credit. 2 As evidence criteria for 1 & 3 of the first credit. This evidence must confirm the scope of seasonal commissioning responsibilities/tasks (as required). Commissioning records/reports confirming that; • BMS/controls commissioning activities were carried out in compliance with the commissioning schedule/specification clause. Evidence (as outlined above) confirming compliance with the first credit. A copy of the seasonal commissioning schedule/programme. OR A copy of the letter of appointment of commissioning specialist and scope of their responsibilities. Additional Information Relevant definitions None. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 38 Man 2 Considerate Constructors Issue ID Man 2 Issue Title Considerate Constructors BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available 2 Minimum standards Yes Aim To recognise and encourage construction sites which are managed in an environmentally and socially considerate and accountable manner. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. The main contractor has complied with and achieved formal certification under the Considerate Constructors Scheme(CCS), credits awarded as follows: (see Checklist A1) a. One credit where the contractor achieved a CCS Code of Considerate Practice score between 24 and 31.5. b. Two credits where the contractor achieved a CCS Code of Considerate Practice score between 32 and 35.5. OR 2. The main contractor has complied with an alternative, independently assessed scheme (equivalent to CCS), credits awarded as follows: (see Checklist A2) a. One credit where the site has been independently assessed using the alternative scheme, AND the alternative scheme addresses all the mandatory items plus 50% of the optional items in Checklist A2. b. Two credits where the site is to be independently assessed using the alternative scheme AND the alternative scheme addresses all the mandatory items plus 80% of the optional items in Checklist A2. Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM issue: 1. The main contractor has complied with and achieved a certified CCS Code of Considerate Practice score of 36 or more. OR 2. The main contractor has complied in full with the alternative, independently assessed scheme, and the alternative scheme addresses all the mandatory and optional items in Checklist A2. Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. Refurbishment There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Man 2 Considerate Constructors 39 Extensions to existing buildings There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. Considerate Constructors score No credits can be awarded for the Considerate Constructors Scheme where any of the section scores within the scheme are less than 3, as this represents non compliance with the CCS Code of Considerate Practice. Site monitored by CCS more than once Often a site will be visited by the CCS Monitor more than once. The CCS Certificate will be awarded based on the results of the Monitor’s final visit. At the final stage of the BREEAM assessment the number of BREEAM credits awarded should therefore be based on the final visit and the subsequent Monitor’s report and certified CCS score. At the interim design stage of assessment, where the contractor is not yet appointed, the client must either include within the specification, or commit to including, a requirement for the appointed contractor to comply with one of the above criteria. The assessor must use this information to complete the appropriate checklist. Where the project is using an alternative scheme to the CCS, it is the alternative scheme and its assessment criteria that are assessed against Checklist A2, NOT the project or its contractor. Contractor not yet appointed Alternative scheme Site clearance The scope of this issue applies to the main contractor and their scope of works. If the scope of the main contractor’s works includes demolition and site clearance then this stage of work falls within the scope of the credit criteria. CSH assessed dwellings For buildings with self-contained dwellings also being assessed under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies: Credits achieved under issue Man 2 of the CSH assessment can also be applied to issue Man 2 of the BREEAM Multi-residential assessment. If an alternative to the Considerate Constructors Scheme is used, additional items present in BREEAM 2008 Checklist A2 must also have been met in the CSH assessment including those items highlighted in checklist A2. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. 1 Design Stage A copy of the relevant section of the main contract specification confirming: • A requirement to comply with the CCS • The minimum score to be achieved in each CCS section. Post Construction Stage A copy of the Considerate Constructors Scheme certificate of compliance. The Considerate Constructors Monitors report highlighting the total score and the sub scores in each section. OR OR: A formal letter from the client/developer confirming: • The main contract will include a clause requiring CCS certification • The scope of the main contractor’s works • A completed copy of checklist A1. OR Evidence in line with the Design Stage evidence requirements of the CSH issue Man 2 Evidence in line with the Post Construction Stage evidence requirements on the CSH issue Man 2. OR A copy of the Post Construction Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH issue Man 2. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 40 Man 2 Considerate Constructors BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 OR A copy of the Design Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH issue Man 2 2 A copy of the assessment criteria for the alternative scheme that allows the assessor to complete checklist A2. A copy of the compliance report (and any certification) for the alternative scheme. OR: AND A formal letter from the client/developer confirming: • The main contract will include a clause requiring compliance with the alternative scheme • The procedure, and individual/ organisation responsible for third party assessment of site compliance. • The scope of the main contractor’s works Evidence in line with the Post Construction Stage evidence requirements on the CSH issue Man 2. OR A copy of the Post Construction Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH issue Man 2. OR where relevant Evidence in line with the Design Stage evidence requirements of the CSH issue Man 2. OR A copy of the Design Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH issue Man 2* Exemplary Credit 1-2 A formal letter from the main contractor confirming their commitment to: • Gaining CCS or equivalent certification • A minimum score of ≥36 or equivalent. OR where relevant Evidence in line with the Design Stage evidence requirements of the CHS issue Man 2. OR A copy of the Design Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of CCS points achieved for CSH issue Man 2. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 Evidence as outlined above for req.1. BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Man 2 Considerate Constructors 41 Additional Information Relevant definitions Considerate Constructors Scheme is a UK certification scheme that encourages the considerate management of construction sites. The scheme is operated by the Construction Confederation and points are awarded in increments of 0.5 over the following eight sections: • • • • • • • • Considerate Environmentally Aware Site Cleanliness Good Neighbour Respectful Safe Responsible Accountable To achieve certification under this scheme a score of at least 24 is required. www.considerateconstructorsscheme.org.uk Alternative local or national schemes: Where the client/contractor has not used the Considerate Constructors Scheme (CCS) but has made a firm commitment to adopt an alternative independently assessed scheme covering the key issues in Checklist A2, the credits can still be achieved. The purpose of Checklist A2 is to enable the assessor to check whether an alternative, independently assessed scheme complies with the BREEAM assessment criteria. It is not in itself an equivalent construction site management scheme. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 42 Man 3 Construction Site Impacts Issue ID Man 3 Issue Title Construction Site Impacts BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available 4 Minimum standards No Aim To recognise and encourage construction sites managed in an environmentally sound manner in terms of resource use, energy consumption and pollution. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. One credit where evidence provided demonstrates that 2 or more of items a-g (listed below) are achieved. OR Two credits where evidence provided demonstrates that 4 or more of items a-g (listed below) are achieved. OR Three credits where evidence provided demonstrates that 6 or more of items a-g (listed below) achieved: a. b. c. d. e. Monitor, report and set targets for CO2 or energy arising from site activities Monitor, report and set targets for CO2 or energy arising from transport to and from site Monitor, report and set targets for water consumption arising from site activities Implement best practice policies in respect of air (dust) pollution arising from the site Implement best practice policies in respect of water (ground and surface) pollution occurring on the site f. Main contractor has an environmental materials policy, used for sourcing of construction materials to be utilised on site g. Main contractor operates an Environmental Management System. The Assessment Criteria for items a-g are detailed in the relevant section of Checklist A3. 2. One credit where evidence provided demonstrates that at least 80% of site timber is responsibly sourced and 100% is legally sourced. Compliance Notes New Build Refurbishment Extensions to existing buildings There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 CSH assessed dwellings Man 3 Construction Site Impacts 43 For buildings with self-contained dwellings also being assessed under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies: Credits achieved under issue Man 3 of the CSH cannot be applied directly to issue Man 3 of BREEAM Multi-residential, due to the different number of credits and additional issues assessed in BREEAM. Where specific criteria in this BREEAM issue, identical to that of the CSH, have been demonstrably achieved under a CSH assessment, then the CSH assessment and evidence of compliance can be used to assess and demonstrate compliance with the relevant corresponding criteria in this BREEAM issue. Site timber The fourth credit (for responsibly sourced site timber) is not dependent on any of the first three credits being achieved. For the purpose of assessing this issue, site timber is considered to be timber used to facilitate construction, including formwork, site hoardings and other temporary site timber used for the purpose of facilitating construction. It does not cover structural timber and timber used for fit-out items (this is addressed in BREEAM issue Mat 5). Site clearance The scope of this issue applies to the main contractor and their scope of works. If the scope of the main contractor’s works includes demolition and site clearance then this stage of work falls within the scope of the assessment criteria. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage All A copy of the relevant section from the main contract specification confirming: • Contractor’s obligations in respect to each item on the checklist • Site timber will be sourced from suppliers capable of providing certification to the level required for the particular tier claimed (see Table 13 Responsible Sourcing Tier Levels and Criteria of BREEAM issue MAT 5) • All timber will come from a ‘legal source’ and is not on the CITES list*. Site records demonstrating monitoring and recording of the following (where relevant): • Site energy/CO2 consumption • Site deliveries • Site water consumption OR A letter from the main contractor confirming: • Procedures for pollution management and mitigation were implemented • Name/job title of individual responsible for monitoring and managing construction site impacts throughout the project. Where the main contract specification is not yet available, a formal letter from the client/developer including: • Completed checklist A3 identifying which items will form part of the main contractor’s obligations. • The policy for sourcing site timber for the project. • Confirmation that the above will be implemented in compliance with BREEAM’s criteria. * Or in the case of Appendix III of the CITES list, it has not been sourced from the Post Construction Stage Project targets set for water and energy consumption. Copies of the documented procedures used on site for working to best practice pollution management guidelines. A copy of the certification document or Chain of Custody (CoC) certificate(s) for the site timber. Where any non-certified timber is used, written confirmation from the supplier(s) confirming that: • All timber comes from a legal source. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 44 Man 3 Construction Site Impacts country seeking to protect this species as listed in Appendix III. BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 • OR where relevant All timber species and sources used in the development are not listed on any of the CITES appendices for endangered or threatened species (Appendix I, II, or III*). Evidence in line with the Design Stage evidence requirements of the CSH issue Man 3. OR where relevant OR Evidence in line with the Post Construction Stage evidence requirements of the CSH issue Man 3 A copy of the Design Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH issue Man 3. AND A copy of completed Man 3 spreadsheet tool and where additional issues not covered by the CSH are to be adopted, a copy of the main contract specification or a formal letter from the client/developer confirming the additional items will be met as set out above. OR A copy of the Post Construction Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH issue Man 3. AND A copy of the completed Man 3 spreadsheet tool and where additional issues not covered by the CSH are to be adopted, a copy of the main contract specification or a formal letter from the client/developer confirming the additional items will be met as set out above. Additional Information Relevant definitions CITES (Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species)3 Appendices I and II of the CITES list illustrate species of timber that are protected outright. Appendix III of the CITES list illustrates species that are protected in at least one country. If a timber species used in the development is on Appendix III it can be included as part of the assessment as long as the timber is not obtained from the country(s) seeking to protect this species. Chain of Custody: This is a process used to maintain and document the chronological history of the evidence/path for products from forests to consumers. Wood must be tracked from the certified forest to the finished product. All the steps, from transporting wood from the forest to a sawmill, until it reaches the customer, must maintain adequate inventory control systems that allow for separation and identification of the certified product. Chain-of-custody certification ensures that a facility has procedures in place to track wood from certified forests and avoid confusing it with non certified wood. Chain-of-custody is established and audited according to relevant forest certification systems rules. Pollution BRE4 publishes guidance on construction site dust management, and the Environment Agency5 publishes guidance on water pollution control measures. There are significant statutory criteria in this area under environmental health legislation and the Environmental Protection Act. The Environment Agency and local Environmental Health Officers police these. Energy Energy Management on site has been a key focus for the Construction Confederation6, and they have published specific guidance to help achieve this. Monitoring and reporting at site level are the key factors in raising awareness of the impacts of energy consumption. Whilst total energy is frequently monitored, this information is predominantly used to feedback into the tendering process and is seldom used to seek improvements on the site in question. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Man 3 Construction Site Impacts 45 Targets Targets are requested in the BREEAM criteria to promote the process of setting, monitoring and achieving targets. BREEAM does not set targets, as these are very project specific. For guidance on setting targets, refer to Constructing Excellence’ Construction Industry KPI and Benchmarking (www.constructingexcellence.org.uk/zones/kpizone/default.jsp); this series of documents guides the reader through setting targets for their own projects. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 46 Man 4 Building User Guide Issue ID Man 4 Issue Title Building User Guide BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available 1 Minimum standards Yes Aim To recognise and encourage the provision of guidance for the non technical building user so they can understand and operate the building efficiently. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. A Building User Guide that contains the information described under the ‘User Guide Contents’ heading (see additional guidance) has been developed. 2. The guide is relevant to the non-technical building user and appropriate to the stakeholder(s) that will occupy the building. Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. Refurbishment There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Extensions to There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to existing the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. buildings CSH assessed dwellings Operation and Maintenance manual Multiple tenanted buildings For building’s with self-contained dwellings also being assessed under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies: Where the CSH issue Man 1 (Home User Guide) has been achieved for the dwellings, then, provided this Guide is made available to the other non CSH assessed residential areas of the building, it will be compliant with this issue for the residential part of the building/assessment. In addition, to achieve the credit available for issue Man 4, a User Guide must also have been produced and provided with the relevant information for the Facilities Manager/residents, as identified and relevant (see Additional Information section, below). The presence of a building O&M manual does not meet this requirement. The latter provides the detailed specialist information required by technical Facilities Managers (FMs) and maintenance staff/contractors. The guide can be contained in the Operation & Maintenance (O&M) manual, but must be an extractable or ‘stand alone’ section. Where the building will be divided in to multiple tenancies, one central building user guide should be provided covering the scope of landlord controlled areas/responsibilities. A separate subsidiary guide should be provided for each tenant’s space, appropriate to the status/responsibility of the tenant(s) and their building/unit. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Man 4 Building User Guide 47 Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage 1&2 A copy of the specification clause confirming: • Requirement to develop a Building User Guide • Scope of the Guide’s contents. OR Post Construction Stage A copy of the Building User Guide. Written confirmation from the design team that the guide has been distributed to the building’s owner, tenant(s) or fit out contractor (for completion), as appropriate. A formal letter from the client/developer confirming: • That the design team will be required to develop a Building User Guide. • The contents of the Guide will be developed in compliance with the BREEAM criteria. AND where relevant AND where relevant A copy of the Post Construction Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH issue Man 1. Evidence in line with the Design Stage evidence requirements of the CSH issue Man 1 Evidence in line with the Post Construction Stage evidence requirements of the CSH issue Man 1. OR OR A copy of the Design Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH issue Man 1. Additional Information User Guide Contents The list below indicates the type of information that should be included to meet the needs of the Facilities Management (FM) Team/Building Manager and the general users (staff and if applicable to scheme/building, residents). 1. Building Services Information a. General Users/Residents - Information on heating, cooling and ventilation in the building and how these can be adjusted, e.g. thermostat location and use, implications of covering heating outlets with files, bags etc., and use of lifts and security systems. b. FM – As above, plus a non-technical summary of the operation and maintenance of the building systems (including BMS if installed) and an overview of controls. 2. Emergency Information a. General Users/Residents - Include information on the location of fire exits, muster points, alarm systems and fire fighting systems. b. FM - As above, plus details of location and nature of emergency and firefighting systems, nearest emergency services, location of first aid equipment. 3. Energy & Environmental Strategy This should give owners and occupiers information on energy-efficient features and strategies relating to the building, and also provide an overview of the reasons for their use, e.g. economic and environmental savings. Information could include: SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 48 Man 4 Building User Guide BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 a. General Users/Residents – Information on the operation of innovative features such as automatic blinds, lighting systems etc., and guidance on the impacts of strategies covering window opening and the use of blinds, lighting and heating controls b. FM - As above, plus information on airtightness and solar gain (e.g. the impact of leaving windows/doors open in an air conditioned office, or use of blinds in winter with respect to solar gain); energy targets and benchmarks for the building type, information on monitoring such as the metering and sub-metering strategy, and how to read, record and present meter readings. 4. Water Use a. General Users/Residents – details of water saving features and their use and benefits, e.g. aerating taps, low flush toilets, leak detection, metering etc. b. FM – As above, plus details of main components (including controls) and operation. Recommendations for system maintenance and its importance, e.g. risk of legionella. 5. Transport Facilities a. General Users/Residents – details of car-parking and cycling provision; local public transport information, maps and timetables; information on alternative methods of transport to the workplace, e.g. car sharing schemes; local ‘green’ transport facilities. b. FM - As above, plus information on conditions of access, maintenance and appropriate use of car parking and cycling facilities, e.g. number of spaces provided. 6. Materials & Waste Policy a. General Users/Residents: • Information on the location of recyclable materials storage areas and how to use them appropriately. • Information on responsible purchasing such as organic, local grown food, farmers markets, organic basket schemes etc • Information about the Local Authority collection scheme (if applicable) • If the home is not covered by a Local Authority collection scheme, details and location of communal recycling bins/skips/facilities • Information on the location and use of any recycling bins • Information on the location and use of any compost bins • Information on WRAP which can offer guidance on recycling and sustainable waste disposal • Information on what to do with waste not covered by the standard weekly Local Authority collection scheme for example fridges/freezers, computer equipment, batteries and other potentially hazardous equipment. In some areas the local authority will collect these items. If this is the case, details and information on such a collection scheme should be provided. • Information on location detailing local recycling facilities and waste tips b. FM – As above, plus information on recycling, including recyclable building/office/fit out components, waste storage and disposal criteria; examples of Waste Management Strategies and any cleaning/maintenance criteria for particular materials and finishes. 7. Re-fit/Re-arrangement Considerations a. General Users/Residents – an explanation of the impact of re-positioning of furniture, i.e. may cover grilles/outlets, implications of layout change, e.g. installation of screens, higher density occupation etc. b. FM - As above, plus environmental recommendations for consideration in any refit. Relevant issues covered in BREEAM should be highlighted, e.g. the use of natural ventilation, use of Green Guide ‘A’ rated materials, reuse of other materials etc., the potential impact of increasing occupancy and any provision made in the original design to accommodate future changes. 8. Reporting Provision a. General Users/Residents – Contact details of FM/manager, maintenance team, and/or help desk facility; and details of any building user group if relevant. b. FM – As above, plus contact details of suppliers/installers of equipment and services and their areas of responsibility for reporting any subsequent problems. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Man 4 Building User Guide 49 9. Training Details of the proposed content and suggested suppliers of any training and/or demonstrations in the use of the building’s services, features and facilities that will be needed. This could include: a. General Users/Residents - Training in the use of any innovative/energy saving features. b. FM – As above, plus training in emergency procedures and setting up, adjusting, and fine tuning, the systems in the building. 10. Links & References This should include links to other information including websites, publications and organisations. In particular, the Carbon Trust programme should be referenced and links provided to its website and good practice guidance. 11. General Where further technical detail may be required by the FM Team or manager there should be references to the appropriate sections in the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Building Log Book The Building Regulations Part L requires the provision of a ‘Building Log-Book’ to the owner and/or occupier of the building. In addition on completion, the Construction Design and Management Regulations require the Health and Safety file to be passed onto the building user. BREEAM requires an additional ‘Building User Guide’ that contains the necessary details about the everyday operation of the development in a form that is easy for the intended users to understand. Without the provision of adequate information and guidance it is likely that the building will be used inappropriately leading to the dissatisfaction of occupants and wasted resources. For example: Some ventilation and/or lighting systems can be impaired by inappropriate positioning of partitions, office furniture etc. so causing inefficiencies, a lack of comfort and poor performance. The aim of this issue is to ensure that design features are used efficiently and that changes to office space are managed in the most appropriate manner. For example, the design team of a speculative, open plan office, are likely to have considered the need for meeting or cellular space, and may have provided additional riser or duct space to assist future use. The design of the building may require additional or expanded systems to be installed if occupant levels rise above those designed for. This information should be passed on to the personnel making management decisions, so that they are aware of the implications of such decisions on the management of the building. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 50 Man 5 Site Investigation Issue ID Man 5 Issue Title Site Investigation Issue not assessed in this scheme. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available N/A Minimum standards No BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Man 6 Issue Title Man 6 Consultation No. of credits available Consultation 2 51 Minimum standards No Aim To involve the relevant stakeholders (including building users, business, residents and local government) in the design process in order to provide buildings fit for purpose and to increase local “ownership”. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: First credit 1. During the preparation of the brief (equivalent to stage B) the following was undertaken: a. Members of the local community and appropriate stakeholders identified with whom the design team consulted b. Knowledge and experience collated from the existing buildings of the same type (if relevant) to identify existing partnerships and networks. If the building is a new development in an existing community or for a community still under construction, a representative consultation group should be identified from similar buildings of the same type in the same authority/area c. A consultation plan was prepared and included a timescale and methods of consultation, clearly identifying at which points consultees can usefully contribute and how they will be kept informed about progress on the project. 2. The consultation included at least the following issues: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Functionality, building quality and local impact (including aesthetics) Building user satisfaction/productivity Management and operational implications Maintenance resources/burdens Good and bad examples of buildings of the same type. Local traffic/transport impact. Opportunities for shared use of facilities and infrastructure with the community/appropriate stakeholders 3. Feedback has been given to the consultation group regarding suggestions made, and this feedback covered: a. What was proposed during the consultation exercise b. How each of these proposals were considered c. The outcome, e.g. implementation of suggestions or description of why options have not been deemed feasible. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 52 Man 6 Consultation BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Second Credit 1. The first credit has been achieved. 2. The project team demonstrate the following: a. How the results of the consultation process have influenced, or resulted in modifications to, the proposed design and building operation/use b. The measures taken, as agreed with the relevant bodies, to protect any areas or features of historic/heritage value. Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. Refurbishment There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Extensions to There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to existing the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. buildings Relevant Bodies The relevant bodies, depending on the UK region, will typically include: the Local Authority, English Heritage, Historic Scotland, Environment and Heritage Service (NI) or appropriate agency department of the Assembly Government (Wales). Appropriate Includes the following (as appropriate to building type*): stakeholders • Local residents and volunteer group(s) • Building user groups/representatives • Local businesses • Design team members and main contractor • Community groups (for example based on religion, leisure or culture) • Local Authority and/or local service providers. * It is recognised that in some Multi-residential buildings it may not be appropriate to consult some of the above groups due to the sensitive nature of the building and in such instances, the design team should justify the omission of any groups listed here. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage First Credit 1 A list of the stakeholders consulted. 2 A consultation plan setting out the process and the scope of the consultation. Copies of agendas and minutes of meetings with the stakeholders demonstrating: • The consultation plan in action • The stage in plan of works that consultation occurred. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 Evidence as outlined at the design stage of assessment. BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 3 Man 6 Consultation 53 Copies of documentation demonstrating consultation feedback, including (where relevant): • Newsletters, posters, circulars etc. • Agenda and minutes from meetings. Second Credit 1 As above. As above. 2 Marked-up design plans and/or copy of the relevant sections of the specification documents illustrating: • The influence of the consultation process on the final design • Measures taken to protect features of historic value. Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence confirming: • Existence/installation of identified features on marked-up design plan or in specification. Additional Information Relevant definitions Functionality: The way in which the building is designed to be useful and is split into use, access and space. Build quality: The engineering and construction performance of a building. Impact: The building’s ability to create a sense of place, and have a positive effect on the local community and environment. This includes character and innovation, form and materials, internal environment and urban and social integration. Consultation guidance and methodologies There is a great deal of guidance available on community consultation, and many specialist organisations offer such services. Much of it is focussed on community planning, but is adaptable. Examples of guidance and methodologies in the public domain are: • • • • • The National Charrette Institute is a non-profit educational institution that help communities achieve healthy transformation through collaborative planning processes that harnesses the talents and energies of all interested parties to create and support a buildable plan. www.charretteinstitute.org Planning for Real is a participative planning initiative. www.nifonline.org.uk For a guide to neighbourhood renewal and various resources see: www.renewal.net The Design Quality Indicator is a method to assess the design quality of buildings. www.dqi.org.uk The Commission for Architecture and the Built Environment has various publications to provide guidance on design, and a section on education on design for young people. www.cabe.org.uk SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 54 Man 7 Shared Facilities Issue ID Man 7 Issue Title Shared facilities Issue not assessed in this scheme. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available N/A Minimum standards No BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Man 8 Issue Title Security Man 8 Security No. of credits available 1 55 Minimum standards No Aim To recognise and encourage the implementation of effective design measures that will reduce the opportunity for and fear of crime on the new development. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. The design team has consulted with and sought the advice of the local police Architectural Liaison Officer (ALO) or Crime Prevention Design Advisor (CPDA) on designing out the opportunity for crime, in accordance with the principles and guidance of Secured by Design7. 2. Consultation with the ALO/CPDA occurred during or prior to the concept design stage (RIBA stage C) or equivalent. 3. The final design embodies the recommendations of the ALO/CPDA and is built to conform to the principles and guidance of Secured by Design. Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. Refurbishment There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Extensions to existing buildings CSH assessed dwellings SBD Award There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. For buildings with self-contained dwellings also being assessed under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies: Where CSH issue MAN 4 (Security) has been achieved, the credit can be awarded for BREEAM issue Man 8, provided the recommendations of the ALO cover the entire building and any associated parking facilities. An actual Secured by Design Award/certificate is not required, though this does provide a means of demonstrating compliance at the post construction stage of assessment. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 56 Man 8 Security BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage 1&2 Correspondence from or a copy of the report/feedback from the ALO/CPDA confirming: • Scope of their advice/involvement • The stage of design in which their advice was sought • Summary of their recommendations No additional evidence required to that outlined for the design stage of assessment. 3 A marked-up copy of the site/design plan(s) highlighting examples of: • The development conforming to ALO/CPDA recommendations and SBD principles and guidance. Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence providing examples of: • The site/development conforming to key ALO/CPDA recommendations. OR OR If the timing of assessment does not permit the above, a copy of the specification clause confirming: The development will conform to ALO/CPDA recommendations and SBD principles and guidance. Correspondence from the ALO/CPDA confirming: • The as-built development or design complies with their recommendations. OR A copy of the development’s ‘Secured by Design’ certificate. OR 1,2 & 3 Evidence in line with the Design Stage evidence requirements of the CSH issue Man 4. Evidence in line with the Post Construction Stage evidence requirements of the CSH issue Man 4. OR OR A copy of the Design Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH issue Man 4. A copy of the Post Construction Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH issue Man 4. Additional Information Relevant definitions: Secured by Design (SBD): A police initiative that seeks to encourage the construction industry to adopt crime prevention measures in the design of developments, to assist in reducing the opportunity for and fear of crime. Secured by Design is owned by the Association of Chief Police Officers (ACPO) and has the support of the Home Office Crime Reduction & Community Safety Group and the Planning Section of the Department for Communities and Local Government. The Association of Chief Police Officers for England Wales and Northern Ireland (ACPO) and the Association of Chief Police Officers for Scotland (ACPOS) represent the police forces of the United Kingdom and both organisations endorse and support the Secured by Design programme. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-Residential 2008 Hea 1 Daylighting 57 5.0 Health and Wellbeing Issue ID Issue Title Hea 1 Daylighting No. of credits available Minimum standards 1 No Aim To give building users sufficient access to daylight. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. At least 80% of floor area in the residential areas are adequately daylit as follows: a. In kitchen areas an average daylight factor of at least 2% must be achieved. b. All living rooms, dining rooms and studies (including any room designated as a home office under HEA 20 – Home Office) must achieve a minimum daylight factor of at least 1.5% c. 80% of the working plane in each kitchen, living room, dining room and study (including any room designated as a home office under HEA 20-HomeOffice) must receive direct light from the sky. 2. At least 80% of floor area in communal areas and/or non-residential occupied spaces are adequately daylit as follows: a. An average daylight factor of 2% or more. PLUS either (b) OR (c AND d) below b. A uniformity ratio of at least 0.4 or a minimum point daylight factor of at least 0.8% (spaces with glazed roofs, such as atria, must achieve a uniformity ratio of at least 0.7 or a minimum point daylight factor of at least 1.4%). OR c. A view of sky from desk height (0.7m) is achieved. AND d. The room depth criterion d/w +d/HW < 2/(1-RB) is satisfied. Where: d = room depth w = room width HW = window head height from floor level RB = average reflectance of surfaces in the rear half of the room. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 58 Hea 1 Daylighting BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Note: Table 7 Reflectance for maximum room depths and window head heights (see Additional Information) gives maximum room depths in metres for different room widths and window head heights of sidelit rooms 5. The provision of daylight has been designed in accordance with the guidance in CIBSE Lighting Guide 108 Daylighting and window design, BS8206 Part 29 and the BRE Site Layout Guide10. Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM issue. 1. At least 80% of the floor area (for the building spaces/room identified above in the standard criteria) has an average daylight factor of 3% in multi-storey buildings and 4% in single-storey buildings. 2. The criteria outlined above concerning uniformity ratio, view of sky or room depth criterion are met. Where demonstrating compliance via uniformity ratio or point daylight factor the following minimum criteria apply: a. Multi-storey: A uniformity ratio of at least 0.4 or a minimum point daylight factor of at least 1.2%; (spaces with glazed roofs, such as atria, must achieve a uniformity ratio of at least 0.7 or a minimum point daylight factor of at least 2.1%). b. Single storey: a minimum point daylight factor of at least 1.6%; (spaces with glazed roofs, such as atria, must achieve a uniformity ratio of at least 0.7 or a minimum point daylight factor of at least 2.8%). Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. Refurbishment There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Extensions to existing buildings The criteria of this issue apply only to the scope of the assessed building. If this scope includes the existing building as well as the new building then the relevant areas within the existing building must be assessed against the criteria of this BREEAM issue. If the assessment covers only the new building, then the areas in the existing building do not need to be assessed. CSH assessed dwellings For buildings with self-contained dwellings also being assessed under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH) methodology, the following applies: Percentage of assessed area Where all self-contained dwellings within the building assessed under the CSH have achieved the credit for CSH issue Hea 1, this also demonstrates compliance with BREEAM’s Hea 1 (Daylighting), for the self-contained dwellings part of the building (where also assessed under BREEAM Multiresidential). Other residential and non residential areas of the building, not forming part of a self-contained dwelling must comply with the above in order for this credit to be awarded. Where the compliance requirement specifies that 80% of office or other occupied space floor area must be adequately daylit, it refers to 80% of the total floor area of all the rooms that must be assessed i.e. the compliant area. If for example a development has 6 rooms that must be assessed, each 150m2 (total area 900m2) then 720m2 must comply with the criteria; this is equal to 4.8 rooms. The number of rooms that must comply must always be rounded up; therefore in this example, five rooms must have an average daylight factor of 2% or more (plus meet the other criteria) to achieve the credit. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-Residential 2008 Hea 1 Daylighting 59 View of sky requirement To comply with the view of sky criteria at least 80% of the room that complies with the average daylight factor requirement must meet the view out requirement; i.e. it is permissible for up to 20% of the room not to meet the view of sky requirement and still achieve a compliant room. Uniformity with rooflights The room depth criteria cannot be used where the lighting strategy relies on rooflights. In such areas either appropriate software should be used to calculate the uniformity ratio or, in the case of a regular array of rooflights across the whole of the space, ‘Figure 2.36’ (p37) within CIBSE Lighting Guide LG10 can be used to determine the uniformity ratio. For rooms lit by windows on two opposite sides, the maximum room depth that can be satisfactorily daylit is twice the limiting room depth (d) (measured from window wall to window wall; CIBSE Lighting Guide LG10. The reflectance of the imaginary internal wall should be taken as 1. Two-side lit rooms Borrowed light Assessed areas For areas where borrowed light is used, calculations or results from appropriate lighting design software must be provided to demonstrate that such areas meet the BREEAM criteria (if contributing to the percentage of compliant area). Examples of borrowed light include: light shelves, clerestory glazing, sun pipes or internal translucent/transparent partitions (such as those using frosted glass). This issue is typically applied only to areas within the building where good daylighting is considered to be of benefit to the building users (typically those areas occupied for 30 minutes or more). This includes: • Self contained flats • Kitchen and catering areas • General communal areas • Offices • Meeting rooms • Leisure areas Any area that may involve close up work such as kitchen areas or office areas will require a daylight factor of at least 2%, this includes kitchenettes. Existing Features Site In the scenario where existing site features prevent all self contained dwellings and/or individual bedrooms from achieving the credit requirements. The credit can still be achieved if evidence provided demonstrates that 90% of the self contained dwellings and/or individual bedrooms are able to achieve the compliance requirement. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 60 Hea 1 Daylighting BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage All Design plans for each floor in the building with each room/area appropriately labelled for use. Daylight calculations for the building ‘as built’ confirming compliance with all criteria. OR AND Daylight calculations confirming: • Building areas assessed • The daylighting variables/criterion measured • Average daylight factor for each area • Compliance with room depth criterion, uniformity ratio, view of sky (if required) • The daylight provision is in compliance with the relevant standards. AND where relevant Evidence in line with the Design Stage evidence requirements of the CSH issue Hea 1 Assessor’s site inspection report or ‘as-built’ drawings confirming: • The window sizes and room layout and dimensions are as per design-stage daylighting compliant room • A letter from the design team or main contractor confirming that window specification, size and/or room layout have not changed since the design stage assessment. Where there have been changes, revised calculations are required to demonstrate compliance for the relevant areas/rooms. OR OR Results from on-site measurements* that have been carried out. A copy of the Design Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH Issue Hea 1 *These must be in accordance with methodology detailed in BRE IP 23/9311. AND where relevant Evidence in line with the Post Construction Stage evidence requirements of the CSH issue Hea 1 OR A copy of the Post Construction Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH Issue Hea 1. Additional Information Relevant definitions Occupied space: A room or space within the assessed building that is likely to be occupied for 30 minutes or more by a building user (see also excluded areas in the compliance notes). Point daylight factor: A point daylight factor is the ratio between the illuminance (from daylight) at a specific point on the working plane within a room, expressed as a percentage of the illuminance SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-Residential 2008 Hea 1 Daylighting 61 received on an outdoor unobstructed horizontal plane. This is based on an assumed overcast sky, approximated by the ‘CIE (Commission Internationale de l’Eclairage) overcast sky’. Average daylight factor: The average daylight factor is the average indoor illuminance (from daylight) on the working plane within a room, expressed as a percentage of the simultaneous outdoor illuminance on a horizontal plane under an unobstructed CIE Standard Overcast Sky. Illuminance: The amount of light falling on a surface per unit area, measured in lux. Uniformity: The uniformity is the ratio between the minimum illuminance (from daylight) on the working plane within a room (or minimum daylight factor) and the average illuminance (from daylight) on the same working plan (or average daylight factor). View of sky / no-sky line: Areas of the working plane have a view of sky when they receive direct light from the sky, i.e. when the sky can be seen from working plane height. The no-sky line divides those areas of the working plane, which can receive direct skylight, from those that cannot. Working plane: CIBSE LG10 defines the working plane as the horizontal, vertical or inclined plane in which a visual task lies. The working plane is normally taken as 0.7 m above the floor for offices and 0.85 m for industry. Computer simulation: Software tools that can be used to model more complex room geometries for daylighting. The table below gives maximum room depths in metres for different room widths and window head heights of sidelit rooms: Table 7 Reflectance for maximum room depths and window head heights Reflectance (RB) Room Width (m) 0.4 0.5 0.6 3.0 10.0 3.0 10.0 3.0 10.0 2.5 4.5 6.7 5.4 8.0 6.8 10.0 3.0 5.0 7.7 6.0 9.2 7.5 11.5 3.5 5.4 8.6 6.5 10.4 8.1 13.0 Window Head Height (m) SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 62 Hea 2 View Out Issue ID Hea 2 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue Title View Out No. of credits available 1 Minimum standards No Aim To allow occupants to refocus their eyes from close work and enjoy an external view, thus reducing the risk of eyestrain and breaking the monotony of the indoor environment. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. All living rooms (in self contained flats), communal lounges and individual bedrooms/bedsits in sheltered housing are within 5m distance of a wall with a window or permanent opening providing an adequate view out, where the window/opening is ≥20% of the total inside wall area. 2. All other relevant building areas within 7m distance of a wall with a window or permanent opening providing an adequate view out, where the window/opening is ≥20% of the total inside wall area (refer to compliance notes for a definition of relevant building areas and adequate view out). Compliance Notes New Build Refurbishment Extensions to existing buildings Adequate view out There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. The view out should ideally be through an external window providing a view of a landscape or buildings (rather than just the sky) at seated eye level (1.2 – 1.3m) in the relevant building areas. A view in to an internal courtyard or atrium will comply provided the distance from the opening to the back wall of the courtyard/atrium is at least 10m (therefore allowing enough distance for the eyes to refocus). The view cannot be an internal view across the room, as this is likely to become obstructed by partitions, filing cabinets etc. High level windows Roof lights and high level windows that do not provide an adequate view out do not meet the criteria for this BREEAM issue. Relevant building areas Where the term ‘relevant building areas’ is referenced in this BREEAM issue, it refers to any areas of the building where there are, or will be, workstations/benches or desks for building users. This includes: • Self contained flats • Individual bedrooms • Offices • IT suites Plus any other areas in the building where occupants will be using display screen equipment for long periods of time. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Hea 2 View Out 63 Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage All Design plan and elevation showing: • All relevant building areas and room depths • Actual or notional workstations/desk layout • Window/open areas Site plan showing: • Building location and external obstructions. Post Construction Stage proximity to Assessor’s site inspection report photographic evidence confirming: • All relevant building areas comply. and OR As built drawings or a formal letter form the design team confirming: • No changes have occurred since design stage, therefore design stage evidence demonstrates compliance post construction. Additional Information Relevant definitions Occupied space: refer to BREEAM issue Hea 1. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 64 Hea 3 Glare Control Issue ID Hea 3 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue Title Glare Control No. of credits available 1 Minimum standards No Aim To reduce problems associated with glare in occupied areas through the provision of adequate controls. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. An occupant-controlled shading system on all windows, glazed doors and rooflights in all relevant building areas. Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. Refurbishment There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Extensions to existing buildings Where the existing building falls within the scope of the assessment, then the criteria extend to the relevant building areas and occupied spaces of the existing building. If only the new extension is being assessed then the criteria apply to the relevant areas of the new building. Relevant building areas This issue is applicable to the following building areas (where existing): • Study bedrooms (student halls) • Offices • Meeting rooms • IT Suites Plus any other areas where occupants will be doing close up work/using display screen equipment where there may be a risk of glare. Common case of non compliance Curtains would not meet the criteria for this issue as the glare control needs to allow a degree of flexibility to still allow sunlight in. The use of curtains to control glare would cause occupants to rely on artificial lighting. Blinds, brise-soleil, low eaves or bioclimatic design could be used to allow glare control without blocking out all daylight. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Hea 3 Glare Control 65 Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage 1 Marked-up copy of the design plan(s) confirming: • A description of the function of each of the building spaces. Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence confirming: • Installation of compliant glare control system. A copy of the relevant specification clause(s), window schedule or design plan confirming: • Type of shading system(s) and control to be installed. Additional Information Relevant definitions Occupied space: A room or space within the assessed building that is likely to be occupied for 30 minutes or more by a building user and, with respect to this issue, where it would be desirable to limit the potential for glare or provided a system of glare control. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 66 Hea 4 High Frequency Lighting Issue ID BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available Issue Title Hea 4 High frequency lighting 1 Minimum standards Yes Aim To reduce the risk of health problems related to the flicker of fluorescent lighting. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. All fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps are fitted with high frequency ballasts. Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. Refurbishment There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Extensions to Where the existing building falls within the scope of the assessment, then the existing criteria extend to the existing building. If only the new extension is being buildings assessed then the criteria apply to the new building only. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage 1 A copy of the specification clause or room data sheets confirming: • A compliant lighting strategy. Post Construction Stage Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence confirming: • Installation of high frequency ballasts. OR As-built drawings/specification confirming: • No changes have occurred since design stage assessment. • Where changes have occurred, a compliant lighting strategy is installed. Additional Information Relevant definitions Occupied space: refer to BREEAM issue Hea 1. High frequency ballast: High frequency ballasts increase the frequency of the power coming from the grid (50Hz) to a frequency optimising the performance of fluorescent lamps, typically around 30kHz. There are several advantages to running fluorescent lamps at higher frequencies. At 30kHz, the frequency of re-ignition of a fluorescent lamp is too quick to be detected by the human eye, therefore SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Hea 4 High Frequency Lighting 67 reducing visible flicker that some fluorescent lamps running on mains frequency fail to do. Additionally, 30kHz being above the audible range of the human ear, the buzzing noise coming out of low quality main frequency ballasts is avoided. Finally, the luminous efficacy of fluorescent lamps increases with frequency; it can be optimised by up to 10% when they are running at 30kHz compared to those operating at 50Hz. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 68 Hea 5 Internal and External Lighting Levels Issue ID Hea 5 Issue Title Internal and external lighting levels BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available 1 Minimum standards No Aim To ensure lighting has been designed in line with best practice for visual performance and comfort. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. Illuminance (lux) levels in all internal areas of the building are specified in accordance with the CIBSE Code for Lighting 200612. 2. For areas where computer screens are regularly used, the lighting design complies with CIBSE Lighting Guide 713 sections 3.3, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8 and 4.9. This gives recommendations highlighting: a. Limits to the luminance of the luminaires, to avoid screen reflections. (Manufacturers’ data for the luminaires should be sought to confirm this). b. For up-lighting, the recommendations refer to the luminance of the lit ceiling rather than the luminaire; a design team calculation is usually required to demonstrate this. c. Recommendations for direct lighting, ceiling illuminance, and average wall illuminance. 3. Illuminance levels for lighting in all external areas within the construction zone are specified in accordance with CIBSE Lighting Guide 6, ‘The outdoor environment’14. Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. Refurbishment There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Extensions to Where the existing building falls within the scope of the assessment, then the existing criteria extend to the existing building. If only the new extension is being buildings assessed then the criteria apply to the areas of the new building only. No external Where no external light fittings are specified, the criteria relating to external areas lighting do not apply and the credit can be awarded on the basis of compliance with the internal lighting criteria. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Hea 5 Internal and External Lighting Levels 69 Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage All EITHER A copy of the specification or relevant room schedules confirming: • The internal/external maintained illuminance levels AND/OR • The standards that the illuminance levels are specified to. A formal written declaration from the design team or main contractor confirming: • Light fittings have been installed in compliance with the lighting specification. • No changes have occurred in the lighting specification used to demonstrate design stage compliance. OR A formal written declaration of conformity from the relevant member of the design team confirming: • The maintained illuminance levels for each internal/external space are in compliance with the relevant Standard. Where changes have occurred, a further declaration is required confirming that the revised lighting specification is in compliance with the BREEAM criteria. Additional Information Relevant definitions Occupied space: Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 1. Construction zone: For the purpose of this BREEAM issue the construction zone is defined as the site which is being developed for the BREEAM-assessed building, and the external site areas that fall within the scope of the new works. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 70 Hea 6 Lighting Zones and Controls Issue ID Hea 6 Issue Title Lighting zones and controls Issue not assessed under this scheme. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available N/A Minimum standards No BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Hea 7 Issue Title Potential for Natural Ventilation Hea 7 Potential for Natural Ventilation No. of credits available 1 71 Minimum standards No Aim To recognise and encourage adequate cross flow of air in naturally ventilated buildings and flexibility in air-conditioned/mechanically ventilated buildings for future conversion to a natural ventilation strategy. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. Communal occupied spaces of the building are designed to be capable of providing fresh air entirely via a natural ventilation strategy, demonstrated via EITHER of the following: a. The openable window area in each occupied space is equivalent to 5% of the gross internal floor area of that room/floor plate. For room/floor plates between 7m-15m depth, the openable window area is on opposite sides and evenly distributed across the area to promote adequate cross-ventilation. OR b. The design demonstrates (by calculation, using ventilation design tool types recommended by CIBSE AM1015) that the natural ventilation strategy provides adequate cross flow of air to maintain required thermal comfort conditions and ventilation rates. For a strategy which does not rely on openable windows, or which has occupied spaces with a plan depth greater than 15m, the design must demonstrate (by calculation in accordance with requirement 1b above) that the ventilation strategy can provide adequate cross flow of air to maintain the required thermal comfort conditions and ventilation rates. 2. The strategy is capable of providing at least two levels of user-control on the supply of fresh air to the occupied space with higher rates of ventilation achievable to remove short-term odours and/or prevent summertime overheating. This would typically be demonstrated by providing a large enough area of manually opening windows or powered window actuators. Any opening mechanisms must be easily accessible and provide adequate user-control over air flow rates to avoid draughts. Compliance Notes New Build Refurbishment Extensions to existing buildings There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Where the existing building falls within the scope of the assessment, then the criteria extend to the existing building. If only the new extension is being assessed then the criteria apply to the areas of the new building only. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 72 Hea 7 Potential for Natural Ventilation BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Mechanically ventilated/cooled buildings The aim of this BREEAM issue is to ensure that a building is capable of providing fresh air using a natural ventilation strategy. As a result, buildings that employ a mechanically ventilated/cooled strategy are still able to achieve the credit, provided they can demonstrate compliance with the above criteria (for future adaptability). Openable window area The openable window area is defined as the geometric free ventilation area created when a ventilation opening, e.g. window, is open to its normal operational fully designed extent (i.e. this excludes open areas created when reversible windows are opened for cleaning etc). It is not the glazed area of a façade or the glazed area of the part of the window that is openable (unless it opens fully). Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage 1-2 Design plans and elevations, specification or calculations confirming: • Ventilation strategy in each occupied space • The depth of the room • Gross internal floor area of each occupied space • The type of window/ventilator and total openable area * • The location of openings • The type and degree of user-control. Assessor’s site inspection report and photographic evidence confirming: • The ventilation openings and controls are installed in accordance with compliant design stage evidence. * AND (where relevant) A copy of the results from the appropriate software modelling tool demonstrating compliance. *Manufacturers’/suppliers’ literature may also be used as evidence. Additional Information Relevant definitions Occupied space: refer to BREEAM issue Hea 1. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 A formal letter from the design team or main contractor confirming: • No changes have occurred since design stage. Where changes have occurred since design stage, ‘as-built’ drawings, specification and calculations (as outlined under design stage evidence) that re-confirms compliance. * A random spot check of a selection of occupied spaces is sufficient. The assessor is not required to check each opening in all spaces/rooms. BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Hea 8 Issue Title Hea 8 Indoor Air Quality No. of credits available Indoor Air Quality 1 73 Minimum standards No Aim To reduce the risk to health associated with poor indoor air quality. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. Air-conditioned and mixed-mode buildings: Where the building’s air intakes and exhausts are over 10m apart to minimise recirculation AND intakes are over 20m from sources of external pollution. 2. Naturally-ventilated buildings: Where openable windows/ventilators are over 10m from sources of external pollution. 3. In addition to the specific BREEAM criteria above, the building has been designed to provide fresh air rates to dilute pollutants in accordance with the following good practice: a. In general office type areas fresh air is provided in accordance with the top of the range recommended in the British Council for Offices Guide to Best Practice in the Specification of Offices16 i.e. 12 litres per second per person. 4. Areas of the building subject to large and unpredictable or variable occupancy patterns have CO2 or air quality sensors specified and: a. In mechanically ventilated spaces, the sensor(s) are linked to the mechanical ventilation system and provide demand-controlled ventilation to the space. b. In naturally ventilated spaces, the sensors either have the ability to alert the building owner/manager when CO2 levels exceed the recommended set point, or are linked to controls with the ability to adjust the quantity of fresh air, i.e. automatic opening windows/roof vents. Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. Refurbishment There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Extensions to There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the existing assessment of extensions to existing buildings. buildings Measuring the The distance requirement does not necessarily mean the plan distance, but the distance three dimensional distance around and over objects; e.g. on plan the air intakes may be less than 20m from a source of external pollution, but the intake may be on the roof of a 10 storey building and therefore over 20m from the source of pollution. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 74 Hea 8 Indoor Air Quality Sources of external pollution Excluded sources Filters BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 This includes the following: • Highways and the main access roads on the assessed site. • Car parks and delivery/vehicle waiting bays • Other building exhausts, including from building services plant industrial/agricultural processes Service and access roads with restricted and infrequent access (for example roads used only for waste collection) are unlikely to represent a significant source of external pollution. These roads can therefore be excluded from the criteria of this issue. This does not include vehicle pick-up/drop-off or waiting bays. It must be noted that filters fitted on the air supply are not considered by BREEAM to provide adequate protection from sources of external pollution. As such the distance criteria cannot be relaxed where filters are specified. Fresh air criteria for other areas/spaces Fresh air criteria are not specified for other areas of the building (i.e. those not listed above) as the provision of fresh air is adequately covered in Approved Document Part F Ventilation17 (and the standards referenced there in). Areas with a large and unpredictable occupancy The following are examples of these types of space: • Auditoria • Gyms • Retail stores/malls • Cinemas • Waiting rooms Where the assessed building does not have any areas deemed to be large with an unpredictable pattern of occupancy, the fourth BREEAM requirement does not comply. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage 1&2 A marked-up proposed site plan highlighting: • Locations of intakes, extracts, openable windows, ventilators • Any existing or proposed sources of external pollution. Assessor’s building/site inspection and as built drawings confirming: • Locations of intakes, extracts, openable windows, ventilators • Proximity of any sources of external pollution to the above. 3 Design team calculations and/or performance specification criteria confirming: • The fresh air rate set for each space • That the fresh air rate can be met using the chosen strategy • The relevant standard(s) to which the design is in accordance with. For a naturally ventilated building, a formal letter of declaration from the design team or main contractor confirming the building has been built in accordance with a design compliant with the BREEAM criteria. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 For a mechanically ventilated building, the commissioning manager’s performance testing report confirming: • The required fresh air rates are achieved. BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 4 A copy of the design plans for the internal areas of the building. A copy of the relevant clause(s) of the specification confirming: • Air quality monitoring sensors • How these boost ventilation when set points are triggered. Hea 8 Indoor Air Quality 75 Assessor’s building/site inspection and as built drawings confirming: • Installation of air quality sensors. • The sensors boost ventilation when set points are triggered Additional Information Relevant definitions None. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 76 Hea 9 Volatile Organic Compounds Issue ID Hea 9 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available Issue Title Volatile Organic Compounds 1 Minimum standards No Aim To recognise and encourage a healthy internal environment through the specification of internal finishes and fittings with low emissions of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. The following products (where specified) have been tested against and meet the relevant standards outlined in the table below for Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) emissions: Table 8 VOC criteria by product type Product Wood Panels • Particleboard, • Fibreboard including MDF, • OSB, • Cement-bonded particleboard • Plywood • Solid wood panel and acoustic board Timber Structures • Glued laminated timber Wood flooring • e.g. parquet flooring European Standard BS EN 13986:200418 Emission level required Formaldehyde E1 (Testing req 1 – see below) Verify that regulated wood preservatives are absent and of the minimum content. BS EN 14080:200519 Formaldehyde E1 (Testing req 1) BS EN 14342:200520 Formaldehyde E1(Testing req 1) Verify that regulated wood preservatives are absent and of the minimum content. Formaldehyde E1(Testing req 1) Verify that regulated preservatives are absent and of the minimum content. 21 Resilient, textile and laminated Floor coverings • Vinyl/linoleum • Cork and rubber • Carpet • Laminated wood flooring Suspended ceiling tiles BS EN 14041:2004 Flooring adhesives BS EN 139991:200723 Wall-coverings • Finished wallpapers • Wall vinyl’s and plastic wallcoverings • Wallpapers for subsequent decoration. • Heavy duty wall-coverings • Textile wall-coverings BS EN 233:1999 BS EN 234:198925 26 BS EN 259:2001 BS EN 266:199227 BS EN 13964:200422 SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 24 Formaldehyde E1 (Testing req 1) No asbestos. Verify that carcinogenic or sensitising volatile substances are absent (Testing req. 2-4). Formaldehyde (testing req. 5) and Vinyl chloride monomer (VCM) (testing req. 5) release should be low and within the BS EN standard for the material. Verify that the migration of heavy metals(5) and other toxic substances are within the BS EN BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Hea 9 Volatile Organic Compounds Adhesive for hanging flexible wallcoverings BS 3046:198128 Decorative paints and varnishes BS EN 13300:200129 referred to the criteria of Decorative Paint Directive 2004/42/CE30 77 standard for the material. No harmful substances and preservatives used should be of minimum toxicity. VOC (organic solvent) content (testing req. 6), requirement for Phase 2. Fungal and algal resistant. Testing requirement: 1. BS EN 717-1:200431 2. BS EN 13999-2:2007 - Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs)32 3. BS EN 13999-3:2007 - Volatile aldehydes33 4. BS EN 13999-4:2007 - Volatile diisocyanates34 5. BS EN 12149:199735 6. BS EN ISO 11890-2:200636 Compliance Notes New Build Refurbishment Extensions to existing buildings Products with no Formaldehyde containing materials Furnishings There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. For some floor coverings and wood based panels, the requirement for formaldehyde testing (referred to in the above criteria) does not apply to “floor coverings to which no formaldehyde-containing materials were added during production or post-production processing”21, or in the case of EN 13986:2002, wood-based panels. As such, if a product manufacturer confirms that they have made a declaration of Formaldehyde class E1 without testing (in writing or via a company product fact sheet/literature) then the product in question meets the BREEAM requirement relevant to Formaldehyde testing. A declaration of E1 without testing is effectively confirmation from the manufacturer that formaldehyde emissions comply with the emission level requirements of the relevant standard(s) Therefore, evidence confirming the actual emission level(s) via testing will not be required by the Assessor to demonstrate compliance with that particular requirement. The scope of this BREEAM issue does not extend to furnishings e.g. desks/shelving, it focuses on the key internal finishes and fittings integral to the building. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 78 Hea 9 Volatile Organic Compounds BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage 1 A copy of the relevant specification clause confirming: • The VOC content of the relevant specified product types will comply with the standards specified above. For each relevant product, a formal letter from or copies of the manufacturer’s literature confirming: • The standard(s) against which the product is tested • The VOC emissions achieved • The VOC emissions meet the required level. Additional Information Relevant definitions None. Volatile Organic Compounds VOCs are emitted by a wide array of products numbering in the thousands. Examples include: paints and lacquers, paint strippers, cleaning supplies, pesticides, building materials and furnishings, glues and adhesives, Urea-formaldehyde foam insulation (UFFI), pressed wood products (hardwood plywood wall panelling, particleboard, fibreboard) and furniture made with these pressed wood products. ‘No’ or ‘low’ VOC paints are available from most standard mainstream paint manufacturers. There ‘ecofriendly’ paints are made from organic plant sources and also powdered milk-based products. The emissions of VOCs from paints and varnishes are regulated by the Directive 2004/42/CE, implemented in the UK by the Volatile Organic Compounds in Paints, Varnishes and Vehicle Refinishing Products Regulation 2005. Products containing high organic solvent content should also be avoided (EU VOC Solvent Directive 1999/13/EC). Exposure risk assessment of any possible release of chemicals from manufactured products and their possible impact on health and the environment generally, is an important requirement of European regulations. The possible impact of a building product on indoor air quality is included in the European Construction Products Directive, 89/106/EEC. The amended Directive, 93/68/EEC provided the criteria for CE Marking of products. Products to be fitted in buildings should not contain any substances regulated by the Dangerous Substances Directive 2004/42/CE, which could cause harm to people by inhalation or contact. Materials containing heavy metals (e.g. antimony, barium, cadmium, lead and mercury) and other toxic elements (e.g. arsenic, chromium and selenium) or regulated biocides (e.g. pentachlorophenol) should be avoided. Various labelling schemes identify products that have been tested and shown to be low emitting and these have been summarised in BRE Digest 46437. Dangerous substances are defined in the Dangerous Substances Directive (67/548/EEC) SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Hea 10 Issue Title Thermal Comfort Hea 10 Thermal Comfort No. of credits available 1 79 Minimum standards No Aim To ensure, with the use of design tools, that appropriate thermal comfort levels are achieved. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. Thermal modelling has been carried out using software selected and applied in accordance with CIBSE AM11 Building Energy and Environmental Modelling38. 2. The modelling demonstrates that the building design and services strategy can deliver thermal comfort levels in occupied spaces in accordance with the criteria set out in CIBSE Guide A Environmental Design39; in particular that internal winter and summer temperature ranges will be in line with the recommended comfort criteria in table 1.5 of the Guide. 3. The software used to carry out the simulation at the detailed design stage must provide full dynamic thermal analysis. For smaller and more basic building designs an alternative less complex means of analysis may be appropriate (such methodologies must still be selected and applied in accordance with CIBSE AM11). Compliance Notes New Build Refurbishment Extensions to existing buildings There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Where the existing building falls within the scope of the assessment, then the criteria extend to all occupied spaces of the new and existing building. If only the new extension is being assessed then the criteria apply to the occupied areas of the new building. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 80 Hea 10 Thermal Comfort BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage 1&3 A copy of the relevant specification clause confirming: • The criteria for thermal comfort analysis. Formal written confirmation from the design team confirming: • No changes have occurred since design stage thermal comfort assessment was carried out, therefore design stage evidence demonstrates compliance at the post construction stage. OR 2 Correspondence (e.g. letter, email or meeting minutes) from the design team confirming: • The name of the thermal comfort modelling software used. • The software has been selected and applied in accordance with CIBSE AM11. A copy of the results from the modelling demonstrating the internal temperatures in compliance with the relevant standards. Where changes have occurred, an updated copy of the results from the modelling demonstrating the internal temperatures in compliance with the relevant standards. Additional Information Relevant definitions Occupied space: For the purpose of this BREEAM issue an occupied space is a room or space within the assessed building that is likely to be occupied for 30 minutes or more by a building user. The definition excludes the following: a. Atria/concourses b. Entrance halls/reception areas c. Ancillary space e.g. circulation areas, storerooms and plantrooms Thermal Dynamic Analysis: Thermal comfort analysis tools can be subdivided into a number of methods of increasing complexity. The most complex of these and the one that provides greatest confidence in results is the full dynamic model. This type of model enables annual heating/cooling loads, overheating risks and control strategies to be assessed. . SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Hea 11 Issue Title Thermal Zoning Hea 11 Thermal Zoning No. of credits available 1 81 Minimum standards No Aim To recognise and encourage the provision of user controls which allow independent adjustment of heating/cooling systems within the building. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. The heating/cooling system is designed to allow occupant control of zoned areas within all occupied spaces in the building. 2. The zoning allows separate occupant control (within the occupied space) of each perimeter area (i.e. within 7m of each external wall) and the central zone (i.e. over 7m from the external walls). Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. Refurbishment There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Extensions to Where the existing building falls within the scope of the assessment, then the criteria extend to the occupied spaces of the existing building. If only the new existing buildings extension is being assessed then the criteria apply to the relevant spaces of the new building. Long lag Where long-lag systems are specified, the criteria can be met where they are systems designed to service the base load only and a responsive secondary heating system and controls are provided, zoned in compliance with the above criteria. Distance requirement The distance requirement is approximate; however, the assessor must use sound judgement considering fully the aims of this issue, before accepting solutions that do not strictly meet the above criteria. Controls for wet heating systems Adequate TRVs (thermostatic radiator valves) placed in zones around the building perimeter, and the provision of local occupant controls to internal areas, such as fan coil units, would satisfy the criteria for this BREEAM issue. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 82 Hea 11 Thermal Zoning BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage 1&2 A copy of the relevant clauses of specification and/or marked-up M&E drawings confirming: • Scope of the heating/cooling system • The type of user controls for the above systems • The scope of the controls i.e. control zone. Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence confirming: • Installation of user controls in each occupied space.* *For large buildings it would not be expected that the assessor check every individual occupied space, but a random selection of spaces that confirm compliance. Additional Information Relevant definitions Long-lag systems: These low temperature systems use the thermal mass of the building to provide a consistent supply of heat to the space during the occupied period. As the mass of the building is used to regulate and supply the heat, the temperature in the space lags behind any change required by the occupants via the systems controls. An example of a long-lag system is under-floor heating. Separate Occupant Control: Heating/cooling controls for a particular area/zone of the building that can be accessed and operated by the individual(s) occupying that area/zone. Such controls will be located within, or within the vicinity of, the zone/area they control. Occupied space: For the purpose of this BREEAM issue an occupied space is a room or space within the assessed building that is likely to be occupied for 30 minutes or more by a building user. The definition excludes areas where building users would not expect, or be expected, to control temperature in the space, including the following: a. b. c. d. Atria/association space Entrance halls/reception areas Circulation areas Storerooms SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Hea 12 Issue Title Microbial Contamination Hea 12 Microbial Contamination No. of credits available 1 83 Minimum standards Yes Aim To ensure the building services are designed to reduce the risk of legionellosis in operation. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. All water systems in the building are designed in compliance with the measures outlined in the Health and Safety Executive’s “Legionnaires' disease - The control of legionella bacteria in water systems”. Approved Code of Practice and guidance, 200040. 2. Where no humidification is specified or only steam humidification is provided. Compliance Notes New Build Refurbishment Extensions to existing buildings CIBSE TM13 Assessor’s responsibility There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. If the extended and existing building share the same water systems, then these systems must be assessed against the criteria regardless of whether the existing building forms a part of the assessment or not. If the extension is served by independent systems, only these need be assessed against the Assessment Criteria. If it is the intention that building users of the extended building will use water systems in the existing building, then it must be confirmed that the existing systems comply with the criteria. Design teams may refer to CIBSE TM13 Minimising the risk of Legionnaires disease, 200241 in demonstrating that the design meets the criteria of ACoP. The BREEAM assessor is not required to confirm that the design is compliant with the relevant standard; this is the responsibility of the design team. The assessor is simply required to record, for the purposes of validation, whether or not the design team confirms compliance. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 84 Hea 12 Microbial Contamination BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Schedule of Evidence Required Req. 1&2 Design Stage Post Construction Stage A copy of the relevant specification clause(s) confirming: • All types of water system in the building and on the assessed site. • The standards to which all water systems in the building will be designed. For all water systems in the building, a formal letter of declaration from the design team, main contractor or installer of the relevant systems confirming: • The design and installed systems comply with the HSE’s ACoP. • If relevant, any existing water systems comply with the HSE’s ACoP. Where design responsibility is to be passed on to the contractor/installer, a copy of the relevant specification clause(s) stating: • The criteria on the contractor/installer with regards to minimising the risk of Legionnaires disease from the specified water systems. Additional Information Relevant definitions Water systems: For the purpose of this issue, this refers to: • Cooling towers • Evaporative condenser • Domestic hot and cold water systems • Other plant and systems containing water which is likely to exceed 20°C and which may release a spray or aerosol during operation or when being maintained, for example: o humidifiers and air washers o spa baths and pools o car/bus washes o wet scrubbers o Indoor fountains and water features. Legionnaires disease: The HSE describes Legionnaires disease as a type of pneumonia caused by the bacterium Legionella pneumophilia. People catch Legionnaires' disease by inhaling small droplets of water suspended in the air, which contain the bacteria. Humidification Units Humidification options fall into two broad groups; the first group relies on a heated air stream evaporating water vapour either from a pond or stream of water. This includes so-called ‘trickle-down’ systems. These are dependent on sterilisation technologies such as UV, ultrasonic etc, to ensure that the water vapour is not contaminated. Whilst these systems are effective when working properly, any partial failure will allow untreated water into a warmed air stream. Where this occurs, the health-related consequences are likely to be significant. The second group relies on failsafe systems that minimise risk if the plant fails. The only option in this group is steam humidification. This process sterilises the water vapour and ensures that untreated water cannot enter the air stream when no steam is being produced. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Hea 13 Issue Title Acoustic Performance Hea 13 Acoustic Performance No. of credits available N/A 85 Minimum standards No Issue not assessed under this scheme. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 86 Hea 14 Office Space Issue ID Hea 14 Issue Title Office Space Issue not assessed under this scheme SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available N/A Minimum standards No BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Hea 15 Issue Title Outdoor Space Hea 15 Outdoor Space No. of credits available 87 Minimum standards 1 No Aim To recognise and encourage the provision of external amenity space for building users. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. There is an outside space that: a. Is of adequate size b. Is accessible via safe pedestrian routes to all potential users of the building, regardless of age, disability or gender (as per Approved Document Part M42) c. Is either an outdoor landscaped area, balcony or terrace d. Provides the building users with an external area that is private and not susceptible to disturbance from sources of noise e.g. building services, car parks, delivery areas e. Provides appropriate seating and areas that allows building users to gather and socialise. Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. Refurbishment There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Extensions to There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the existing assessment of extensions to existing buildings. buildings Adequate size Due to the site specific nature of this issue, BREEAM sets no requirement on the 2 size (m ) of the outdoor space. When assessing if the space is ‘of adequate size’ the BREEAM assessor must be satisfied that it provides enough amenity for the predicted number of building users during coffee/lunch breaks, or for other activities where such a space would be of use. Where there is an external space and, in the opinion of the assessor, it does not provide an appropriate amenity given the building type and number of users, the credit must be withheld. CSH assessed For buildings with self-contained dwellings also being assessed under the Code dwellings for Sustainable Homes (CSH) methodology, the following applies: Where CSH issue Hea 3 (Private Space) has been achieved under the CSH, the credit available in Multi-residential issue Hea 15 can also be awarded, provided that all dwellings in the building have achieved the credit. Therefore, for dwellings or bedrooms not assessed under the CSH, confirmation that the above requirements have been met will be required. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 88 Hea 15 Outdoor Space BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage 1 A proposed site plan highlighting: • The design and layout of the outdoor amenity area. • The provision of seating • The accessibility of the space from the assessed building • Any potential sources of noise. Assessor’s building/site inspection report and photographic evidence confirming: • The provision of a compliant outdoor space. AND where relevant AND where relevant Evidence in line with the Post Construction Stage evidence requirements of the CSH issue Hea 3. Evidence in line with the Design Stage evidence requirements of the CSH issue Hea 3. OR OR A copy of the Post Construction Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH Issue Hea 3. A copy of the Design Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH issue Hea 3. Additional Information Relevant Definitions None. The Commission for Architecture and the Built Environment (CABE) website contains best practice guidance and information on initiatives associated with the design of the ‘public space’ and children’s play areas (www.cabe.org.uk). SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Hea 16 Issue Title Drinking Water Hea 16 Drinking Water No. of credits available N/A 89 Minimum standards No Issue not assessed under this scheme. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 90 Hea 17 Specification of Laboratory Fume Cupboards Issue ID Hea 17 Issue Title Specification of Laboratory Fume Cupboards Issue not assessed under this scheme. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available N/A Minimum standards No BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Hea 18 Issue Title Containment Level 2 & 3 Laboratory areas Hea 18 Containment Level 2 & 3 Laboratory Areas No. of credits available N/A 91 Minimum standards No Issue not assessed under this scheme. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 92 Hea 19 Arts in Health Issue ID Hea 19 Issue Title Arts in Health Issue not assessed under this scheme. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available N/A Minimum standards No BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Hea 20 Issue Title Home Office Hea 20 Home Office No. of credits available 1 93 Minimum standards No Aim To ensure residents have the ability to access IT services in the comfort and security of their own home. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance; 1. For self contained flats and individual study bedrooms, provision of sufficient space and services in a suitable location with the provision of the following: a. Two double sockets. Sockets should be positioned to avoid the use of extension leads. b. Two telephone points (or double telephone point) or equivalent (in the case of access to broadband, cable network, etc). The provision of splitters does not comply with the criteria. c. A window d. Adequate ventilation, either through an openable window or with alternative ventilation such as passive stack, etc e. Minimum size (1.8m wall length) to allow a desk and filing cabinet or bookshelf to be installed, with space to move around and open the door. 2. For sheltered housing (of which may include self contained flats within it) and other Multi-residential accommodation, the provision of the following: a. A dedicated, shared IT space provided with a minimum of one computer space for every 20 dwellings Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. Refurbishment There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Extensions to There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to existing the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. buildings CSH assessed For buildings with self-contained dwellings also being assessed under the dwellings Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH) methodology, the following applies: Where CSH issue Ene 9 (Home Offices) has been achieved under the CSH, the credit available in Multi-residential issue Hea 20 can also be awarded, provided that all dwellings in the building have achieved the credit. Therefore, for dwellings or bedrooms not assessed under the CSH, confirmation that the above requirements have been met will be required. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 94 Hea 20 Home Office Telephone points Adequate ventilation Space requirements Suitable location BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Although two telephone points are required (where access to broadband is not available) it is not necessary to have two separate telephone lines to each flat (or study bedroom) If the development is connected to a cable network, broadband or similar, this can replace the requirement for two telephone points, subject to the following conditions: • The necessary infrastructure to support the service is in place and each individual flats (or study bedrooms) is connected. • Two items can be plugged in at the same time (but not necessarily be used at the same time). Standard trickle vents do not comply with the ventilation requirements on their own. In some circumstances, the 1.8m wall size requirement can be altered if drawings can prove that a standard sized desk can be fitted using an alternative arrangement, i.e. alcove or similar, fulfilling all the above criteria. For flats with three or more bedrooms, the space should be in a room other than the kitchen, living room, master bedroom or bathroom. For one and two bedroom flats, the space may be in the living room, one of the bedrooms or any other suitable area in the dwelling, such as a large hall or dining area, provided that the criteria are met. However, the room must be large enough so not to prevent the intended use of that particular room. For example, if a home office is to be set up in the main bedroom, it will also need to be able to fit in a double bed and other necessary furnishings. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. 1-2 Design Stage Drawings or specification text* detailing: For study bedrooms and self contained flats the location of and/or sufficient space for; • The home office • Two telephone points (or double telephone points) or equivalent (in the case of access to broadband, cable network, etc). • Power sockets • Ventilation. For sheltered housing and other multiresidential buildings: • Location and sufficient space for a shared IT space. *or a letter of instruction to a contractor/supplier or a formal letter from the developer to the assessor giving the specific undertaking SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 Post Construction Stage Confirmation that the Design Stage solution was implemented or full details (drawings and specifications) provided of As-Built Specification. This could be provided by: Assessor Site Inspection Report OR Drawings showing location of and sufficient space for the home office and required services or shared IT space OR Photographic evidence AND where relevant Evidence in line with the Post Construction Stage evidence requirements of the CSH issue Ene 9. BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Hea 20 Home Office AND where relevant OR Evidence in line with the Design Stage evidence requirements of the CSH issue Ene 9. A copy of the Post Construction Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH Issue Ene 9. 95 OR A copy of the Design Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH issue Ene 9 Additional Information Relevant definitions None. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 96 Hea 21 Sound Insulation Issue ID Hea 21 Issue Title BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available Sound Insulation 4 Minimum standards No Aim To ensure that the provision of improved sound insulation to reduce the likelihood of noise complaints from neighbours. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance; One credit 1. Airborne sound insulation values are at least 3dB higher and impact sound insulation values are at least 3dB lower than the performance standards set out in the Building Regulations for England and Wales, Approved Document E (2003 edition, with amendments 2004)43. 2. A programme of pre-completion testing is carried out by a compliant test body based on the normal programme of testing described in Approved Document E for every group or sub-group of dwellinghouses, flats or rooms for residential purposes; this must demonstrate that the performance standards above are achieved. OR Use of constructions for all relevant building elements have been assessed and approved by Robust Details Limited (RDL) and found to achieve the performance standards required for the number of credits sought. Three credits 1. Where evidence provided demonstrates that airborne sound insulation values are at least 5dB higher and impact sound insulation values are at least 5dB lower than the performance standards set out in the Building Regulations for England and Wales, Approved Document E (2003 edition, with amendments 2004). AND 2. Compliance with criteria 2 above (listed under the first credit). OR 3. Where separating walls or floors only occur between non-habitable rooms. Four credits 1. Where evidence provided demonstrates that airborne sound insulation values are at least 8dB higher and impact sound insulation values are at least 8dB lower than the performance standards set out in the Building Regulations for England and Wales, Approved Document E (2003 edition, with amendments 2004). AND SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Hea 21 Sound Insulation 97 2. Compliance with criteria 2 above (listed under the first credit). OR 3. Where the dwellings are detached. Compliance Notes New Build Refurbishment Extensions to existing buildings CSH assessed dwellings Robust Details Relevant building areas There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. Building’s with self-contained dwellings also being assessed under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies: The number of credits achieved for the self-contained dwellings assessed under the CSH issue Hea 2 (Sound Insulation) can also be applied to this issue of the Multi-residential assessment for those dwellings. Other residential and non-residential areas, not forming part of a self-contained dwelling, must meet the above requirements in order for this credit to be awarded. It must be noted that the Robust Details scheme is not applicable in the assessment of forms of construction which fall into the categories of material change of use or rooms for residential purposes. (Refer to additional Guidance section for more detail/definition of Robust Details.) This issue is applicable to the following building areas: • Individual bedrooms • Self contained dwellings All areas to be assessed under this issue are clearly identified in the Multiresidential assessment scoring spreadsheet. Special case Testing should be between habitable rooms on the Ground Floor and at higher storey levels if applicable. No testing is needed if there are no habitable rooms with separating walls or floors. In such cases, three credits can be awarded by default, to allow for the small amount of sound nuisance that can occur in such cases. Where there are insufficient suitable separating walls or floors in a development to carry out the number of tests specified in AD E, all of the available suitable separating walls or floors should be tested. Where all the available suitable separating walls and floors have been tested, this will be considered to be equivalent to the requirements in AD E and credits will be awarded as appropriate. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 98 Hea 21 Sound Insulation BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage ALL Text confirming (on drawings or in the specification*) a commitment to meet the relevant sound insulation performance levels (as outlined in the credit criteria above). Confirmation that the Design Stage solution was implemented: *or a letter of instruction to a contractor/supplier or a formal letter from the developer to the assessor giving the specific undertaking. OR Details of the programme of pre-completion testing to be carried out, including the number of groups and sub-groups. AND EITHER Copies of the sound insulation field test results and/or a letter of confirmation that the required sound insulation performance standards as detailed in the assessment criteria have been achieved. Evidence that the Compliant Test Body is UKAS accredited or covered by another scheme which is deemed to be equivalent. OR Brief details of separating walls/floors and flanking constructions, with evidence of the potential for the construction details to meet the relevant performance standards e.g. design statement from an acoustic consultant with appropriate expertise in building acoustics, or reference to text in the specification describing these requirements. Completed Robust Details Ltd checklists for all relevant constructions A commitment to carry out remedial works and to re-test to demonstrate the necessary performance standard(s) is/are achieved should any of the separating walls or floors fail to meet the required standard for sound insulation when tested for the first time OR Confirmation that the Compliant Test Body which will carry out pre-completion testing is accredited by UKAS or is a member of a scheme that is deemed to be equivalent. OR Confirmation that the Robust Details chosen will achieve the required performance standards for sound insulation (as applicable), such as that provided by the CSH page on the Robust Details Limited (RDL) website (see http://www.robustdetails.com/Code-forSustainable-Homes-fa62cdf) Confirmation that the relevant plots are registered with RDL (the Purchase Statement) SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 OR where relevant Evidence in line with the Post Construction Stage evidence requirements of the CSH issue Hea 2. A copy of the Post Construction Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH Issue Hea 2. BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Hea 21 Sound Insulation 99 OR where relevant Evidence in line with the Design Stage evidence requirements of the CSH issue Hea 2. OR A copy of the Design Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH issue Hea 2. Additional Information Relevant definitions Flat cluster: is defined within Building Regulations 2000 as a group of rooms for residential purposes which is: • Separated from the rest of the building in which it is situated by a door which is designed to be locked; and • Not designed to be occupied by a single household Compliant Test Body: Those organisations or individuals having UKAS accreditation or accredited by a European equivalent of UKAS. For details of equivalent European accreditation bodies, refer to the members of the European co-operation for Accreditation, www.european-accreditation.org. Organisations/individuals with the ANC registration scheme are deemed to satisfy this requirement at present as they are in the process of obtaining accreditation and have robust procedures in place to govern their members activities. Groups and Sub-groups: As defined in the Building Regulations for England and Wales Approved Document E: Resistance to the Passage of sound, section 1 (paragraphs 1.11 – 1.17). For example, flats and study bedrooms are usually considered as two separate groups, and if there are significant differences in construction type then the groups will need to be broken down into sub groups. In addition to this, where there are steps or staggers greater than 300mm between dwellings, dwellings without steps/staggers should be treated as a different sub-group to those with step/staggers. This is because the presence of steps/staggers is likely to improve performance. Habitable rooms: For the purpose of this issue, habitable rooms include any room where individuals will sit or lie down and require a reasonably quiet environmental to concentrate or rest. Such rooms are bedrooms, living rooms, dining rooms, studies as well as kitchen-dining and kitchen-living rooms. Non-habitable rooms: For the purpose of this issue, non-habitable rooms include any room that is not considered as defined above, such as kitchens, bathrooms, toilets, hallways, garages and laundry rooms. Room for residential purposes: is defined within the Building Regulations for England and Wales Approved Document E as a room, or a suite of rooms which is not a dwelling-house or a flat and which is used by one or more persons to live and sleep and includes a room in a hostel, hotel, a boarding house, a hall of residence or a residential home, whether or not the room is separated from or arranged in a cluster group with other rooms, but does not include a room in hospital, or other similar establishment, used for patient accommodation. Material change of use: is where there is a change in the purpose for which or the circumstance in which a building is used. Examples of this is where a buiding is used as a dwelling or fat, where it previously was not. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 100 Hea 21 Sound Insulation BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Robust Details: Robust Details (RDs) are construction solutions that provide an alternative to precompletion sound insulation testing as a method of complying with Requirements E1 of Approved Document E (2003 edition) of the Building Regulations (England and Wales) and the relevant plots on a development must be registered with RDL and built in accordance with the RD specification. To give a reasonable level of assurance that these details will achieve the requirement minimum standards, RDL carry out random inspections during construction and a random sound insulation tests after construction. A Robust Detail is deemed to be approved for BREEAM Multi-residential credits only when it achieves a specified performance level when assessed by RDL. Robust Details can only be used in relation to assessment for new build dwellings and cannot be used to assess the performance of construction details in rooms for residential purposes or material change of use. Specified performance level: Robust Details are approved for credits under the CSH where the specified performance levels set out below are met. Construction types that meet these levels are listed on the Robust Details website www.robustdetails.com on the CSH page. Where assessing self contained dwellings in Multi-residential buildings that are not defined as material change of use or rooms for residential purposes, Robust Details that meet the specified performance level as set out below can also comply with the credit criteria for self contained units in Multi-residential buildings and reference must be made to the CSH page on the Robust Details website: 1. Mature Robust Details (published for over 12 months and at least 100 test results) – regular assessment based on the 90th percentile of results from the last 100 site tests 2. Low use Robust Detail (published for over 12 months but fewer than 100 test results) – initial assessment based on the first 30 tests needed to qualify for the Robust Details scheme and the site tests available, and reviewed regularly as new test results become available, until it becomes a mature Robust Detail or is rejected. 3. New Robust Detail (published for less than 12 months and fewer than 100 test results) – initial assessment based on the first 30 tests needed to qualify for the Robust Details scheme, and reviewed regularly as new test results become available, until it becomes a mature Robust Detail or is rejected. It should be noted that not all RDs will necessarily achieve the performance levels required to achieve Multi-residential credits. If in doubt, please check the list of currently approved details with RDL directly at www.robustdetails.com or on 0870 240 8210 SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Ene 1 Reduction of CO2 Emissions 101 6.0 Energy Issue ID Ene 1 Issue Title Ene 1 Reduction of CO2 Emissions No. of credits available Minimum standards 15 Yes Aim To recognise and encourage buildings that are designed to minimise the CO2 emissions associated with their operational energy consumption. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. The number of credits achieved is determined by comparing the building’s CO2 performance with the table of benchmarks below, as follows: a. Building elements assessed against Approved Document Part L144 (domestic elements) use the CO2 emission rate from the SAP 2005 worksheet. b. Building elements assessed against Part L245 (non domestic elements) use the CO2 Index (EPC rating), taken from the Energy Performance Certificate (EPC). c. The total number of Ene 1 credits achieved is determined by area weighting the number of credits achieved for each separate part, according to the proportion of the building (m2) each part makes up, and adding the two together (and rounding down). Table 9 CO2 benchmarks and BREEAM credits CO2 Emission Rate (SAP) 2 BREEAM Credits Kg/m /year 1 40 2 35 3 32 4 30 5 28 6 26 7 24 8 22 9 20 10 18 11 15 12 10 13 5 14 2 15 0 CO2 Index (EPC Rating) New Build 63 53 47 45 43 40 37 31 28 25 23 20 18 10 0 Refurbishment 100 87 74 61 50 47 44 41 36 31over page Continued 28 25 22 18 15 SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 102 Ene 1 Reduction of CO2 Emissions BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Exemplar credit 1 <0 <0 ≤0 True zero carbon building Exemplar credit 2 For buildings that are part new-build part refurbishment refer to Compliance Notes. 2. The data from the SAP worksheet and Energy Performance Certificate must be entered in the Multi-residential Ene 1 calculator tool to determine the total number of Ene 1 credits. 3. The building must be modelled using a method compliant with the National Calculation Method (NCM) for each set of regulations. SAP 2005 Worksheets and an Energy Rating along with the certificate must be produced using approved software by an Accredited Energy Assessor. Historic Buildings only In addition to the above an additional 2 credits may be awarded (up to a maximum of 15) for carrying out the following: 1. A specialist study has been undertaken by a heritage conservation specialist, who is a full Member of the Institute of Historic Building Conservation, to investigate the implications of improving building fabric performance whilst minimising the potential negative impacts on both the historic character of the building and the condition of the building fabric. 2. The report makes recommendations for potential improvements to the building fabric in accordance with the guidance given in English Heritage’s Balancing the needs for energy conservation with those of building conservation: an Interim Guidance Note on the application of Part L46 and, as a minimum, covers the following issues: a. Each element of the following building elements (as a minimum) must be considered and recommendations for improvements made: i. Roof ii. External/Sheltered walls iii. Ground floor iv. Upper floors v. Windows and external doors vi. Junctions between building elements such as between roof and walls. vii. Junctions between different parts of the building such as between different ages or methods of construction. Where significant improvement cannot be made to an element then the report should state the reason, setting out in detail the conservation and/or building performance issues that have resulted in this recommendation. b. The potential for improvements in ventilation, air tightness and moisture control within the building, ensuring that these are considered in balance with that of the welfare of the historic building fabric. In general, tighter building fabric can be balanced with controlled ventilation improvements (passive and mechanical) and the benefits and disadvantages must be set out together with the recommendations. 3. The study must have been carried out at or prior to concept design stage (equivalent to RIBA stage C or earlier). 4. The building design has implemented and accounted for the study’s recommended improvements and, in particular, demonstrates: • The design strategy chosen is that which has the greatest impact in terms of potential improvements in energy use, whilst minimising the detrimental impacts on the historic building fabric. • That any improvements made to the thermal insulation of the building have been specified ’47 in accordance with the recommendations of ‘Thermal Insulation: avoiding risks’ . Exemplary level criteria SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Ene 1 Reduction of CO2 Emissions 103 The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM issue: 1. One additional innovation credit can be awarded where evidence provided demonstrates the building is designed to be a carbon neutral building as defined by the NCM (i.e. in terms of building services energy demand), as follows: a. A new building without any elements assessed against Part L1a, achieves a CO2 index of less than zero on the benchmark scale. b. A new building containing elements assessed against Part L1a and Part L2a, achieves both a CO2 index and CO2 Emission Rate of less than zero on the benchmark scale. c. A refurbished building achieves a CO2 emission rate of less than zero and/or a CO2 index equal to or less than zero on the benchmark scale. 2. Two additional innovation credits can be awarded where evidence provided demonstrates the building is designed to be a True zero carbon building (in terms of building services and operational energy demand). Compliance Notes New Build New buildings should compare their Energy Rating to the New Build benchmark scale. Refurbishment Existing buildings that have undergone or are undergoing major refurbishment should compare their Energy Rating to the Refurbishment benchmark scale. This separate scale aims to better recognise and encourage the energyefficient refurbishment of existing buildings which results in a significant reduction in the energy demand for that building. Extensions to Where an existing building is being extended (and only the new extension is existing being assessed) and that extension uses existing building services plant, the buildings energy modelling and CO2 Index must be based on the building fabric of the new extension and any existing, common, building services plant and new building services plant installed that will service the new extension. The energy modelling does not have to consider the existing building fabric where this will not form part of the scope of the BREEAM assessment. Nor does it have to consider existing building services where they are not supplying services (heating, cooling and/or ventilation) to the new extension being BREEAM assessed. Part new-build extension part refurbishment For assessments of buildings that are a mixture of new build and existing building refurbishment a weighted benchmark scale is used. The weighted benchmark scale is determined using the area (m2) for new build 2 and area (m ) for refurbishment and the two benchmark scales in Table 9 CO2 benchmarks and BREEAM credits If there is a higher proportion of new build to refurbishment then the weighted scale will be biased towards the benchmark scale for new buildings and vice-versa if there is a higher proportion of refurbished element. As the benchmarks are influenced by the split in areas between the new build element and major refurbished element of the assessed building, the benchmarks will change if the new build/refurbishment area totals change. To determine the weighted benchmark scale and number of credits achieved, the assessor must enter the area (m2) for new build and area (m2) for refurbishment in to the relevant box of the Ene 1 Reduction of CO2 emissions calculator. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 104 Ene 1 Reduction of CO2 Emissions BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Ene 1 calculator and CO2 emission rate taken from SAP The Ene 1 calculator adjusts the CO2 emission rate, taken from the SAP 2005 worksheet, to account for emissions from mechanical cooling systems and, for zero carbon assessments only. It also accounts for appliances and cooking related emissions. The calculator will also account for any emissions offset from additional allowable electricity generation and/or Biomass Community CHP systems. Self contained dwellings Self contained dwellings should compare their adjusted CO2 Emission Rate (as calculated using Multi-residential Ene 1 Calculator Tool) to the Part L1a benchmark scale, to determine the number of BREEAM points achieved for this issue. Where there are multiple dwellings, for the purposes of determining the number of BREEAM credits, the CO2 Emission Rate is the total of the areaweighted average of the CO2 Emission Rate of each individual dwelling. CSH assessed dwellings Renewable and low carbon Installations Accredited external renewables For buildings with self-contained dwellings also being assessed using the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies: The number of credits achieved under the CSH assessment of issue Ene 1 cannot be directly applied to this issue due to the difference in assessment criteria. However, where relevant, the data/information and output used in CSH assessment can also be used within the Ene 1 dwelling assessment section of the BREEAM Multi-residential scheme, provided compliance with all requirements of the CSH technical guide is met. Where included as part of the project and therefore assessed under this BREEAM issue, the installation of low or zero carbon technologies can be used to off-set the assessed building’s CO2 emissions. The LZC technology can be installed on-site, near-site where a private wire arrangement is in place (see relevant definitions) or off-site via accredited external renewables (see compliance note below). For the purpose of this BREEAM issue accredited external renewables are renewable energy schemes located off-site, but within the UK, which: • • • Are accredited renewables (as defined by the Energy Act 2004). These will be Renewable Energy Guarantee of Origin (REGO) certified Create new installed generation capacity, designed to meet the loads of the building (i.e. not just units of carbon) Are additional to capacity already required under the Renewables Obligation At the time of writing, BRE Global are not aware of a mechanism for accrediting off-site renewables and therefore any renewable energy schemes that meet the above definition; though some ESCOs may achieve these criteria. Energy exported to the grid Any electricity from an onsite LZC energy source that is exported to the grid may be included in the calculations as if it were used within the building. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 EPC certificates, BREEAM & building use/tenancy arrangement EPC in Scotland Ene 1 Reduction of CO2 Emissions 105 The legislative criteria for an Energy Performance Certificate vary according to building size, use, services and tenancy arrangement. In some instances an EPC will be required for the whole building, in others an EPC will be required for each individual unit or tenanted area within a building. The scope of a BREEAM assessment typically covers the whole building, regardless of whether that building consists of a number of units to be sub let. Where an EPC is required for each unit, for the purposes of determining the number of BREEAM credits, the CO2 index is the total of the area-weighted average of the CO2 index of each individual unit. Where the development contains conditioned common and/or landlord spaces, the area of these spaces, unless otherwise accounted for, should be divided and attributed amongst the separate units. The proportion of common area attributed to each unit must be equivalent to the ratio of each unit’s area as a proportion of the total area of all units. All units, heating systems and common areas within the assessed building must be accounted for in the assessment of Ene 1. For further information on the EPC criteria, refer to guidance on the Communities and Local Government Website (see references section). The approach adopted in Scotland for determining an Energy Rating differs from that used in England, Wales and Northern Ireland. Scotland bases its EPC rating on actual CO2 emissions, regardless of building type, whereas an EPC certificate for the other UK countries uses a CO2 Index. Whilst both approaches have their merit, for the purpose of comparing BREEAM-assessed buildings on a ‘level playing field’ a decision has been taken to adopt one approach – the CO2 Index. Using the approved software, buildings located in Scotland can easily determine their CO2 Index by changing the ‘Building Regulations & EPBD parameters’ in the ‘Project details’ tab of the NCM-compliant approved software from ‘EPC Scotland’ to ‘EPC England’ or ‘EPC Wales’ or ‘EPC Northern Ireland’. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 106 Ene 1 Reduction of CO2 Emissions BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage 1-3 A copy of the EPC output from the approved software for the assessed building at the design stage. A copy of the final registered Energy Performance Certificate from the approved software for the constructed building*. The Accredited Energy Assessor’s name and accreditation number (this information will be on the EPC). For buildings assessed in Scotland, a copy of the EPC Output from the approved software demonstrating the building’s CO2 Index. AND The accredited energy assessor’s name and accreditation number. A copy of the output from the Multiresidential Ene 1 calculator tool AND where relevant, A Design Stage SAP 2005 Worksheet* for each Energy Type and accompanying list of specifications from an Accredited Energy Assessor *Full worksheet (not including the DER Assumptions calculation), dated with energy assessor name, registration number and address of development, prepared at plans approval stage, *The final rating must account for any changes to the specification during construction; and the measured air leakage rate, ductwork leakage and fan performances (as required by Building Regulations). AND A copy of the output from the Multi-residential Ene 1 calculator tool. AND where relevant An As Built Stage – SAP 2005 Worksheet* for each Energy Type and accompanying list of specifications from an Accredited Energy Assessor, if different from the Design Stage. *Full amended worksheet (not including the assumptions made for the DER calculation), dated with energy assessor name, registration number and address of development, prepared at plans approval stage. Historic buildings only 1-3 A copy of the specialist’s report. heritage conservation A letter from the specialist confirming the qualifications, experience and IHBC status. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 The evidence required at this stage of assessment does not differ from that outlined at the design stage of assessment. BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 4 Ene 1 Reduction of CO2 Emissions 107 Marked-up drawings or a specification document demonstrating: • Implementation of the study’s recommendations47 • Compliance with ‘Thermal Insulation: avoiding risks’. ‘As built’ drawings and specification demonstrating: • Implementation of the study’s recommendations • Compliance with ‘Thermal Insulation: avoiding risks’. OR Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence demonstrating: • Examples of the recommendations of the study having been manifested in the actual complete building (as highlighted by the design team during the building inspection). Where a formal letter from the design team confirming the above will be implemented. Additional Information Relevant definitions Accredited energy assessor: An individual trained and qualified to use approved software and produce EPC ratings for non-domestic buildings who are members of an accredited scheme. A register of non-domestic accredited energy assessors can be found here: https://www.ndepcregister.com/ For a full list of approved accreditation schemes for Non-dwelling Energy Assessment’s visit www.communities.gov.uk Approved Software: Software approved by Communities and Local Government to produce Energy Performance Certificates (EPC) for non-domestic buildings and check compliance with building regulations. Carbon neutral building: Where net carbon dioxide emissions resulting from energy consumed in the operation of the space heating/cooling, hot-water systems, ventilation and internal lighting is zero or better. The calculation of CO2 emissions can take account of contributions from on-site, near-site and accredited external renewable/low carbon installations. Off-site renewables that are not accredited cannot be used to meet this definition. See also Zero Carbon Dwelling definition (below) 2 CO2 Emission Rate: The estimated carbon dioxide emissions per m for any self contained dwellings in the building, as designed. The CO2 Emission Rate is calculated by SAP and includes emissions from space and water heating and lighting; it can be found on the SAP worksheet output from accredited SAP software. Please note that the CO2 Emission Rate must not include the assumptions made as part of the DER calculation methodology, as defined in Approved Document L1a. The final CO2 Emission Rate required for the purposes of the BREEAM Multi-residential assessment is adjusted to include emissions from mechanical cooling and (for zero carbon assessments only) appliances and cooking and also emissions offset from additional allowable electricity generation and/or Community Biomass CHP systems. CO2 Index: The energy performance of a building (for England, Wales and N.I.) is shown on the EPC as a Carbon Dioxide (CO2) based index. It is this index that is used to determine where the building falls on the A+ to G rating scale and the number of BREEAM credits that can be awarded. Dynamic Simulation Model (DSM): A software tool that models energy inputs and outputs for different types of building over time. In certain situations, SBEM will not be sophisticated enough to provide an accurate assessment of a building’s energy efficiency. In these cases Government-approved SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 108 Ene 1 Reduction of CO2 Emissions BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 proprietary dynamic simulation models may be used. Communities and Local Government provide such approval. Energy type: A set of dwellings on a development site are of the same “Energy Type” if they have the same SAP output for DER, TER and HLP. They will exhibit each of the following: • The same dwelling size, built form and construction details; • The same space heating, hot-water system and controls; • The same orientation and level of over-shading/sheltering; and • The same assumed/actual air permeability and ventilation system. Historic buildings - For the purpose of assessing this BREEAM issue, historic buildings are defined as: a. Listed buildings b. Existing buildings situated in conservation areas (where the existing building itself has conservation status and contributes to the status of the conservation area) c. Existing buildings which are of architectural and historical interest and which are referred to as a material consideration in a local authority’s development plan d. Existing buildings of architectural and historic interest within national parks, areas of outstanding natural beauty, and world heritage sites. Institute of Historic Building Conservation (IHBC): The Institute of Historic Building Conservation (IHBC) is the professional institute which represents conservation professionals in the public and private sectors in the United Kingdom and Ireland. The IHBC exists to establish the highest standards of conservation practice to support the effective protection and enhancement of the historic environment. Full Membership of the IHBC is open to all whose principal skill, expertise, training and employment is in providing specialist advice for the conservation of the historic environment. Full Members are normally expected to demonstrate skills and experience under all of the IHBC's eight Areas of Competence. Multi-residential Ene 1 calculator tool: a spreadsheet based tool designed to simplify assessment of this issue, available via the BREEAM Assessor’s Extranet. Where a Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH) assessment is required in addition to the BREEAM Multiresidential assessment, a separate Ene 1 calculator tool can be obtained from BREEAM. This tool can be used to calculate results for both Multi-residential issue Ene 1 and CSH Ene 1 –Dwelling Emission Rate Issue. To obtain a copy of the tool please contact BREEAM on [email protected] Please note that this Ene 1 tool is only available to BREEAM Multi-residential assessors and CSH assessors licensed by BRE Global. Energy Performance Certificate: A certificate that confirms the energy rating of the building from A to G, where A is the most efficient and G is the least efficient. The better the rating, the more energyefficient the building is, and the lower the fuel bills are likely to be. The energy performance of the building is shown as a Carbon Dioxide (CO2) based index. EPCs are generated using approved software by accredited energy assessors. Non-Domestic Energy Performance Certificate Register: A register of accredited energy assessors and Energy Performance Certificates. Using the certificate reference number the validity of the EPC rating for a constructed building can be confirmed. Near-site LZC: renewable energy generated near to the site that is provided for all or part of the community, including the assessed building, e.g. decentralised energy generation linked to a community heat network or renewable connected via private wire. On-site LZC: renewable energy generated on the site of the assessed development. Part L1: Part L1 of the Building Regulations for England and Wales encompassing: Approved Document L1A – Conservation of Fuel and Power in New Dwellings (2006) and; Approved Document L1B – Conservation of Fuel and Power in Existing Dwellings (2006). SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Ene 1 Reduction of CO2 Emissions 109 Part L2: Part L2 of the Building Regulations for England and Wales encompassing: Approved Document L2A – Conservation of Fuel and Power in New Buildings Other Than Dwellings (2006) and; Approved Document L2B – Conservation of Fuel and Power in Existing Buildings Other Than Dwellings (2006). Private wire arrangement: Where used in the context of BREEAM for low or zero carbon technology installations, a private wire arrangement is where any electricity generated on or in the vicinity of the site is fed directly to the building being assessed, by dedicated power supplies. If electricity is generated which is surplus to the instantaneous demand of the building this electricity may be fed back to the National Grid. The carbon benefit associated with any electricity fed into the grid in this manner can only be allocated against an individual installation or building. In cases where a building is supplied by a communal installation, no carbon benefit can be allocated to buildings which are not connected to the communal installation. Standard Assessment Procedure (SAP): The approved methodology for rating the energy performance of dwellings. The indicators are used to demonstrate compliance with Approved Document Part L1A of the Building Regulations and for Energy Performance Certificates for new homes. The current version is SAP 2005. The SAP computation takes into account energy used for space heating, fixed lighting and hot-water provision. Heat and power for this element must be generated either in the home or on the development or through other local community arrangements (including district heat and power). SAP 2005 Worksheet: an output of SAP 2005 software summarising all relevant construction data and the calculated dwelling emissions. Design Stage or As-Built Worksheets should be used as appropriate SAP2005 DER Worksheet: an output of SAP 2005 software summarising all relevant construction data and the calculated dwelling emissions, including the assumptions included in AD L1A for calculation of the DER. Self Contained Dwelling: A single home with a bathroom, kitchen, living room and bedroom(s) designed for the occupants dedicated use and capable of occupation throughout the year. Simplified Building Energy Model (SBEM): SBEM is a computer program that provides an analysis of a building’s energy consumption. The SBEM tool is designed to cover buildings that are not dwellings. It has been adopted by government as part of the UK national methodology for calculation of the energy performance of buildings. For more information visit: www.ncm.bre.co.uk/. True zero carbon building: Where net carbon dioxide emissions resulting from energy consumed in the operation of the space heating/cooling, hot-water systems, ventilation, internal lighting AND process related energy consumption is zero or better. The calculation of CO2 emissions can take account of contributions from on-site, near-site and accredited external renewable/low carbon installations. Off-site renewables that are not accredited cannot be used to meet this definition. Zero Carbon Dwelling (BREEAM definition): Where net carbon dioxide emissions resulting from all energy used in the dwelling are zero or better. This includes the energy consumed in the operation of the space heating/cooling and hot-water systems, ventilation, all internal lighting, cooking and all electrical appliances. Net carbon dioxide emissions can be calculated using section 14 SAP 2005. The calculation of CO2 emissions can take account of contributions from on-site, near-site and accredited external renewable/low carbon installations. Off-site renewables that are not accredited cannot be used to meet this definition. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 110 Ene 2 Sub metering of Substantial Energy Uses Issue ID Ene 2 Issue Title Sub-metering of Substantial Energy Uses BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available 1 Minimum standards Yes Aim To recognise and encourage the installation of energy sub-metering that facilitates the monitoring of inuse energy consumption. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. Separate accessible energy sub-meters, labelled with the end energy consuming use, are provided for the following systems (where present): a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Space Heating Domestic Hot Water Humidification Cooling Fans (major) Lighting Small Power (lighting and small power can be on the same sub-meter where supplies are taken at each floor/department). h. Other major energy-consuming items where appropriate (see Compliance Notes). Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. Refurbishment There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Extensions to Where an existing building is being extended and it has existing building existing services plant and systems that will be common to both the new extension and buildings existing building, the criteria for energy metering cover the entire building. Lighting & small Due to traditional distribution methods, it can be difficult to cost-effectively power separate lighting and small power. It is acceptable, within a single floor, for lighting and small power to be combined for metering purposes, provided that sub-metering is provided for each floor plate. Other major Other major energy-consuming items, depending on the building type, might energyinclude, for example, plant used for swimming or hydrotherapy pools, kitchen consuming items plant, cold storage plant, laboratory plant, sterile services equipment, transportation systems (e.g. lifts & escalators) drama studios and theatres with large lighting rigs. See also CIBSE TM39: Building Energy Metering48 Modular boiler Where the building uses a modular system and the rated input power of the systems lead boiler is less than the figure in Table 10 Size of plant for which separate metering would be required(Additional Information), but greater than 10kW (see Additional Information), sub-metering of the lead boiler is still required to comply with the criteria of this issue. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Accessible meters Ene 2 Sub-metering of substantial Energy Uses 111 The energy meters must be located in an area of the building that allows for easy access to facilitate regular monitoring and readings by the buildings staff and facilities manager. Typically this will be the plant room, main distribution room or control room (where BMS is installed). Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage All Specification document or technical drawings confirming: • Energy-consuming systems and their rated outputs • Metering arrangements for each system, type and location of meter specified. • If applicable, scope of BMS and its energy-monitoring capability. Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence confirming: • Location and labelling/function of the individual sub-meters or BMS. Additional Information Relevant definitions BMS: Building (energy) Management System is a central computer controlling, monitoring and optimising building services and systems such as heating, air-conditioning, lighting and security. Common areas: Developments that have several tenant units, particularly large retail developments, may also share common facilities and access that is not owned or controlled by any one individual tenant, but used by all. Common areas are typically managed and maintained by the development’s owner, i.e. landlord or their managing agent. Examples of common areas include an atrium, external areas e.g. parking, stairwells and main entrance foyers/reception. Table 1049 Size of plant for which separate metering would be required Rated input power (kW) Plant Item Boiler installation comprising one or more boilers or CHP plant feeding a common distribution circuit 50 Chiller installations comprising one or more chiller units feeding a common distribution circuit 20 Electric humidifiers 10 Motor control centres providing power to fans and pumps 10 Final electrical distribution boards 50 Detailed guidance on how to develop an appropriate metering strategy for the energy criteria of a new building is available in CIBSE TM39 Building Energy Metering48 and General Information Leaflet 65: Metering energy use in new non-domestic buildings50. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 112 Ene 3 Sub-metering of high energy load and tenancy areas Issue ID Ene 3 Issue Title Sub-metering of High Energy Load and Tenancy Areas This issue is not assessed in this scheme. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available N/A Minimum standards No BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Ene 4 Issue Title External Lighting Ene 4 External Lighting No. of credits available 1 113 Minimum standards No Aim To recognise and encourage the specification of energy-efficient light fittings for external areas of the development. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance (where provided): 1. All external light fittings for the building, access ways and pathways have a luminous efficacy of at least 50 lamp lumens/circuit Watt when the lamp has a colour rendering index (Ra) greater than or equal to 60. OR 60 lamp Lumens / circuit Watt when the lamp has a colour rendering index (Ra) less than 60. 2. All external light fittings to car parking areas, associated roads and floodlighting has a luminous efficacy of at least 70 lamp lumens/circuit Watt when the lamp has a colour rendering index (Ra) greater than or equal to 60. OR 80 lamp Lumens / circuit Watts when the lamp has a colour rendering index (Ra) less than 60. 3. All external light fittings for signs and uplighting have a luminous efficacy of at least 60 lamp lumens/circuit Watt when the lamp wattage is greater than or equal to 25W. OR 50 lamp lumens/circuit Watt when the lamp wattage is less than 25W. 4. External light fittings are controlled through a time switch, or daylight sensor, to prevent operation during daylight hours. Daylight sensor override on a manually switched lighting circuit is acceptable. Compliance Notes New Build Refurbishment Extensions to existing buildings Single building assessments on larger developments/ campuses No external lighting specified There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Refer to the guidance below for single building assessments on large existing developments/campuses. Where the building being assessed forms part of larger development (or is an extension to an existing building) containing common areas and other buildings, the scope of the external lighting criteria apply only to external new and existing lighting within the construction zone of the assessed building. Where the building is designed to operate without external lighting, including external lighting on the building, signs and at entrances, the credit can be awarded. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 114 Ene 4 External Lighting Low energy innovative light fittings Decorative and floodlighting CSH Assessed Dwellings BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Any fitting that consumes less than 5W complies with the criteria provided each individual fitting is a direct replacement for an alternative, individual BREEAM-compliant fitting and provides an equivalent amount of light for the necessary task. The assessor must ensure that several low watt fittings are not being specified in place of one higher watt but overall more energy-efficient fitting. This compliance note is to allow for the specification of innovative low energy light sources, such as LEDs. Decorative lighting and floodlighting must not be exempt from the assessment criteria although temporary lighting such as theatrical, stage or local display installations, where specified, may be excluded. For buildings with self contained dwellings that are also being assessed under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies: Where the external space lighting credit for issue Ene 6 of the CSH has been achieved, the credit available for issue Ene 4 of the Multi-residential scheme is also achieved for the same external areas. Any external space lighting outside of the scope of CSH issue Ene 6, but within the wider scope of the MultiResidential scheme, must comply with the requirements of either CSH issue Ene 6 or BREEAM issue Ene 4 to achieve the credit. Where there are no self-contained dwellings in the building requiring a separate CSH assessment or where credits are not sought for CSH issue Ene 6, the BREEAM Multi-residential credit can only be awarded where the BREEAM Multi-residential issue requirements have been met for all relevant external lighting. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage 1-4 Marked-up site plan and building elevations showing: • Location and purpose of all external lighting fittings. As design stage, documentation. Lighting specification or lighting designer’s calculations confirming: • Lamp lumens/circuit watt for each type of fitting as well as the colour rendering index Ra (where appropriate) • External lighting control strategy.. Assessor’s building/site inspection photographic evidence confirming: • External lighting controls. but ‘as built’ AND and Manufacturers’ literature confirming: • Technical spec for the installed external light fittings. AND where relevant AND where relevant Evidence in line with the Design Stage evidence requirements of CSH issue Ene 6. Evidence in line with the Post Construction Stage evidence requirements of CSH issue Ene 6. OR OR A copy of the Design Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH issue Ene 6. A copy of the Post Construction Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH issue Ene 6. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Ene 4 External Lighting 115 Additional Information Relevant definitions Colour rendering index (Ra): A measure, between 0 and 100, of the ability of a lamp to reproduce the colour of objects in comparison to their aspect under a natural or reference source of light. An incandescent source has a Ra of 100 and a low pressure sodium source a Ra of 0 (see below for further information on colour rendering). Construction zone: For the purpose of this issue the construction zone is defined as the site which is being developed for the BREEAM-assessed building and its external site areas i.e. the scope of the new works. Daylight Sensors: A type of sensor that detects daylight and switches lighting on at dusk and off at dawn. Luminous efficacy in lamp Lumens per circuit Watt: The ratio between the luminous flux produced by a lamp (in Lumens) and the total power consumed by both the lamp and its associated control gear (in Watts). Time switch: A switch with an inbuilt clock which will allow lighting to be switched on and off at programmed times. Colour Rendering At night time, the sensitivity of the eye is shifted towards the blue region of the visual spectrum. As a result, lamps with poor colour rendering index, such as some sodium lamps that emit light between the yellow and red region of the visual spectrum, require more luminous output to light an object with the same level of brightness than a source with better colour rendering index. Sources with a poor colour rendering index also make the differentiation of coloured objects more difficult for individuals. In BS 5489-1:200351 Code of practice for the design of road lighting - Part 1: Lighting of roads and public amenity areas, this is acknowledged by allowing a relaxation of the lighting levels (illuminance levels) required when the source specified has a colour rendering index Ra greater than or equal to 60. The colour rendering index requirement means compliance with this issue using sources of light with a poor colour rendering index is harder to achieve than those with an index greater than or equal to 60. Other benefits of using sources with an index greater than 60 include an increased feeling of safety for individuals, making recognition of spaces and other individuals easier. In areas where CCTV is used, the colour rendering index of lighting sources is critical; an Ra value of at least 80 is recommended (but not required by BREEAM). SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 116 Ene 5 Low or zero carbon technologies Issue ID Issue Title Ene 5 Low or Zero Carbon Technologies BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available 3 Minimum standards Yes Aim To reduce carbon emissions and atmospheric pollution by encouraging local energy generation from renewable sources to supply a significant proportion of the energy demand. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: First credit 1. A feasibility study has been carried out by an energy specialist (see Compliance Notes) to establish the most appropriate local (on-site or near-site) LZC energy source for the building/development. This study covers as a minimum: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. Energy generated from LZC energy source per year Payback Land use Local planning criteria Noise Feasibility of exporting heat/electricity from the system Life cycle cost/lifecycle impact of the potential specification in terms of carbon emissions Any available grants All technologies appropriate to the site and energy demand of the development. Reasons for excluding other technologies. 2. A local LZC energy technology has been specified for the building/development in line with the recommendations of the above feasibility study. 3. The feasibility study has been carried out at RIBA stage C (concept design) or equivalent procurement stage. OR 4. The organisation that occupies the building has in place a contract with an energy supplier to provide electricity for the assessed building/development from a 100% renewable energy source. This supply must be delivered by an accredited external renewable source. The contract must be valid for a minimum of 3 years from the date the assessed building becomes occupied. Second credit 1. The first credit for a feasibility study must be achieved. 2. A local LZC energy technology has been installed in line with the recommendations of the above feasibility study and this method of supply results in a 10% reduction in the building’s CO2 emissions. 3. Figures used for calculations of the percentage carbon reduction provided by LZC technology are based on the output from approved energy modelling software. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Ene 5 Low or zero carbon technologies 117 Third credit 1. The first credit for a feasibility study must be achieved. 2. A local LZC energy technology has been installed in line with the recommendations of the above feasibility study and this method of supply results in a 15% reduction in the building’s CO2 emissions. 3. Figures used for calculations of the percentage carbon reduction provided by LZC technology are based on the output from approved energy modelling software. Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM issue. 1. The first credit for a feasibility study must be achieved. 2. A local LZC energy technology has been installed in line with the recommendations of the above feasibility study and this method of supply results in a 20% reduction in the building’s CO2 emissions. 3. Figures used for calculations of the percentage carbon production provided by LZC technology are based on the output from approved energy modelling software. Buildings complying with the exemplary level criteria would therefore achieve four credits for this issue. Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. Refurbishment There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Extensions to There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to existing the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. buildings SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 118 Ene 5 Low or zero carbon technologies Code for Sustainable Homes Assessed Dwellings BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 In cases where a Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH) assessment is required in addition to the BREEAM Multi-residential assessment, the following set of criteria can be used to determine the number of credits to award for this issue. First credit: A feasibility study must be produced that meets the requirements defined in this issue (above). Note: the requirements of the first credit must be met in all cases to achieve the second, third and exemplary level credits. Second credit: • All assessed dwellings must meet the requirements for one credit under CSH issue Ene 7 – Low or Zero Carbon (LZC) Technologies, and; • Evidence must be provided to demonstrate that the specified LZC technologies meet the compliance requirements of this issue and provide enough additional generation to reduce the CO2 emissions from all other building elements by 10%. Third credit: • All dwellings must meet the requirements for two credits under CSH issue Ene 7, and; • Evidence must be provided to demonstrate that the specified LZC technologies meet the compliance requirements of this issue and provide enough additional generation to reduce the CO2 emissions from all other building elements by 15% Exemplary credit: • All dwellings must meet the requirements for two credits under CSH issue Ene 7, with a percentage reduction in CO2 emissions of at least 20% and; • Evidence must be provided to demonstrate that the specified LZC technologies meet the compliance requirements of this issue and provide enough additional generation to reduce the CO2 emissions from all other building element by 20% When applying the “CSH Assessed Dwellings” criteria above, the energy generated from any LZC technologies must first be made available (i.e. accountable) to any dwelling where an emissions benefit is being claimed. Feasibility study When undertaking a feasibility study at a later stage than outline proposals, an additional element will need to be included in the report to highlight the local LZC energy sources which have been discounted due to the constraints placed on the project by the late consideration, and the reason for their omission. If the feasibility study discounts all local LZC as unfeasible due to the late stage in the project that the study was commissioned, then the credit for the feasibility study must be withheld. If the feasibility was commissioned at the outline proposals stage or earlier and in the unlikely event the study concludes that the specification of any local LZC technology is unfeasible, the first credit can still be awarded. Subsequent credits for installing LZC technology that meets a percentage of building energy demand will not be achievable. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 List of recognised LZC technologies Ene 5 Low or zero carbon technologies 119 Technologies recognised by the Department for Business Enterprise and Regulatory Reform (BERR) Low Carbon Buildings Programme (LCBP) may be considered as part of a low or zero carbon emissions solution. The following list details the technologies recognised by the BERR, LCBP at the time of going to print: Solar • Solar hot water • Photovoltaics Water • Small scale hydro power • Tidal power • Wave power Wind • Wind turbines Biomass • Biomass single room heaters/stoves • Biomass boilers • Biomass community heating schemes Combined Heat and Power (CHP) for use with the following fuels: • Biomass • Natural gas • Sewerage gas and other biogases CHP systems must meet the threshold criteria for good quality CHP as set by DEFRA’s CHPQA programme52 Community heating, including utilising waste heat from processes such as large scale power generation where the majority of heating comes from waste heat (see also Compliance Notes below). Heat Pumps • Ground source heat pumps • Water source heat pumps • Geothermal heating systems • Air source heat pumps For heat pumps to comply, the heat source (ground or water) must be from a renewable source, for example soil, outside air, ground water, or a river. Other • Fuel cells using hydrogen generated from any of the above ’renewable’ sources The list above is not a definitive list of technologies compliant with BREEAM, but a list of those technologies that may be considered to comply. If the assessor has a justified reason to doubt the low or zero carbon credentials/feasibility of the above technologies, where specified for a development they are assessing, they can justifiably withhold the available BREEAM credits. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 120 Ene 5 Low or zero carbon technologies BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 LZC technology not listed Other systems may be acceptable as part of a LZC strategy under this issue but are not inherently considered as LZC technologies. Acceptability will be dependent on the nature of the system proposed. The BREEAM Assessor must confirm acceptability with BRE if in doubt. Waste heat from a building related operational process Waste heat from a process that takes place within the assessed building (or on the assessed site), for the purpose of this BREEAM issue, can be considered as ‘Low carbon’. This is on the condition that the generation of the heat from the process is integral to the assessed building. Waste incineration Waste heat from an incineration plant can only be considered as a low carbon for the purpose of this BREEAM issue under the following circumstances: 1. All other LZC technologies have been considered and discounted in the feasibility study. And either 2. The Local Authority or region in which the incineration plant is located is demonstrably meeting its annual waste reuse/recycling targets and waste management policies. Or 3. A near- or onsite facility connected to the building, via a private wire arrangement, which demonstrably removes re-usable and recyclable waste material prior to incineration. Given the current uncertainty over their impact on biodiversity, global food production and green house gas savings, plus the ease of inter-changeability between fossil fuels, BREEAM does not recognise or reward building systems fuelled by first generation biofuels manufactured from feedstock’s e.g. biofuels manufactured from sugars, seeds, grain, animal fats etc. BREEAM will recognise systems using second generation biofuels (see relevant definitions) or biofuels manufactured from biodegradable waste materials e.g. biogas, or locally and sustainably sourced solid biofuels e.g. woodchip, wood pellets. Biofuels Community and off-site schemes Export to the grid More than one technology Building assessed part of a larger development LZC technology already available on site Calculation of the CO2 emissions saved ‘Local’ does not have to mean on-site and community schemes (near site) can be used as means of demonstrating compliance. As this BREEAM issue seeks to encourage the installation of on-site and near-site LZC technologies, accredited external renewables (accept where stated to achieve one credit) cannot be used to demonstrate compliance with the criteria of this BREEAM issue. Any electricity from an onsite LZC energy source that is exported to the grid may be included in the calculations as if it were used within the building. The percentage can be made up from more than one of the above technologies. Where the building under assessment forms part of a larger development and either a new or existing LZC installation is provided for the whole site, then the amount of LZC energy generation counted for in this issue, and subsequent CO2 emissions saved, should be proportional to the building’s energy demand compared to the total energy demand for the site (see also note below on existing LZC technology). For developments where there is an existing LZC energy source that can supply a compliant percentage of energy to the assessed building, a feasibility study will still have to be carried out to demonstrate that the existing technology is the most appropriate for the assessed building/development. The study should seek to identify any other options to supply a higher proportion of the building's energy demand in addition to that supplied by the existing source. When calculating the energy contribution and CO2 emissions saved from the LZC installation the following rules should be applied: • The net yield of the LZC installation(s) must be used (i.e. subtract any CO2 related to the energy used by the LZC technology itself such as pumps, inverters, controllers, etc). SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 • Process-related energy Ene 5 Low or zero carbon technologies 121 The percentage CO2 savings should be calculated using the following assumptions: o Renewable heat energy is displacing gas where the location for the building would practically have access to a gas connection. Where there is no access to a gas connection assume oil is being displaced.* o Renewable electrical energy is displacing grid electricity at the national CO2 conversion rate. * The design team is required to provide the assessor with sufficient justification that gas is not available. For the purpose of assessing this BREEAM issue, energy and subsequent CO2 emissions from process-related activities can be excluded from the total when calculating the percentage reduction in CO2 emissions. For example energy required for cold storage, catering facilities and laundry equipment can be excluded. Display lighting energy demand, where specified, must not be excluded. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage First Credit 1&3 A copy of the feasibility study report. Letter from the energy specialist confirming: • Compliance with the definition of an energy specialist • The timing of the feasibility report within the plan of works. 2 Assessor’s building/site inspection (or “as built” drawings) and photographic evidence confirming: • Installation of LZC technology. Marked-up design plan or specification confirming: • Proposed installation of LZC energy technology. Manufacturer’s technical data and details or calculations stating the carbon savings as a result of the installed LZC technology. 4 Where an offsite supply is being used as a method of compliance, supplier’s documentation confirming: • Name and details of supplier • Details of the source of supply. As design stage evidence. A copy of the contract or other formal documentation confirming the length of contract to supply 100% renewable energy. Second, Third & Exemplary Level Credit 1 Evidence (as outlined above) confirming compliance with the first credit. 2&3 A copy of the report produced by the approved energy modelling software illustrating; Evidence (as outlined above) confirming compliance with the first credit. Where there have been changes to the proposed design or LZC technology specification, a copy of the ‘as built’ report SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 122 Ene 5 Low or zero carbon technologies • • • The name of the approved software used to carry out the modelling Confirmation of the expertise and experience of the individual carrying out the modelling Total CO2 emissions for the assessed building (without LZC energy technology). BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 produced by the Building Regulationscompliant energy model confirming the same data as outlined at the design stage. AND ALL Calculations/outputs from the manufacturer, supplier, engineer or approved software confirming: • Total carbon savings as a result of the installed LZC technology. AND where relevant AND where relevant Evidence in line with the Design Stage evidence requirements of the Code for Sustainable Homes issue Ene 7. Evidence in line with the Design Stage evidence requirements of the Code for Sustainable Homes issue Ene 7 OR OR A copy of the Design Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH issue Ene 7. A copy of the Design Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH issue Ene 7. Additional Information Relevant definitions Accredited External Renewables: Please refer to the Compliance Notes in BREEAM issue Ene 1. Approved Energy Modelling Software: Please refer to the relevant definitions in BREEAM issue Ene 1. Energy Specialist: An individual who has acquired substantial expertise or a recognised qualification for undertaking assessments, designs and installations of low or zero carbon solutions in the commercial buildings sector; and is not professionally connected to a single low or zero carbon technology or manufacturer. First and second generation biofuels: first generation biofuels are biofuels made from sugar, starch, vegetable oil, or animal fats using conventional technology. Second generation biofuels are biofuels from lignocellulosic biomass feedstock using advanced technical processes53 Common first generation biofuels include vegetable oil, biodiesel and bioalchols. Feasibility credit objective: The objective of the feasibility study is to make sure that LZC energy technologies installed on a particular site are the most appropriate for this site and ensure maximum reduction of pollutants to the atmosphere. Therefore, no credit can be awarded if a feasibility study has not been undertaken. Life Cycle Costs: the total cost of a building or its parts throughout its life, including the costs of planning, design, acquisition, operations, maintenance and disposal, less any residual value, in terms of carbon emissions. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Ene 5 Low or zero carbon technologies 123 Life cycle impact: this is the requirement to look at the carbon balance of each technology over its whole life. Encouraging people to not just the savings or emissions over its operational life but also the savings or emissions over the whole life of the technology (from ‘cradle to grave’), therefore reflecting the fact that different technologies have different life spans. Near-site LZC: Please refer to the relevant definitions in BREEAM issue Ene 1. On-site renewable: Please refer to the relevant definitions in BREEAM issue Ene 1. Private wire arrangement: Please refer to the relevant definitions in BREEAM issue Ene 1. Payback period: the period of time needed for a financial return on an investment to equal the sum of the original investment. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 124 Ene 6 Building fabric performance and avoidance of air infiltration Issue ID Ene 6 Issue Title Building fabric performance and avoidance of air infiltration Issue not assessed under this scheme. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available N/A Minimum standards No BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Ene 7 Issue Title Cold Storage Ene 7 Cold Storage No. of credits available N/A 125 Minimum standards No Issue not assessed under this scheme. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 126 Ene 8 Lifts Issue ID Ene 8 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue Title Lifts Issue not assessed under this scheme. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 No. of credits available N/A Minimum standards No BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Ene 9 Issue Title Escalators and travelling walkways Ene 9 Escalators and travelling walkways No. of credits available N/A 127 Minimum standards No Issue not assessed under this scheme. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 128 Ene 10 Free Cooling Issue ID Ene 10 Issue Title Free Cooling Issue not assessed under this scheme. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available N/A Minimum standards No BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Ene 11 Issue Title Energy Efficient Fume Cupboards Ene 11 Energy efficient fume cupboards No. of credits available N/A 129 Minimum standards No Issue not assessed under this scheme. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 130 Ene 12 Swimming pool ventilation and heat loss Issue ID Ene 12 Issue Title Swimming pool ventilation and heat loss Issue not assessed under this scheme. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available N/A Minimum standards No BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Ene 13 Issue Title Labelled Lighting Controls Ene 13 Labelled lighting controls No. of credits available N/A 131 Minimum standards No Issue not assessed under this scheme. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 132 Ene 14 BMS Issue ID Ene 14 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue Title BMS Issue not assessed under this scheme. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 No. of credits available N/A Minimum standards No BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Ene 15 Issue Title Provision of energy efficient white goods Ene 15 Provision of energy efficient equipment No. of credits available 133 Minimum standards 2 No Aim To recognise and encourage procurement and commissioning of energy-efficient equipment to ensure optimum performance and energy savings. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: First credit 1. Where specified, new fridges and freezers or fridge-freezers have an A+ rating under the EU Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme. 2. If not all types of appliances will be provided (but will be required and purchased during occupation by the tenant/owner), information on the EU Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme of efficient white goods must be provided to the residential aspect of the building (see also Compliance Note below: ‘No White Goods Specified’). Second credit: 1. Where specified, new washing machines and dishwashers have an A rating (or better) and washerdryers or tumble dryers have a B rating (or better) under the EU Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme. 2. In addition, where there is a communal laundry room within the development, it must comply with the following requirements: At least one of the following can be demonstrated for commercial sized appliances: a. Specification of heat recovery from waste water b. Use of greywater for part of the washing process i.e. either water from the final rinse used for the next pre-wash or water sourced from a rain water collection tank(s). 3. If not all types of appliances will be provided (but will be required and purchased during occupation by the tenant/owner), information on the EU Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme of efficient white goods must be provided to the residential aspect of the building (see also Compliance Note below: ‘No White Goods Specified’). Compliance Notes New Build Refurbishment Extensions to existing buildings There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 134 Ene 15 Provision of energy efficient equipment White goods in communal facilities CSH Assessed Dwellings No white goods provided BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Where domestic-scale white goods will be installed in communal areas/facilities then those goods must also be assessed against the BREEAM criteria. For buildings with self-contained dwellings that are also being assessed under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies: Where credits have been achieved under issue Ene 5 of the CSH, then these residential areas comply for the purpose of this issue in the Multi-residential assessment for the self-contained dwellings part of the building. To achieve the available credit, any domestic scale white goods provided in other residential and non residential areas of the building not forming part of a selfcontained dwelling, such as in communal kitchens, will need to meet the criteria defined above. If no appliances will be provided (but will required and purchased during occupation by the tenant/owner), information on the EU Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme of efficient white goods must be provided to the residential aspect of the building and a maximum of one credit can be achieved for this issue. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage 1-2 A copy of the relevant specification clause confirming: Make and model of all white goods to be provided. Manufacturer’s literature confirming the EU Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme energy rating for all white goods installed AND EITHER Manufacturer’s literature confirming the EU Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme energy rating for all white goods to be provided. Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence confirming installation of compliant white goods. OR OR A formal letter from the design team or building occupier confirming the specific undertaking. Copies of purchase orders/receipts for all white goods provided and confirmation of installation. AND where relevant AND where relevant Evidence in line with the Design Stage evidence requirements of CSH issue Ene 5 Evidence in line with the Post Construction Stage evidence requirements of CSH issue Ene 5. OR OR A copy of the Design Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH Issue Ene 5. A copy of the Post Construction Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH issue Ene 5. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 3 Ene 15 Provision of energy efficient equipment 135 If no white goods are provided: If no white goods are provided: A copy of a leaflet describing the EU Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme. The information should clearly explain what the EU Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme is and how it works. The evidence required at this stage is the same as that outlined at the design stage. Text on drawings or in the specification* confirming that leaflets are going to be provided to all relevant residential areas of the building. OR Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence confirming presence of information in the residential area of the building. * A formal letter from the design team or building occupier confirming the specific undertaking. Additional Information Relevant definitions The Energy Saving Trust website contains information on products covered by the EU Energy Efficiency Label: • www.energysavingtrust.org.uk/Compare-and-buy-products • www.energysavingtrust.org.uk/Global-Data/External-Resources-and-Innovations/EcoHomescosting/Other-energy-labels SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 136 Ene 16 CHP Community Energy Issue ID Ene 16 Issue Title CHP Community Energy Issue not assessed under this scheme. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available N/A Minimum standards No BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Ene 17 Issue Title Residential Areas: Energy Consumption Ene 17 Residential areas: energy consumption No. of credits available N/A 137 Minimum standards No Issue not assessed under this scheme. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 138 Ene 18 Drying Space Issue ID Ene 18 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue Title Drying Space No. of credits available 1 Minimum standards No Aim To provide a reduced energy means of drying clothes Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. For self contained dwellings: a. An adequate internal or external space with posts and footings, or fixings capable of holding: • 1-2 bedrooms: 4m+ of drying line • 3+ bedrooms: 6m+ of drying line. AND/OR 2. Individual bedrooms: a. An adequate internal or external space with posts and footings, or fixings capable of holding: • 2m+ of drying line per bedroom. 3. The space (internal or external) is secure. Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. Refurbishment There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Extensions to There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to existing the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. buildings CSH Assessed Dwellings For buildings with dwellings also being assessed under the Code for Sustainable Homes, the following applies: Where CSH issue Ene 4 has been achieved for all dwellings assessed under the CSH, the requirements for self-contained dwellings under this issue are also met. If this is the case, the credit under this issue can be achieved provided any self contained dwellings not assessed under the CSH and/or individual bedrooms in the building meet the compliance requirements for this issue. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Adequate internal space Ene 18: Drying Space 139 This is either; a heated space with adequate, controlled ventilation, complying with Building Regulations Approved Document F Ventilation 2006 (rooms that commonly meet these requirements are a bathroom or utility room). Or an unheated outbuilding, where calculations by an appropriate Chartered Institute of Building services Engineer (CIBSE or equivalent professional) demonstrate that ventilation in the space is adequate to allow drying in normal climatic conditions and to prevent condensation/mould growth. The fixing/fitting needs to be a permanent feature of the room. Internal drying spaces in the following rooms do not comply: • Living rooms • Kitchens • Dining rooms • Main HallsBedrooms Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage All Relevant design stage drawings clearly showing: • Location of drying fixings • Details/location of ventilation provided (for internal spaces only) Post Construction Stage As Design Stage AND EITHER Copies of purchase orders/receipts internal or external drying devices of AND OR Text describing (on drawings or specification*): • Location and type of internal or external drying fixings/footings or posts • Confirmation of the minimum length of drying line Assessor site inspection report and/or Photographic evidence confirming for each dwelling and/or bedroom with a different specification accompanied by notes confirming the date. AND where relevant AND where relevant Evidence in line with the Design stage evidence requirements of CSH issue Ene 4 Evidence in line with the Post Construction stage Evidence requirement of CSH issue Ene 4 OR A copy of the Design stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH issue Ene 4. OR A copy of the Post Construction stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH issue Ene 4. *or a letter of instruction to a contractor/supplier or a formal letter from the developer to the assessor giving the specific undertaking. Where Design and Build contracts or similar contractual arrangements mean detailed drawings are not available at this stage, the specification can be allowed as evidence of intent. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 140 Ene 18 Drying Space BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Additional Information Relevant definitions Secure Space: For self contained dwellings this can be defined as an enclosed space only accessible to the residents of the dwelling. For buildings with a communal drying space it is an enclosed space with a secure entrance, accessible to the residents of the building only. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Tra 1 Provision of public transport 141 7.0 Transport Issue ID Tra 1 No. of credits available Issue Title Provision of Public Transport 3 Minimum standards No Aim To recognise and encourage development in proximity to good public transport networks, thereby helping to reduce transport-related emissions and traffic congestion. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. The public transport Accessibility Index for the building is calculated and BREEAM credits awarded in accordance with Table 11 AI benchmarks and BREEAM credits: Table 11 AI benchmarks and BREEAM credits Accessibility Index BREEAM credits ≥2 1 ≥4 2 ≥8 3 The Accessibility Index is determined by entering the following information in to the BREEAM assessor’s TRA 1 Provision of Public Transport calculator: a. The distance (m) from the main building entrance to each compliant public transport node b. The public transport type serving the compliant node e.g. bus or rail c. The average number of services stopping per hour at each compliant node during the standard operating hours of the building for a typical day (see compliance notes and Table 12 in the Additional Guidance section). Compliance Notes New Build Refurbishment Extensions to existing buildings There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 142 Tra 1 Provision of public transport Operating hours BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 BREEAM seeks to define the building’s accessibility to the public transport network for the period during which the majority of building users will travel to and from the building. In most cases the normal operating hours of the building can be used; however, some buildings will operate for 24 hours a day and on a shift work basis. As a result, during what typically would be deemed unsociable hours and therefore periods where a) there is little if any public transport operating and b) the number of total building users travelling to the building during this time is a minority; such periods are not required to be accounted for in the assessment of this issue. Where the assessed building operates on a 24-hour basis, or the operating hours are unknown at the time of assessment, then refer to and use the table of default operating hours, which can be found in the Additional Information section of this issue. Compliant public transport node Average number of services A compliant node includes any bus stop within 650m and any railway station within 1000m of the assessed building’s main entrance, measured via a safe pedestrian route (not ‘as the crow flies’). The service stopping at each node must provide transport from, or onward travel to, either an urban centre, major transport node or a community focal point e.g. doctor’s surgery, library, school or village centre. Only local services should be assessed and any national public transport services should be excluded from the analysis, unless such a service can be said to provide a local commuter service. There is no limit on the number of nodes that can be considered when calculating the AI, provided they all meet the above criteria For the purpose of the calculation, the frequency of public transport is the average number of services per hour. This is calculated by determining the number of stopping services at the node during the operating hours, divided by the number of hours within the operating period. For example: the average number of services for an assessment of a building that operates between 8am - 7pm (11 hours) and is within proximity of a bus stop with 35 stopping services during this period is 3 (equivalent to an average service frequency of 20 minutes). Typical day The typical day is that which represents the period when travel to and from the building by staff/users and visitors will be at its highest. For most buildings this should be taken as a mid-week day. In choosing a typical day the assessor should check that the timetabled information for that day is, within reason, representative of the public transport provision for the entire operating week (excluding Sundays). Multiple services Services that operate from more than one node within proximity of the building, i.e. two separate bus stops served by the same bus, must be considered only once - at the node in closest proximity to the building. Different services at the same node, however, should be considered as separate entities. Bi-directional routes Routes will be bi-directional; however for the purpose of calculating the index, consider only the direction with the highest frequency (in accordance with the PTAL methodology). Where a dedicated company bus service is provided for building users during, or before or after, operating hours (as defined in above), the building entrance can be substituted for the drop-off/pick-up destination point of this service and therefore public transport accessibility measured from that point. Dedicated transport services SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Phased developments Tra 1 Provision of public transport 143 In the case of a large phased development where new transport facilities will be provided, but at a later stage than the building being assessed, the assessment can consider such facilities provided that: • A commitment to provide transport facilities has been made in the General Contract Specification or in the form of a Section 106 Agreement. And the shortest of the following periods - Either • The transport facilities will be available for use by the time 25% of all phases have been completed and are ready for occupation. Or • The transport facilities will be available for use within 25% of the total build time for the phase in which the assessed building forms a part, measured from the completion date of that phase. The most appropriate rule for the development in question must be used, ensuring that the time building users have to wait before having use of the transport facilities is as short as possible. Where the transport facilities will not be available for use within a period of five years from occupation of the building, they cannot be considered for determining compliance with the BREEAM criteria. Buildings in Greater London Buildings in Greater London should refer to the guidance in the Additional Information section of this issue for details of demonstrating compliance via other complementary means. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage 1 A copy of the output from the Provision of Public Transport calculator *. The evidence required at this stage is the same as that outlined at the design stage. *Or via the alternative means for buildings in Greater London (see Additional Information). Where relying on a calculation carried out at the design stage to demonstrate compliance post construction, if the period between design and post construction stage reporting is greater than 12 months, then the AI must be re-calculated using up-todate public transport timetable information. Scale map highlighting the location of the building and all public transport nodes in proximity of the building. Timetables for each service at each public transport node considered. Additional Information Relevant definitions Accessibility Index: A measure that provides an indicator of the accessibility and density of the public transport network at a point of interest (in the case of BREEAM, a building). The index is influenced by the proximity and diversity of the public transport network and the level or frequency of service at the accessible node. Provision of Public Transport Calculator: A spreadsheet-based calculator used to determine the Accessibility Index for the assessed building and the number of BREEAM credits achieved. BREEAM calculators are provided in the BREEAM Assessor’s spreadsheet tool. Main building entrance: The main building entrance is the entrance to the assessed building accessed by the majority of the building’s staff and visitors, not the site entrance (unless the site entrance is also the building entrance e.g. building with a boundary on a public highway). SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 144 Tra 1 Provision of public transport BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 AI Indicator of performance – comparison with previous version of BREEAM For comparison with the criteria of previous versions of BREEAM, a building that has a single public transport node 500m from its main building entrance with one service stopping every 15 minutes i.e. 4 services per hour on average, will score an AI of approximately 1.90. Alternatively, the same node with one service every 15 minutes, but 300m from the building entrance will achieve an AI of 2.26. The same node with two services stopping every 15 minutes will score an AI of 2.85. The greater the number of compliant nodes, services and their proximity to the building, the higher the AI. Table 12 Default hours of operation for a typical day Building type AM PM Office 8.00am - 7.00pm Industrial 8.00am - 7.00pm Pre-school, school, sixth form college 7.30am -10.00am 3.00pm - 5.30pm Further & Higher Education 8.00am - 7.00pm Courts 8.00am - 7.00pm Prison Healthcare 7am - 8pm (encompassing visiting hours and the typical daytime shift pattern) 7am - 8pm (encompassing visiting hours and the typical daytime shift pattern) Shopping centre 9.00am - 7.00pm Supermarket 8.00am - 10.00pm Bank/Service provider 8.00am - 6.00pm Convenience store 7.00am - 10.00pm DIY/retail park 8.00am - 8.00pm Other retail 8.00am - 6.00pm Multi-residential 8.00am - 7.00pm Bespoke & other 8.00am - 7.00pm Or use any of the above hours, as appropriate to the building type. 24 hour use building 7am - 8pm Calculation methodology The methodology for calculating the Accessibility Index uses Transport for London’s Public Transport Accessibility Level (PTAL) method, itself based on a methodology developed in 1992 by the London Borough of Hammersmith and Fulham. For a description of the PTAL methodology and how it works refer to appendix B of Transport Assessment Best Practice; Guidance Document: http://www.tfl.gov.uk/assets/downloads/corporate/TAGuidance_LQ.pdf Buildings in Greater London SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Tra 1 Provision of public transport 145 There is a public transport accessibility map for Greater London which can be used for determining the Accessibility Index for assessed buildings, without necessarily having to complete a separate calculation. This map can be found at: http://www.london.gov.uk/thelondonplan/maps-diagrams/map2a-03.jsp The map shows the Public Transport Accessibility Levels throughout London (PTALs range from 1-6); the PTAL is determined using the AI as follows: PTAL AI 1 0.00 – 5.00 2 5.01 – 10.00 3 10.01 – 15.00 4 15.01 – 20.00 5 20.01 – 25.00 6 25.01 + As an example, if the building is located in an area of London that has a PTAL of 2 this could have an AI at any point in the 5-10 range. As such, for the purpose of BREEAM, the lower AI of 5 must be assumed and the credit awarded accordingly, or alternatively the specific AI for the assessed building can be determined using the TRA 1 Provision of Public Transport calculator and, potentially, a higher number of credits awarded. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 146 Tra 2 Proximity to amenities Issue ID Tra 2 Issue Title BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available Proximity to amenities 2 Minimum standards No Aim To encourage and reward a building that is located in proximity to local amenities, thereby reducing the need for extended travel or multiple trips. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: First credit 1. Where the building is within 500m of the following amenities: a. Grocery shop and/or food outlet b. Post box c. Cash machine Two credits: 1. Where the building is within 1000m of the following amenities: a. Post office b. Grocery shop (this option is allowable for compliance with the second credit only where it has not been used to comply with the first credit) c. Bank/cash point (the cash point option is allowable for compliance with the second credit only where it has not been used to comply with the first credit) d. Pharmacy e. Doctors surgery/medical centre f. Community centre g. Leisure centre h. Outdoor open access public area i. Place of Worship j. Public House Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. Refurbishment There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Extensions to There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to existing the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. buildings SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Tra 2 Proximity to amenities 147 Food Outlet This includes the following: • Grocery shop • Supermarket • Sandwich shop • On- or off-site cafeteria or staff canteen Collective amenities One type of amenity may also exist within or a part of other types of amenities e.g. grocery store in a petrol station, cash point or pharmacy in a supermarket etc. It is not a requirement of the assessing this issue that each amenity is ‘stand alone’. Accessible local amenities The distance must be measured via safe pedestrian routes e.g. pavements and safe crossing points or, where provided, dedicated pedestrian crossing points. The distance should not be measured in a straight line, ‘as the crow flies’. Amenities within building Amenities within the building or on the site (provided within 500m of assessed building) meet the assessment criteria. Phased developments The guidance provided in BREEAM issue Tra 1, concerning phased developments, also applies to this issue. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. 1 Design Stage Post Construction Stage Marked-up site plan or map highlighting: • Location of assessed building • Location and type of amenities • The route to the amenities • Plan/map scale Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence confirming: • The existence of the local amenities • The route and distance to the amenities. Where the amenities do not currently exist, but are due to be developed, a letter from the client/developer confirming: • The location and type of amenities to be provided • The timescale for development of the amenities. Evidence as outlined at the design stage of assessment. OR As above where amenities developed, or under development at the time of post construction review/assessment. Additional Information Relevant definitions None. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 148 Tra 3 Cyclist facilities Issue ID Tra 3 Issue Title BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available Cyclist Facilities Minimum standards 1 No Aim To encourage building users to cycle by ensuring adequate provision of cyclist facilities. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: Option 1 - Student residences and key worker accommodation: 1. An equivalent number of compliant cycle storage spaces are provided as follows: a. 10% of building staff, or where there are less than 10 staff, a minimum of at least 1 compliant cycle storage facility, plus b. 50% of building residents. Option 2 - Sheltered housing and supported housing for the disabled: 1. An equivalent number of compliant cycle storage spaces are provided as follows: a. 10% of building staff, or where there are less than 10 staff, a minimum of at least 1 compliant cycle storage facility. 2. At least two of the following compliant facilities must be provided for building staff: a. Showers b. Changing facilities and lockers for clothes c. Drying space for wet clothes 3. An equivalent number of Compliant wheelchair and electric buggy storage spaces must be provided as follows: a. A minimum of 10% of building residents (or in accordance with the number required as identified by the likely resident profile). Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. Refurbishment There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Extensions to Refer to the compliance note below on existing compliant facilities. existing buildings SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 CSH assessed dwellings Tra 3 Cyclist facilities 149 For buildings with dwellings that are also being assessed under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies: All self-contained dwellings within the building assessed under the CSH must achieve the available credit for issue E8 of the CSH in order to achieve any credits under this issue. Other dwellings/building areas not covered under a CSH assessment must meet the requirements defined above. Option 1 and 2 Short residents stay Compliant cycle storage space Vertical bike racks Proprietary cycle storage systems For buildings where the majority of residents are not able bodied, such as in Care Homes, the credit can be achieved where the requirements for option 2 are met. For any other buildings, where the vast majority of occupants are able bodied, the credit can be achieved where the requirements for option 1 are met. Where the building’s occupants will be resident for only a short period of time, the criteria set for this assessment issue still apply. Compliant cycle storage facilities are those that meet the following: • • The space is covered overhead and protected from the rain The covered area and the cycle racks are set in or fixed to a permanent structure (building or hardstanding) and allow both the wheel and frame to be locked securely (e.g. Sheffield type). Or racks are located in a locked structure fixed to or part of a permanent structure with CCTV surveillance. • There is a minimum distance of 1.0m between cycle racks, where the racks allow for two-sided parking, and 0.8m for one-sided parking to enable bikes to be easily stored and accessed. • Racks positioned in a circular array are spaced in accordance with the guidance in the New Metric Handbook54. • There is a minimum distance from any obstruction e.g. wall (located either to the side of the stand or in front of it) of 300mm for single-sided use and 900mm for double-sided use. • Adequate lighting is provided in accordance with BS5489 Part 1 – Lighting of roads and amenity areas55. • The facilities are in a prominent site location that is viewable from the building. • The majority of the cycle racks are within 100m of a building entrance (ideally within 50m). Vertical racks, which allow direct access (without the need to get alongside the locked bike) and permit one bike per vertical stack can comply with the criteria (provided all other criteria are met). For this type of rack, the distance between each rack can be less than 1.0m but not less than 600mm (the typical width of a bike across the handlebars). Where a proprietary (manufactured) bicycle storage system is specified BREEAM allows an element of flexibility with respect to the requirements and dimensions outlined in the compliance note above. The degree of flexibility is at the discretion of the BREEAM Assessor, but the system must allow ease of access for the user and each cycle to be removed independently of other stored bikes, must protect the bikes from rain, and allow cyclists to lock at least one wheel and the frame of their bikes adequately. If the assessor believes that a system does not meet these basic objectives then they should not award the credit. Where awarding the credit for a proprietary system that does not meet the space/access/weatherproofing/security dimensions and requirements (outlined above) the Assessor must fully justify their decision to award the credit in these circumstances. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 150 Tra 3 Cyclist facilities BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Non compliant cycle racks These types of cycle storage devices do not comply with BREEAM: • Hooks and wall attachments • Single wheel (butterfly) bike rack holders (these racks provide less security and can cause damage to bike wheels). Compliant showers One shower must be provided for every 10 cycle storage spaces and both male and female users catered for i.e. either separate showers within shared gender-specific facilities or single shower cubicles and changing space for mixed use. The showers can be available for others to use in addition to cyclists. Changing facilities and locker criteria; • The assessor can use their judgement to determine whether the changing area is appropriate given the number of cycle storage spaces/showers provided. As guidance to aid the assessor, where a shower/changing cubicle is provided there should be a minimum of one square metre of changing space adjacent to the shower(s) with a bench seat and hooks for hanging clothes. Where there is more than one shower provided there should be a minimum of one square metre of changing space per shower, subject to a minimum changing area of four square metres. Where there are no showers specified, but there is a changing facility, there is a minimum of one square metre of changing space for every 10 cycle storage spaces, subject to a minimum of four square metres of changing area with a bench seat and hooks for hanging clothes. • The number of lockers is at least equal to the number of cycle spaces provided. • Lockers are either in or adjacent to compliant changing rooms. Where the changing space is a cubicle the locker(s) must not be located within the cubicle. • Each locker is at least 900mm high by 300mm wide by 450mm deep, or a locker with dimensions that provide an equivalent volume of storage space. • Both male and female users are catered for i.e. either gender specific, shared facilities or single changing cubicles in mixed use areas. • Toilet cubicles do not count as changing facilities. The drying space (for wet clothes) must be a specially designed and designated space with adequate heating/ventilation. A plant room is not a compliant drying space. Compliant changing facilities & lockers Compliant drying space Compliant wheelchair and buggy storage facilities Compliant wheelchair and buggy storage facilities are those that meet the following: • Charging points for electric buggies (at least 2) provided within the storage space • The storage area must be secure yet easily accessible to both the internal and external parts of the building e.g. direct access to the outside. In addition, a covered porch or similar should be provided to the outside access. • Direct access from the storage space into the interior of the building without having to return outside must be provided. • Adequate lighting must be provided. Existing compliant facilities For assessments of new infill buildings on an existing site, where there are existing compliant facilities, such facilities can be assessed against the criteria of this issue. The number of existing compliant facilities must be large enough to cater for the building users of the assessed building, in addition to the users from any existing buildings. Where more than the minimum number of compliant cycle spaces is provided, it is not necessary to also provide more than the minimum number of showers/lockers/changing facilities. Minimum number of facilities SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 City centre locations & cycle space and facilities provision Rural locations & cycle space provision Tra 3 Cyclist facilities 151 In city centre locations the criteria for compliant cycle spaces can be reduced by 50% where at least two of the available BREEAM credits for provision of public transport (Tra 1) have been awarded. Sites in rural locations can reduce by 50% the criteria for compliant cycle spaces where the average building user commuting distances are likely to be greater than 10 miles. A rural location is one where the site is on land clearly not within or on an urban boundary; this includes village locations and green field sites. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage 1 Site plan, design drawings and/or a copy of the specification confirming: • The location of the cycle storage facilities • The number of cycle spaces provided • The type, dimensions and layout of cycle racks • The materials and construction specified for the facility. • The lighting for the facility is in accordance with BS5489 Part 1. • Building occupancy or, where relevant, net lettable/floor area. Post Construction Stage Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence confirming the installation of the compliant facilities. Where the building is in a city centre location, and the benchmarks reduced, evidence as outlined under BREEAM credit Tra 1 demonstrating the relevant number of credits achieved. 2 3 Design drawings or a copy of the specification confirming: • Number of showers • Changing room • Secure locker locations, dimensions and numbers • Drying space Site plan, design drawings and/or a copy of the specification confirming: • The location and size of the wheelchair and buggy storage facilities • Location and no. of charging points • The lighting provided for/in the facility • Building occupancy information. Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence confirming the installation of the compliant facilities. Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence confirming the installation of the compliant facilities. Additional Information Relevant definitions None. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 152 Tra 4 Pedestrian and cyclist safety Issue ID Tra 4 Issue Title Pedestrian and Cyclist Safety BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available 1 Minimum standards No Aim To recognise and encourage the provision of safe and secure pedestrian and cycle access routes on the development. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. Where external site areas form part of the assessed site and these areas contain vehicle access roads, parking and/or pedestrian access to the building, adequate cycle lanes and pedestrian pathways must be provided. If the building does not have any external areas and internal access is directly from the public highway/footpath, then the credit(s) can be awarded on a default basis. Cycle access criteria 2. The cycle lanes have been designed and constructed in accordance with the guidance in the National Cycle Network Guidelines and Practical Details – issue 2, Sustrans56 and the relevant parts of Appendix VI NCN Design and Construction Checklist57 3. The cycle lanes and pedestrian paths meet the following minimum width dimensions: a. Where pedestrian and cycle routes are shared the minimum total width of the combined path is 3.0m b. Where the cycle lane is segregated from both the pedestrian route and carriageway the minimum width of the cycle path is 2.0m and the minimum width of the pedestrian path is 1.5m c. Where the cycle route forms a part of the carriageway, the minimum width of the lane is 1.5m Minimum widths should not be regarded as the design target, where possible best practice as 58 detailed in the Sustrans guidelines and DfT guidance must be aimed for. 4. Cycle lanes provide direct access to any cycle storage facilities provided on the site, without the need to deviate from the cycle path and, if relevant, connect to offsite cycle paths where these run adjacent to the development’s boundary. Pedestrian access criteria 5. Onsite footpaths connect to public footpaths off site, providing access to local transport nodes and other offsite amenities (where present). 6. Where provided, drop-off areas are designed off the access road and provide direct access to pedestrian pathways/areas, therefore avoiding the need for the pedestrian to cross vehicle access routes. 7. Where dedicated pedestrian crossing of a vehicle access route is provided, the road is raised to the pavement level (i.e. the pavement is not lowered to road level). SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Tra 4 Pedestrian and cyclist safety 153 8. For larger developments with a high number of public users/visitors, pedestrian pathways must be signposted to other local amenities off site, including public transport nodes. Combined cyclists and pedestrian access criteria 9. Delivery areas are not accessed through parking areas and do not cross or share pedestrian and cyclist routes and other outside amenity areas accessible to building users and general public. 10. Lighting design of pedestrian pathways and cycle paths on site are in compliance with CIBSE Lighting Guide 6 (LG6)14 and BS5489 Part 155. Compliance Notes New Build Refurbishment Extensions to existing buildings There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. NCN Design and Construction checklist The checklist can be downloaded from: http://www.sustrans.org.uk/webfiles/guidelines/appendix.pdf Covered parking area Where the assessed building has no external areas but does have a covered parking facility and cyclists and/or pedestrians access the assessed building via this area, then the criteria apply and this area must be assessed against them. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. 1& 3-9 Design Stage Post Construction Stage A scaled proposed site plan, specification and/or design details highlighting all necessary features and dimensions. Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence confirming compliance. AND/OR 2 A copy of the specification or scaled proposed site plan confirming: • Cycle routes have been or will be designed in accordance with the best practice guidance[1] ‘As built’ site plan and design details. A signed and dated post construction copy of the NCN Design and Construction Checklist from the design/project team (or completed by the assessor during their site visit). AND • A signed and dated copy of the NCN Design and Construction Checklist from the design/project team (or completed by the assessor using design information). SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 154 Tra 4 Pedestrian and cyclist safety 10 A copy of the specification, site plan and/or manufacturer’s technical details. confirming: • External lighting design strategy. BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence confirming compliant installation. The assessor is not expected to check every detail but that the lighting strategy is broadly compliant with the design and therefore relevant guidance, demonstrated by checking compliance at their discretion with select key issues. Additional Information Relevant definitions None. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Issue Title Tra 5 Travel Plan Tra 5 Travel plan No. of credits available N/A 155 Minimum standards No Issue not assessed under this scheme. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 156 Tra 6 Maximum car parking capacity Issue ID Tra 6 Issue Title BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available Maximum Car Parking Capacity 2 Minimum standards No Aim To encourage the use of alternative means of transport to the building other than the private car, thereby helping to reduce transport related emissions and traffic congestion. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: Building designed to be a sheltered housing and care home 1. One credit where there is no more than one parking space provided for every four building users. 2. Two credits where there is no more than one parking space provided for every five building users. Building designed for multi-residential use other than sheltered housing and care home 1. One credit where there is no more than one parking space provided for every three building users, 2. Two credits where there is no more than one parking space provided for every four building users. Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. Refurbishment Extensions to existing buildings Building users There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. Where the term building users is referenced in this BREEAM issue it refers to the staff who will work within the building and residents who reside within the building. Parking provision for care homes and sheltered housing Due to age, state of health or social circumstances, car ownership levels amongst residents of sheltered housing and care homes are proportionately lower than for other building uses assessed using BREEAM Multi-residential. To reflect this, tightened capacity limits for both credit thresholds apply. Variable occupancy Where the number of building users is variable, provision of parking spaces should be based on the maximum number of building users likely to be using the building at any time during a typical day. Disabled, mother & baby & motorbike spaces Parking spaces for these building users can be excluded from the assessment of this issue provided these spaces are dedicated for this use and they are sized accordingly with the appropriate signage/markings. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Tra 6 Maximum car parking capacity 157 Car share spaces Car share spaces can be excluded from the assessment provided these spaces are dedicated for this use with the appropriate signage and the future building occupier confirms they have an enforceable car share policy. The assessor must obtain a copy of the policy and related documentation. Where there is no policy these spaces must be included within the calculation. Parking shared with other buildings Where the building being assessed forms part of a wider site development and parking is not designated to specific buildings, then this credit must be assessed on the provision of parking spaces for the whole development, accounting for all existing and new users and parking spaces. Where the numbers of users for the whole site cannot be confirmed, then the parking spaces can be attributed to the assessed development on the basis of the ratio of assessed building floor area to total building floor area of the whole site. E.g. if the assessed building is 20% of the total building area for the site then attribute 20% of the parking spaces to the building for the purpose of the assessment. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage 1 A site plan or copy of the specification confirming: • Number and type of parking spaces provided for the building. Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence confirming: • Number and type of parking spaces provided for the building. Relevant documentation or correspondence from the design team or client confirming the number of building users. Evidence as outlined at the design stage. OR A physical check by the assessor of the relevant number of building users (if practical). Additional Information Relevant definitions Care Homes: For the purpose of BREEAM Multi-residential, care homes are those buildings legally required to register with the Commission for Social Care Inspection by the care Standards Act, 2000. Assessment is only practical for those Care Homes where only basic medical equipment is to be provided (including those with basic consulting and medical rooms). Where extensive medical facilities are to be provided, it is likely that an assessment can be completed using the BREEAM Healthcare scheme. Sheltered Housing: Sheltered housing falls within Class C3 of the Town and Country Planning (use Classes) Order 1987, and can be defined as self-contained accommodation, usually with an emergency alarm system, communal facilities and a resident warden. This includes all sheltered housing defined as “Category 1, 2, 2.5 and 3” in accordance with the 1969 Ministry of Housing and Local Government circular 82/69 and Local Authority Guidelines. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 158 Wat 1 Water consumption BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 8.0 Water Issue ID Issue Title Wat 1 No. of credits available Water Consumption 4 Minimum standards Yes Aim To minimise the consumption of potable water in sanitary applications by encouraging the use of low water use fittings. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: First credit 1. All WCs have an effective flush volume of 4.5 litres or less. 2. Where dual flush toilets are specified they have guidance or symbols instructing the user on the appropriate operation of the flushing device. This can be provided on the flush control buttons, cistern, or nearby for a group of cisterns. Second credit 3. The second credit can be awarded for EITHER of the following: a. All WCs have an effective flush volume of 3 litres or less OR b. All WCs are compliant with the criteria for the first credit and fitted with a delayed action inlet valve. 4. Where dual flush toilets are specified they have guidance or symbols instructing the user on the appropriate operation of the flushing device. This can be provided on the flush control buttons, cistern, or nearby for a group of cisterns. Third credit 5. All taps, except kitchen taps, cleaners’ sinks and external taps, have a maximum flow rate less than 6 litres/min for a water pressure of 0.3MPa and are one of, or a combination of, the following types: • • • • Timed automatic shut-off taps e.g. push taps Electronic sensor taps Low flow screw-down/lever taps Spray taps 6. Kitchen sink taps are click taps or two stage mixer taps which provide break point at the mid range of the flow allowing a low flow rate for rinsing, and a higher flow rate beyond the break point for filling objects. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Wat 1 Water consumption 159 7. All showers, where specified, have a measured flow rate that does not exceed 9 litres per minute for a water pressure of 0.3MPa, assuming a delivered water temperature of 37ºC. Fourth credit 8. Of the following, the two that offer the greatest possible reduction in annual water consumption have been specified: a. All urinals are either: • Fitted with individual presence detectors that operate the flushing control after each use • Ultra low flush or waterless urinals. b. All baths (excluding assisted bathrooms) have a maximum capacity of 100 litres to the overflow and each bath is fitted with a device that automatically stops the flow from the taps when the bath’s maximum capacity is reached c. Domestic scale washing machines, where specified, are low water use (40 litres/use or less) d. Domestic scale dishwashers, where specified, are low water use (12 litres/use or less) e. Commercial scale washing machines, where specified, reuse water rather than discarding it (e.g. water from the final rinse used for the next pre-wash). Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new build projects. Refurbishment There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Extensions to Where a project under assessment consists solely of an extension, and no existing new sanitary facilities are to be provided, facilities provided in the existing buildings building should be assessed (this refers to the nearest accessible facilities for each gender/function, where appropriate, i.e. those likely to be used by the occupants and visitors in the extension building). CSH Assessed For building’s with self-contained dwellings that are also being assessed Dwellings against the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies: Fourth credit No Fittings specified Showers with a range of flow rates Swimming / Hydrotherapy Pools Dwellings assessed under the CSH will need to be re-assessed against the criteria set out in this issue. The number of credits achieved for Wat 1 of a CSH assessment cannot be directly used for this issue, due to the differences in assessment criteria. Where no baths, urinals and domestic scale washing machines/dishwashers are specified/installed, the fourth credit can still be achieved where compliant commercial scale washing machines are provided and the showers provided meet the requirements of the third credit. This is the only case where the fourth credit is dependent on the achievement of one of the requirements of the third credit. Where no sanitary fittings are to be installed in the building being assessed then the credit must be assessed on the basis of the nearest accessible facilities likely to be used by the occupants of the assessed building. Where a shower head delivers a range of flow rates, the average or typical flow rate should be used. Where the assessment is of a building containing a swimming pool or hydrotherapy pools, the criteria of this issue, with respect to showers, are also applicable to all ‘pre-swim-showers, in addition to all ‘post-swim’ showers within the wet change facilities. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 160 Wat 1 Water consumption BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage All A copy of the relevant section of the M&E specification and/or manufacturer’s details confirming: • Technical specification for sanitary fittings (flow rate) and controls to be installed. Assessor’s building/site inspection report and photographs or purchase orders confirming: • The type and amount of fittings and controls installed. Design plan showing the location within the building of the sanitary facilities. Manufacturer’s fittings/controls specification. details for confirming the installed technical Additional Information Relevant definitions Delayed action inlet valve: Devices that prevent water entering the WC cistern until it has completely emptied, enabling a precise volume of water to be discharged independent of water pressure. Effective flush volume: The volume of water needed to clear the toilet pan and transport any content far enough to avoid blocking the drain. Dual Flush Cisterns: Devices that have the facility to provide lower flush volume for liquids and higher flush volume for solids and paper. Calculating the effective flushing volume of dual flush toilets: For dual flush WCs the ratio full flush:reduced flush is taken to be 1:3 for non-domestic buildings. The effective flush volume can therefore be calculated as follows, using a 6/4 litre dual flush volume WC: ((6 Litre*1) + (4 Litre*3))/4 = 4.5 Litre effective flushing volume Product Certification of Low Flush WCs Product certification schemes provide specifiers and clients with greater assurance of manufacturers’ claim regarding the performance of the actual flush volume of their products and therefore the potential water savings of different products. At present BREEAM does not require that the flushing volume of WCs (or any other water-consuming device) meet an approved standard to gain BREEAM credits. BRE Global currently operates a certification and listing scheme for low flush WCs and products certified to this standard will be listed on www.greenbooklive.com. Green Book Live is a free-to-view online database designed to assist specifiers and end users in the identification of environmentally beneficial products and services. If you would like to know more information about the Certification and Listing of Low Flush WCs Scheme please contact BRE Global at [email protected] . SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Wat 2 Issue Title Water Meter Wat 2 Water Meter No. of credits available 1 161 Minimum standards Yes Aim To ensure water consumption can be monitored and managed and therefore encourage reductions in water consumption. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. The specification of a water meter on the mains water supply to each building; this includes instances where water is supplied via a borehole or other private source. 2. The water meter has a pulsed output to enable connection to a Building Management System (BMS) for the monitoring of water consumption. Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM issue: 1. Where sub meters are fitted to allow the metering of individual water-consuming plant or building areas, where demand in such areas will be equal to or greater than of 10% of the total water demand of the building (see also compliance note). 2. Each sub meter has a pulsed output to enable connection to a Building Management System (BMS) for the monitoring of water consumption. Compliance Notes New Build Refurbishment Extensions to existing buildings No water supply to the building/unit There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new build projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. If no new water supply is being installed because occupants of the extended building will use the facilities in, and therefore water supply to the existing building, then the issue should be assessed on the basis of whether a compliant water meter is installed on the existing supply. If there is no water supply to the building during operation because there will be no installed water-consuming fittings in the building, then the issue must be assessed on the basis of the water supply to the nearest accessible building with such facilities, likely to be used by the future occupants of the assessed building. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 162 Wat 2 Water Meter Exemplary criteria level BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 It is widely accepted that water usage can be decreased by how water is consumed by building users. If there are only small water consuming units used within the building such as singular toilets, small kitchen etc. It is unlikely there will be an opportunity to reduce water consumption by increased water management. And therefore there will be no benefit to installing a sub-meter; in such instances the exemplary credit is not available. Compliance with the criteria can also be demonstrated where the water metering/monitoring equipment is integral to the water consuming plant, as oppose to a sub meter on the water supply to the plant. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage All A copy of the specification clause confirming: • The specification and type of water meter(s). Assessor’s building/site inspection report and photographs or ‘as built’ drawings confirming: • The location of the water meter(s). Design plan(s) showing: • Location of the water meter(s) in each assessed building/unit. Manufacturer’s details confirming: • The specification of a pulsed output on the installed meter(s). If connected to a BMS, the assessor’s site inspection confirming live meter readings can be used in lieu of manufacturer’s details confirming specification of a pulsed output. Additional Information Relevant definitions None. The requirement for a pulsed output has been included to encourage the use of meters capable of transmitting (by wire or wirelessly) a continuous or pulsed signal with water management information such as total water consumed or flow rate to a Building Management System. This allows demand patterns on water systems to be monitored and evaluated over time. A significant increase in demand may indicate the presence of a leak or inappropriate or unexpected water consumption. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Wat 3 Issue Title Major Leak Detection Wat 3 Major leak detection No. of credits available 1 163 Minimum standards No Aim To reduce the impact of major water leaks that may otherwise go undetected. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. A leak detection system capable of detecting major leaks on the water supply has been installed. The system must cover all mains water supply between and within the building and the site boundary. 2. The leak detection system is: a. Audible when activated b. Activated when the flow of water passes through the water meter/data logger at a flow rate above a pre-set maximum for a pre-set period of time c. Able to identify different flow and therefore leakage rates, e.g. continuous, high and/or low level, over set time periods d. Programmable to suit the owner/occupiers’ water consumption criteria e. Where applicable, designed to avoid false alarms caused by normal operation of large water-consuming plant such as chillers. Compliance Notes New Build Refurbishment Extensions to existing buildings There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new build projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. If the water supply to the new extension is via the existing building then the water supply to the existing building must be assessed against the criteria of this issue. Ancillary or multiple buildings The criteria apply to the water supply to all buildings falling within the scope of the assessment. Mains supply shut-off It is not a requirement of this issue that the leak detection system shut off the water supply when the alarm is triggered. No water supply to the building/unit If there is no water supply to the building because there will be no installed water-consuming fittings in the building, then the issue must be assessed on the basis of the water supply to the nearest accessible building with such facilities, likely to be used by the future occupants of the assessed building. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 164 Wat 3 Major leak detection Leakage Rates Pre-set flow rates BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 This issue does not specify what the high and low level leakage rates should be; however, the equipment installed must have the flexibility to distinguish between different flow rates to enable it to be programmed to suit the owner/occupier’s usage patterns. Pre-set flow rates and time periods will vary depending on the building type and usage. System criteria It is anticipated that this credit will usually be achieved by installing a system which detects higher than normal flow rates at meters and/or sub-meters. It does not require a system that would directly detect water leakage along part or the whole length of the water supply system. Water authority meters Where there is a water authority meter at the site/building boundary, it may be necessary to install a separate flow meter to detect leaks; however, if the water authority agrees to some form of leak detection being installed on their meter, this would also be acceptable. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage 1&2 A copy of the specification clause confirming: • Scope and performance criteria of leak detection system. Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence confirming: • The installation and operation of the leak detection system. • The pre-set variables of the system for triggering the alarm and the flexibility of the building occupier to vary these*. AND/OR Manufacturer’s details confirming: • The technical specification specified systems. Additional Information Relevant definitions None. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 the * This can be confirmed in a letter from the contractor/installer to the assessor. BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Wat 4 Issue Title Sanitary Supply Shut Off Wat 4 Sanitary supply shut off No. of credits available N/A 165 Minimum standards No Issue not assessed under this scheme. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 166 Wat 5 Water recycling Issue ID Wat 5 Issue Title Water Recycling BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available 1 Minimum standards No Aim To encourage the collection and re-use of waste water or rainwater to meet toilet flushing needs and reduce the demand for potable fresh water. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: Where one of the following water recycling strategies has been implemented: 1. Where a rainwater collection tank has been installed and the tank is sized to collect at least 50% of EITHER: a. The total predicted rainwater run-off from the roof catchment area for the defined period of collection. OR b. The rainwater run-off required to meet the total predicted flushing demand for the defined period of collection. 2. Waste water from wash hand basins and showers is collected from ≥80% of fittings and recycled to meet part (minimum of 10%) or the total of WC/urinal flushing demand within the building(s). 3. A combination of waste water and rainwater collection that meets at least 50% of EITHER: a. The total predicted toilet and urinal flushing demand for the defined period of collection OR b. The total predicted toilet and urinal flushing demand for the defined period of collection and (where specified) irrigation of planting and landscaping. Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new build projects. Refurbishment There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Extensions to If the assessment is of the new extension only, then the roof catchment area existing can be taken as the roof area of the extended building. If feasible however, the buildings total roof area of the new extension and existing building can be used. If the assessment is of the new build extension and existing building i.e. whole building, then the roof catchment area is taken as the whole roof area of the building. Rainwater Of the two options available for demonstrating compliance, it is the option with collection tank the lesser of the two figures (litres) that should be specified and therefore used size to demonstrate compliance. For example it would not be expected to size a system that collected significantly more rainwater over the defined period than was required to meet flushing demand in the building over the same period, unless the collection system is being used to meet landscape irrigation demand or forms part of a storm water management strategy. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Greywater system Calculation criteria Wat 5 Water recycling 167 No BREEAM criteria have been set in terms of the period of collection that the tank should be sized to meet. Where a greywater collection system is specified, the size of the tank should be appropriate to the building occupancy and frequency of the facilities usage, bearing in mind that greywater tanks have a typical maximum retention period of 24 hours. See additional guidance for an example of calculating compliance with the assessment criteria. Run-off from paved areas Run-off from paved areas can also be collected and included in the calculation. Where the run-off is collected from part roof, part paved areas, the total catchment area must be at least equivalent to the plan area of the roof. Using rainwater to meet irrigation and other process demands Calculating total predicted flushing demand Using rainwater collection for WC/urinal flushing is the first priority. Where this demand is met, additional rainwater resources can be used to meet water demand for irrigation or building/operational processes. Total predicted flushing demand can be estimated by the design team on the basis of the following variables: • Number of building users (staff and visitors/students/users as applicable) • Effective flush volume of WCs/urinals • Estimated number* of WC/urinal uses per person per day (multiplied by the defined period of collection) * For staff use, unless other data is available, assume 1.3 WC uses per person per day and 2 urinal uses per person per day (assume that only 50% of the building occupants will use urinals). Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage All A copy of the specification clause confirming: • Type of collection system specified. • WC, urinal, taps and shower specification (where appropriate). Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence confirming: • The installation of the collection system. Design team calculations for the defined period of collection demonstrating (where appropriate): • Rainwater yield for the catchment area (mm) • Predicted WC/urinal flushing demand • Estimated potential for waste water collection from taps/showers/other process (where applicable). • Size (litres) of the rainwater/greywater collection tank specified. Where changes have occurred since design stage assessment, a revised copy of the technical specification and sizing calculations for the installed system. Additional Information Relevant definitions Defined period of collection: For the purpose of assessing this Issue the defined period of collection is 18 days. This is equivalent to approximately 5% of annual rainfall yield. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 168 Wat 5 Water recycling BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Potable water: Defined as drinkable and/or mains supplied water. This definition includes water obtained by borehole abstraction and water sourced from rivers, mountain streams, lakes etc. Catchment area: An area that catches rainfall and delivers it to a collection tank for re-use. Greywater: Waste water from taps, showers and laundries. Calculating compliance The following formula can be used to calculate the volume of collectable rainwater for the assessed building’s catchment area for the defined period of collection: ∑ (ARF x C x Rco-ef x Fco-ef x Dcol) Where: ARF = Annual rainfall for the site location (mm) C = Rainwater catchment area (m2) Rco-ef = Run-off co-efficient Fco-ef = Filter co-efficient. Dcol = Defined period of collection: 18 days/365 days = 0.05 Annual rainfall: The local EA, SEPA, EHS office or the Met Office should be able to supply rainfall data. Run-off co-efficient: A coefficient is used to adjust the tank size calculation to allow for the fact that not every drop of rain that falls within the catchment area will be collected by the tank. Drainage coefficient is dependent on the type of roof specified for the building, flat roofs having a lower co-efficient. Below are some typical co-efficient factors: Roof type Run-off co-efficient Pitched roof tiles 0.75 - 0.9 Flat roof smooth tiles Flat roof with gravel layer 0.5 0.4 – 0.5 Filter co-efficient: Not all the water that drains from the roof down the gutters will reach the holding tank; the filter co-efficient accounts for this. Most manufacturers/installers of systems will recommend a filter co-efficient of 90% i.e. 0.9. Drainage and filter co-efficiencies can be found in CIRIA guidance59, though these should be in the design team’s sizing calculations. Example calculation: Average annual rainfall for the site location (mm) 757mm Roof catchment area (m2) 3,500m2 Drainage co-efficient (tiled pitched roof) 0.8 Filter co-efficient. 0.9 Defined period of collection 0.05 Volume of rainwater for the defined period of collection 95,382 Litres An installed rainwater collection tank with a capacity of 50,000 litres would therefore collect 52.4% of the total predicted rainwater run-off from the roof catchment area for the defined period of collection. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Wat 5 Water recycling 169 Design issues BS4800:1989 Schedule of paint colours for building purposes. This BS covers the need to have pipework in standardised colours to avoid cross contamination and sets colours for rainwater and greywater system pipes’ flow and return. BS1710:1984 Specification for identification of pipelines and services. This BS covers the identifying marks that should be placed on pipes containing different substances, including greywater pipes, and references the colours in the above BS. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 170 Wat 6 Irrigation Systems Issue ID Wat 6 Issue Title Irrigation Systems BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available 1 Minimum standards No Aim To reduce the consumption of potable water for ornamental planting and landscape irrigation. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. Where the irrigation method specified for internal or external planting and/or landscaping complies with ANY ONE of the following: a. Drip feed subsurface irrigation that incorporates soil moisture sensors. The irrigation control should be zoned to permit variable irrigation to different planting assemblages. b. Reclaimed water from a rainwater or greywater system. c. External landscaping and planting that relies solely on precipitation, during all seasons of the year. d. The only planting specified is restricted to species that thrive in hot and dry conditions. e. Where no dedicated, mains-supplied irrigation systems (including pop-up sprinklers and hoses) are specified, and planting will rely solely on manual watering by building occupier or landlord. 2. Where a sub surface drip feed irrigation system is installed for external areas, a rainstat must also be installed to prevent automatic irrigation of the planting and the landscape during periods of rainfall. 3. Where a rainwater/greywater storage system/collector is specified, this must meet the following criteria (as a minimum): a. No open access at the top (a lid is allowed) b. There is a tap or other suitable arrangement for drawing-off water c. It is connected to the rainwater down pipes with automatic overflow into the conventional rainwater drainage system d. It is detachable from the rainwater down pipe with a removable top or base for cleaning the interior e. It provides a minimum of 1 litre capacity for each square metre of land allocated to the buildings, which is either planted (including grass) or left as unplanted soil, with a total minimum of 200 litres needing to be provided. 4. Where the entire external space is covered by hard landscaping, the above volume requirements set out in point ‘e’ can be halved. Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new build projects. Refurbishment There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Wat 6 Irrigation Systems 171 Extensions to existing buildings No landscaped areas There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. CSH assessed dwellings For buildings with self contained dwellings also being assessed under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies: This issue does not apply where there are no landscaped areas within the construction zone of the assessed building. In such instances the BREEAM assessor’s spreadsheet tool will filter the issue from the list of applicable issues. Where Wat 2 of the CSH has been achieved, Wat 6 can be achieved under the Multi-residential assessment, provided the external water collection facility provides sufficient volume for the buildings within the construction zone. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage 1&2 Design team confirmation via assessment meeting minutes, letter or email confirming the irrigation strategy for the site AND Proposed site plan, marked up to illustrate the scope of the irrigation specified AND Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence confirming: • The implementation of the proposed strategy. • If relevant, the installation of the specified system. One of the following: AND where relevant: A copy of the specification clause confirming: • Type of irrigation system and controls. Evidence in line with the Post Construction Stage evidence requirements of the CSH issue Wat 2. OR OR Manufacturer’s information detailing: • The technical details of the specified system. AND where relevant: A copy of the Post Construction Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH Issue Wat 2. Evidence in line with the Design stage evidence requirements of the CSH issue Wat 2. OR A copy of the Design Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH Issue Wat 2. Additional Information Relevant definitions Construction zone: For the purpose of this issue the construction zone is defined as the site which is being developed for the BREEAM-assessed building and its external site areas i.e. the scope of the new works. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 172 Mat 1 Materials Specification (major building elements) BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 9.0 Materials Issue ID Mat 1 No. of credits available Issue Title Materials Specification (Major Building Elements) 6 Minimum standards No Aim To recognise and encourage the use of construction materials with a low environmental impact over the full life cycle of the building. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. The Green Guide rating for the specifications for the following building elements must be determined and entered in to the BREEAM assessor’s Mat 1 Calculator. Green Guide ratings for the specification(s) making-up each element can be found at: www.thegreenguide.org.uk Building Element Applicable elements to assessment stage External Walls P Windows P Roof P Upper Floor Slabs P Internal Walls P Floor Finishes / Coverings P SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Mat 1 Materials Specification (major building elements) 173 The calculator awards points for each applicable element according to its Green Guide rating as follows: Green Guide Rating A+ Points/element 3 A 2 B 1 C 0.5 D 0.25 E 0 The calculator translates the total number of points in to BREEAM credits as follows: New build & Refurbishments Total Points Credits 2 1 5 2 8 3 10 4 12 5 14 6 Note: Also refer to the guidance concerning the Mat 1 calculator tool in the Additional Information section of this issue for further explanation of how the tool awards the available credits. Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM issue. 1. One exemplary BREEAM credit can be awarded as follows: a. Where assessing four or more applicable building elements, the building achieves at least two points additional to the total points required to achieve maximum credits under the standard BREEAM criteria. b. Where assessing fewer than four applicable building elements, the building achieves at least one point additional to the total points required to achieve maximum credits under the standard BREEAM criteria. Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. Refurbishment For each element that is reused in situ, BREEAM allocates an ‘A+’ rating and these elements should also be included in the ‘A+’ rated area in the MW1 calculator. New elements specified as part of a refurbishment project, e.g. windows, must be assessed as outlined above. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 174 Mat 1 Materials Specification (major building elements) BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Extensions to existing buildings Any applicable new-build elements, forming part of the new extension, must be assessed as outlined above. If the existing building forms part of the scope of the assessment, then any existing applicable element that is reused in situ achieves an ‘A+’ rating, as outlined above for refurbishments. CSH assessed dwellings For buildings with self-contained dwellings also being assessed under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies: The credits achieved under the CSH are equivalent to the points associated under BREEAM Multi-residential. The points achieved are then translated to credits in Multi-residential. For example: • An A+ rating in the CSH achieves 3 credits • 3 credits in the CSH are equal to 3 points in BREEAM • 3 points in BREEAM achieves approximately 1 credit Green Guide Online Please note: assessors must use the Mat 1 Calculator tool to determine the actual number of Mat 1 credits achieved. Please also refer to the Additional Information section of this issue for important information about how the Mat 1 Calculator tool determines the number of credits achieved. Refer to the Additional Information section below for guidance on using the online Green Guide to Specification and accessing the appropriate ratings for the assessed elements. Element consisting of more than one specification Where more than one specification is present for a given element, the rating and area for each specification should be entered into the tool and an average points score is calculated (by area). Finding exact Green Guide Ratings No Green Guide rating match Whilst exact matches in specifications are not always found, it should be possible to identify a similar specification and use its rating for the purposes of assessment (also see note below ‘No Green Guide rating match’). Where a Green Guide rating cannot be found for a specification BREEAM Assessors can use the online Green Guide calculator to determine a bespoke Green Guide rating for the specification. Licensed BREEAM Assessors can access the calculator via www.thegreenguide.org.uk. If a required component is not present via the online calculator, The BREEAM Assessor will need to submit a standard Bespoke Green Guide Query proforma, from which BRE Global will calculate the rating and confirm the result to the Assessor. If a new element is specified e.g. external wall, and part of that element includes a reused material e.g. reclaimed bricks, assessors should seek guidance from BRE on the appropriate rating. Where the assessment covers only some of the floors in the building, the roof must still be assessed as it is protecting the assessed building below. If the roof is directly above domestic accommodation (e.g. flats), the equivalent domestic Green Guide rating for the roof must be used as opposed to the ratings for non-domestic roofs. Roof areas not protecting parts of the assessed building/space can be omitted from the assessment. Where the assessed building is a single storey building and therefore has no upper floors, the upper floor element does not need to be assessed. In such instances the BREEAM assessor’s Mat 1 Calculator will re-calculate the requirement and award the available credits in accordance with the Green Guide ratings for the remaining applicable elements. New elements containing reused materials Mixed use developments Single storey buildings and upper floors SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Exemplary level criteria requirements where building contains no upper floor Roof lights, patio doors and glazed conservatories Mat 1 Materials Specification (major building elements) 175 Where there is no upper floor slab in the building the Mat 1 calculator tool adjusts the points to credit benchmark scale. As such, to achieve six credits 11.67 points must be achieved. In accordance with requirement 1b of the Exemplary level criteria 13.67 points must be achieved to award the additional credit for compliance with the Exemplary Level Criteria. The maximum number of points that can be achieved where there is no upper floor slab, i.e. where all remaining elements achieve an A+ Green Guide rating, is 15 points. For the purpose of this issue any doors with a large expanse of glazing, such as patio doors, should be assessed as windows. Similarly, glazed areas of conservatories and roof lights should be assessed as windows. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. 1& Exemp. level req. Design Stage Specification confirming: • A detailed description of each applicable element and its constituent materials. Post Construction Stage Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence confirming: • Element in-situ (where possible) AND Design drawings or specification detailing: • Location and area (m2) of each applicable element. A copy of the output from the Mat 1 Calculator, including Green Guide rating and element number* for each specification assessed. * Element numbers may change from timeto-time due to updates in the green guide data. As a result assessors should keep a note of the element numbers they use to give Green Guide rating advice on BREEAM assessments for auditing purposes. As built drawings and, where relevant, written design team confirmation of any changes to materials specification. OR where relevant Evidence in line with the Post Construction Stage evidence requirements of the CSH Issue Mat 1. OR A copy of the Post Construction Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH Issue Mat 1. OR where relevant Evidence in line with the Design stage evidence requirements of the CSH Issue Mat 1 OR A copy of the Design Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH Issue Mat 1. Additional Information Relevant definitions Ecopoint: The Ecopoint used in the Green Guide online is single score that measures the total environmental impact of a product or process as a proportion of overall impact occurring in Europe - SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 176 Mat 1 Materials Specification (major building elements) BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 100 Ecopoints is equivalent to the impact of a European Citizen. Green Guide ratings are derived by sub-dividing the range of Ecopoints/m2 achieved by all specifications considered within a building element. Green Guide to Specification: The Green Guide to Specification is an easy-to-use comprehensive reference website and electronic tool, providing guidance for specifiers, designers and their clients on the relative environmental impacts for a range of different building elemental specifications. The ratings within the Guide are based on Life Cycle Assessment, using the Environmental Profile Methodology. www.thegreenguide.org.uk Green Guide element number: A unique BRE Global reference number given to a Green Guide rating for any particular building element type specification. Both standard Green Guide ratings and those calculated using the Online Green Guide calculator will have an element number. Reused materials: are materials that can be extracted from the waste stream and used again without further processing, or with only minor processing, that does not alter the nature of the material (e.g. cleaning, cutting, fixing to other materials). The Mat 1 Calculator: A spreadsheet-based calculator required to determine the number of credits achieved for this BREEAM issue based on each applicable element’s Green Guide rating. The Mat 1 Calculator makes four adjustments to the points achieved for each specification/element assessed, as follows: 1. The first is the scoring based on the Green Guide rating; A+ =3, A=2, B=1, C=0.5, D=0.25 and E=0. 2. The second, where an element consists of several different specifications, is to weight the points achieved according to the relative area and Green Guide rating of each of the individual specifications. So if 50% of an element was A+ and 50% was C, the score would be (50%*3) + (50%*0.5) = 1.75. 3. The third is to weight based on the overall area of different elements - this is done by multiplying the area of each element by the weighted Green Guide score, adding the total for all elements and then dividing by the total area of the assessed elements. As a 20 storey office block will have a smaller roof area than floor area, so the area weighting will take this into account by giving a smaller weighting to the score for the roof than the external walls. 4. The final adjustment relates to the Ecopoints range for each assessed element. This adjustment ensures the environmental impact of the element in relation to the impacts of other assessed elements within the building is considered. For example; the external walls have a larger Ecopoints range than the internal walls, therefore, if both elements achieve the same Green Guide rating the rating of the external walls achieves a higher proportion of the overall points than the rating for the internal walls, thus recognising the relatively higher reduction possible in the environmental impact of the external walls, due to the larger Ecopoints range for that element. Online Green Guide calculator: BRE Global have created the Green Guide Calculator to enable BREEAM and CSH assessors to quickly and efficiently generate Green Guide ratings for a significant proportion of specifications not listed in the Green Guide Online. The Green Guide Calculator database is based on the components currently used to create specifications within the Green Guide Online. These components can be selected and combined to generate instant Green Guide ratings for a multitude of different specifications. To access the Green Guide Calculator, you must be a licensed BREEAM/EcoHomes/Code for Sustainable Homes Assessor. Please note that, at the time of writing, the Green Guide Calculator is not yet available for public use. Using the Green Guide to Specification The Green Guide categorises ratings by building type and element. When using the Green Guide online, (www.thegreenguide.org.uk), the main page asks the user to select a building type. To obtain the appropriate ratings for the assessed building elements, select the corresponding building type for this BREEAM scheme. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Mat 1 Materials Specification (major building elements) 177 When carrying out a BREEAM assessment of a Multi-residential scheme, please use the Green Guide ratings listed under the “Domestic” category. Where the Multi-residential building is a high rise building i.e. more than 3 stories high, ratings from the ‘commercial’ category of the online Green Guide must be used for the external walls and window elements. To obtain appropriate Green Guide ratings for floor finishes within Multi-residential development, select the ‘healthcare’ category for floor finishes fitted in the communal areas and corridors and ‘domestic’ for those fitted in the over threshold area. Floor finishes On the Green Guide online, under each building type, are categories of flooring specifications commonly used for the key floor areas for that building type. For example, the Retail category contains ratings for hard and soft floor finish specifications for public access areas, based on the functional unit for that type of space. However, any given building will normally contain several different floor areas with different wear requirements. Therefore, the BREEAM Assessor will need to refer to floor finishes under other building type categories to find the relevant specification and Green Guide rating for the building under assessment. For example, for ‘back of house’ office and corridor areas in a retail development, it will be necessary to search the floor finishes specifications and ratings under the Commercial category of the Green Guide online. To aid users of the Green Guide online, there is a diagram that will direct you to the appropriate ratings to be used for other floor areas. The diagram is found in the guidance under the Floor Finishes category. Indoor Air Quality and the Green Guide flooring category ratings The Green Guide Online does not cover the potential health and comfort issues associated with flooring materials and indoor air quality, which is covered in BREEAM by issue Hea 9 Volatile Organic Compounds. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 178 Mat 2 Hard landscaping and boundary protection Issue ID Mat 2 Issue Title Hard Landscaping and Boundary Protection BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available 1 Minimum standards No Aim To recognise and encourage the specification of materials for boundary protection and external hard surfaces that have a low environmental impact, taking account of the full life cycle of materials used. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. Where at least 80% of all external hard landscaping and boundary protection (by area) achieves an A or A+ rating, as defined in the Green Guide to Specification. Green Guide ratings for the specification(s) of each element can be found at: www.thegreenguide.org.uk Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. Refurbishment For each element that is reused in situ, BREEAM allocates an ‘A+’ rating. New & existing elements specified as part of a refurbishment must be assessed as outlined elements above. Extensions to existing buildings Green Guide Online There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. Finding exact Green Guide Ratings Whilst exact matches in specifications are not always found, it should be possible to identify a similar specification and use its rating for the purposes of assessment. Where no similar specification can be found, seek guidance from BRE for the appropriate rating. Where less than 20% of the total area of existing hard landscaping and boundary protection elements are subject to minor alterations or maintenance, these elements are awarded an A+ rating for the purposes of this analysis. If one of the elements is not present, e.g. boundary protection, then the credit must be assessed on the basis of the specification of the single element e.g. hard landscaping. Where the development has neither element, the credit can be awarded. Minor alteration of existing elements No hard landscaping or boundary protection Building façade forming boundary Existing natural features When using the Green Guide for the purpose of assessing this BREEAM issue, ratings for landscaping elements are common across all building types. The rating will therefore be the same irrespective of the building type selected via the Green Guide online. Any part of an external building façade (of either the assessed building or any other neighbouring building) that forms a part of the site boundary should be excluded from the assessment of this credit. Any existing or specified natural boundary protection (such as hedging or other living barrier) should be awarded with an A+ rating for the purposes of this analysis. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Scope of hard landscaping Mat 2 Hard landscaping and boundary protection 179 For the purpose of assessment, hard landscaping includes parking areas, but excludes access/approach roads and designated vehicle manoeuvring areas. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. 1 Design Stage Specification confirming: • A detailed description of each applicable element and its constituent materials. PCR Stage Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence confirming: • Element in-situ (where possible) As built drawings/calculations. Design drawings or specification detailing: • Location and area (m2) of each applicable element. Written confirmation from the design team or contractor of any changes to the specification. The Green Guide rating and element number for the assessed specifications. Additional Information Relevant definitions Green Guide: See Mat 1. Green Guide Element Number: See Mat 1 SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 180 Mat 3 Re-use of facade Issue ID Mat 3 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue Title No. of credits available Re-Use of Facade Minimum standards 1 No Aim To recognise and encourage the in-situ reuse of existing building façades. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. At least 50% of the total final building façade (by area) is reused. 2. At least 80% of the reused façade (by mass) comprises in-situ reused material. Compliance Notes New Build New-build schemes with retained façades provide a means of achieving the credit. Refurbishment Refurbishment projects are likely to achieve this credit without difficulty. Extensions to existing buildings Curtain walling & windows There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. Where existing windows are being replaced they may be excluded from the calculation of façade area; however, curtain walling counts as façade. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. 1&2 Design Stage Post Construction Stage Drawings detailing: • The elevations of the existing and the new-build façades. Assessor’s building/site inspection photographic evidence confirming: • The existence of the reused façade. Calculations demonstrating: • The % of façade comprising in situ material. As built drawings/calculations. and Written confirmation from the design team or contractor of any changes to the specification These calculations should be simply for the façade. based on the volume of each material and its density, with totals compared for the new and retained parts of the structure. Additional Information Relevant definitions SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Mat 3 Re-use of facade 181 Façade: Any exposed building face, not just the front elevation. The definition excludes party walls. In practice, reusing façades will often require extensive renovation and/or reinforcement, hence the BREEAM requirement for at least 80% by mass of the reused façade to be in situ reused material. Façades with new external cladding or internal lining therefore can gain this credit provided that this criterion is met. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 182 Mat 4 Re-use of structure Issue ID Mat 4 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available Issue Title Re-Use of Structure 1 Minimum standards No Aim To recognise and encourage the reuse of existing structures that previously occupied the site. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. Where at least 80% by volume of an existing primary structure is reused without significant strengthening or alteration works. 2. Where a project is part refurbishment and part new build, the reused structure comprises at least 50% by volume of the final building, i.e. any new-build extension to a building being refurbished should not be larger than the original building to qualify for this credit. Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the assessment of new-build projects. Refurbishment Refurbishment projects are likely to be the only buildings to achieve this credit. Extensions to existing buildings There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage 1&2 Drawings or design team calculations detailing: • The sections of the existing structure to be reused. • Any parts of the structure to be demolished and the total new structure. • Where appropriate, calculations confirming any strengthening/alteration are not deemed ‘significant’ in terms of the assessment criteria for the mass of materials used. Post Construction Stage As built drawings/calculations. Written confirmation from the design team or contractor of any changes to the structural specification. Additional Information Relevant definitions Significant strengthening or alteration: Defined as where the mass of new material is equal to or greater than 50% of the total mass of the reused structure. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Mat 4 Re-use of structure 183 Primary structure: Defined as structural floors, columns, beams, load bearing walls and foundations i.e. where required for structural use by the new building. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 184 Mat 5 Responsible sourcing of materials Issue ID Mat 5 Issue Title Responsible Sourcing of Materials - Basic Building Elements BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available 3 Minimum standards No Aim To recognise and encourage the specification of responsibly sourced materials for key building elements. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. Up to 3 credits are available where evidence provided demonstrates that 80% of the applicable materials (listed below) comprising each of the following building elements are responsibly sourced: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Structural Frame Ground floor Upper floors (including separating floors) Roof External walls Internal walls Foundation/substructure Staircase Applicable materials • Brick (including clay tiles and other ceramics) • Resin-based composites and materials, including GRP and polymeric render • Concrete (including in-situ and pre-cast concrete, blocks, tiles, mortars, cementious renders etc.) • Glass • Plastics and rubbers (including EPDM, TPO, PVC and VET roofing membranes including polymeric renders) • Metals (steel, aluminium etc.) • Dressed or building stone including slate • Timber, timber composite and wood panels (including glulam, plywood, OSB, MDF, chipboard and cement bonded particleboard) • Plasterboard and plaster • Bituminous materials, such as roofing membranes and asphalt • Other mineral-based materials, including fibre cement and calcium silicate • Products with recycled content Note: Insulation materials, fixings, adhesives and additives are excluded from the assessment. For any other materials that form a part of an applicable building element, but do not fit into the applicable materials list or the exclusions list, please refer to BRE who will identify the relevant Key Process and Supply Chain Process or Processes. 2. Each applicable material is assigned to a responsible sourcing tier level based on the level and scope of certification achieved by the material supplier(s)/manufacturer(s) (see SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Mat 5 Responsible sourcing of materials 185 Table 13 Responsible Sourcing Tier Levels and Criteria in the additional guidance section). 3. Follow the Calculation Procedure outlined in the additional guidance section, and use the Mat 5 Responsible Sourcing Calculator to determine the number of credits to be awarded. 4. Any non-certified timber used in the development comes from a legal source and is not included on the CITES list (see definition for legally sourced timber). Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM issue: 1. Where, in addition to the above criteria, 95% of the applicable materials, comprised within the applicable building elements, have been responsibly sourced. Compliance Notes New Build Refurbishment Extensions to existing buildings Building element not present Reused in-situ materials Specified reused Materials Insulating materials CITES list A Government licence Pre or post consumer waste Checklist A5 There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. In the case of a refurbishment assess the newly specified applicable and reused materials (reused as defined below). There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. Where an element is not present in a project (e.g. an assessment of a ground floor of a building only and therefore no roof in the scope of the assessment), the points for this/these element(s) will be redistributed by the BREEAM Assessor’s responsible sourcing calculator to reward only the elements being assessed. Materials reused in-situ can be excluded from the assessment. The aim of this issue is to focus on the responsible sourcing of new specified materials. Reused materials specified for the development e.g. recycled aggregates are considered equivalent to materials covered by certification schemes that fall within tier 1 of Table 13 Responsible Sourcing Tier Levels and Criteria. The responsible souring of materials used for insulating the building fabric and services is assessed as part of BREEAM Materials section issue Mat 6 Insulation (see below). Therefore insulating materials are not assessed as part of this assessment issue, but they are still subject to BREEAM’s responsible sourcing requirements. CITES (Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species) Appendices I and II of the CITES list60 illustrate species of timber that are protected outright. Appendix III of the CITES list illustrates species that are protected in at least one country. If a timber species used in the development is on Appendix III it can be included as part of the assessment as long as the timber is not obtained from the country(ies) seeking to protect this species (see Additional Information for further details). A Government licence e.g. UK Forestry Commission felling licence certificate, does not comply as a third party timber certification scheme for this credit, but can be used as evidence of legally sourced timber. Where materials being assessed (including timber) are part of a pre- or postconsumer waste stream, the EMS sections of the credit can be applied for; however, using an EMS scheme (ISO, EMAS etc.) for new timber does not demonstrate timber certification and therefore does not qualify for any of these BREEAM credits. Checklist A5 contains information for the BREEAM assessor, including an explanation of what is required for each of the responsible sourcing tiers. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 186 Mat 5 Responsible sourcing of materials CSH assessed dwellings BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 For buildings with self-contained dwellings also being assessed under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies: The number of credits available in the CSH compared to BREEAM differs for this issue. The credits achieved in the CSH cannot therefore be applied directly to the Multi-residential assessment. However, the assessment criteria for this issue are the same in Multi-residential and the CSH, so where the building is compliant with issue Mat 2 of the CSH, the building assessment is inherently compliant with this issue (albeit the number of credits that can be awarded may differ). Where this is the case, the construction details of each element and the tiers that each material complies with should be entered into the BREEAM Mat 5&8 calculator tool to determine the number of credits achieved for this BREEAM issue. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage 1 Design plan and/or specification confirming: • the location of elements and materials specified • Details of the materials specified. As built drawings or as built specifications confirming that the building has been constructed in accordance with the design stage drawings/specifications. 2&3 A copy of the output from the Responsible Sourcing of Materials Calculator Tool. Copies of purchase orders or receipts or certificate/letter of conformity for all applicable materials, including those recycled or reused A copy of the output from the Responsible Sourcing of Materials Calculator Tool (if different from Design Stage calculation). AND EITHER A letter of intent from the design team confirming: • The product shall be sourced from suppliers capable of providing certification to the level required for the particular tier claimed. OR A copy of the CoC and/or BES6001 and/or EMS (EMAS/ISO14001) certificate. OR For Small companies, (see Relevant Definitions) confirmation that the company EMS is structured in compliance with either: • BS8555 2003 (or equivalent) and the EMS has completed phase audits one to four as outlined in BS8555. This evidence can be found from company documentation demonstrating the process and typical outputs from phase four audits such as an EMS manual/paperwork and guidance to staff. Where independent certification exists to demonstrate these phases, it can be used as evidence. • Green Dragon Environmental Standard ® 2006 (Safon Amgylcheddol Y Ddraig Werdd ®) completed up to and including Level 4. Confirmation is taken from a Green Dragon Standard certificate stating the company’s achievement of Level 4. As company’s achieving Level 4 If the material has been ordered, supplied or the supplier is known: • Purchase order from the supplier including (as appropriate) Chain of Custody (CoC) number and/or BES6001:2008 Certificate number and/or EMS Certificate number OR • A copy of the CoC and/or BES6001 and/or EMS certificate. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 4 1-4 Mat 5 Responsible sourcing of materials 187 * Or in the case of Appendix III of the CITES list, it has not been sourced from the country seeking to protect this species as listed in Appendix III. will normally be required to undertake annual audits, this certification should be dated within 1 year at the point of the last purchase made from the company. For smaller companies with low environmental impacts, a renewal date of within 2 years is acceptable. For clarification on whether a company is certified against the Green Dragon Environmental Standard please see the Register of companies available at the Green Dragon website. Where any non-certified timber is used, written confirmation from the supplier(s) confirming that: • All timber comes from a legal source. • All timber species and sources used in the development are not listed on any of the CITES appendices for endangered or threatened species (Appendix I, II, or III*). OR where relevant: * Or in the case of Appendix III of the CITES list, it has not been sourced from the country seeking to protect this species as listed in Appendix III. OR where relevant: Evidence in line with the Design stage evidence requirements of the CSH Issue Mat 2. Evidence in line with the Post Construction Stage evidence requirements of the CSH Issue Mat 2. OR OR A copy of the Design stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH Issue Mat 2. A copy of the Post Construction Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH Issue Mat 2. Written confirmation from the developer confirming that: • All timber will come from a ‘legal source’ and one not on the CITES list*. Additional Information Calculation Procedure: BREEAM Assessor’s Mat 5 & Mat 8 Responsible Sourcing calculator tool (note: issue Mat 8 applicable only to buildings using the Multi-residential BREEAM scheme) 1. Choose from the list of options in the drop down menu of the calculator the appropriate assessment and scheme type and press the select button. 2. For each element, select from the drop down menu the number of different types/specifications of that element you wish to enter and press the select button. If the element is not present select ‘0’. Note: selecting zero will adjust the points required benchmarks accordingly (see below). 3. For each element, select the ‘data type’ from the relevant drop down menu. There are two options depending on the element type, ‘Volume’ or ‘Percentage’. Volume a. For all present elements and element type/specifications, enter the names of the material types comprising each individual type/specification in the relevant cell of the column material types. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 188 Mat 5 Responsible sourcing of materials BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 b. Enter the volume of each individual material type in the relevant cell of the column titled percentage/volume of relevant materials present. c. Enter the total combined volume of the material types in the cell total volume of element present. d. Enter the volume of each material that complies with either tier 1, 2a or b, 3 or 4, as appropriate. At least 80% of the total volume of each type must comply with one or more of the tiers to achieve any points for that element type. Percentage a. For all present elements and element type/specifications, enter the names of the material types comprising each individual type/specification in the relevant cell of the column material types. b. Enter the percentage of each individual material type (as a percentage of the whole element type) in the relevant cell of the column titled percentage/volume of relevant materials present. c. Enter the percentage of each material (as a percentage of the whole element type) that complies with either tier 1, 2a or b, 3 or 4, as appropriate. At least 80% of the materials that make up an element type must comply with one or more of the tiers to achieve any points for that element type. Combination a. For each type/specification of an element data must be entered by volume or percentage. However, it is not necessary to enter all the data using only one of either volume or percentage, for example one type of an element can be entered using volume and another type using percentage (according to how the relevant building information is sourced/provided). Percentage material breakdown for Green Guide specifications available via the online responsible sourcing calculator BRE Global can, via the online Responsible Sourcing Calculator, provide Licensed BREEAM Assessors with a percentage breakdown of materials for any elemental specification with a Green Guide rating. Assessors can use the online tool to determine the percentage breakdown in two ways; either by entering an individual Green Guide element number for the required specification (if known) or doing a search by building and element type using the relevant drop down menus and elemental specification details provided by the design team. The Assessor must then take the returned data and enter it in to the Mat 5 & 8 calculator tool in accordance with the procedure described above for percentage data entry. The BREEAM Assessor must reference in their Certification report the Green Guide element number for any data sourced from the online Responsible Sourcing Calculator. The online Responsible Sourcing Calculator can be accessed by Licensed BREEAM Assessors via the BREEAM Assessor’s Extranet (there is also a link to the online calculator in the Assessor’s Mat 5&8 calculator tool). 4. Once all data has been entered correctly and in compliance with the criteria, the tool will calculate the total number of points achieved and translate this into the number of credits awarded, as follows: The following scale is used to award credits for new builds and major refurbishment projects: a. ≥15 points 3 credits awarded b. ≥10 points 2 credits awarded SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 c. ≥5 points Mat 5 Responsible sourcing of materials 189 1 credit awarded Assessors Calculation procedure: Post Construction/Post Fit Out stage The procedure for calculating the number of credits achieved at the interim and final stages of assessment is the same; however at the final stage of assessment Assessors will need to: 1. Check that the As Built construction matches that proposed at design stage (see Schedule of Evidence). Where there are any differences in the specification, obtain the relevant volumes and/ or percentages of materials for each element that differs. 2. Obtain the relevant confirmation of tier level achieved (see Schedule of Evidence) for all materials, from all sources/suppliers. 3. Confirm and/or re-assign tier levels to each material based on the level of certification provided (see Table 13 Responsible Sourcing Tier Levels and Criteria and Information Required to Demonstrate Compliance). 4. Adjust the Mat 5 & 8 Responsible Sourcing Calculator accordingly to include any revised information/data, following the calculation procedures described above. Note: Where one or more elements are not applicable i.e. they are not contained within the building e.g. upper floors, the number of points required to credits available are re-allocated based on the number of elements that are specified (the Mat 5 & 8 calculator tool will confirm the adjusted benchmark scale). Although only 80% of the materials in an element have to be assessed, it may be beneficial to include even small percentages of materials that are in tiers higher than those for the 80% compliant materials, as this will contribute to the total amount of points achieved. A maximum of three points is achievable for each element; therefore for example, where there are two types/specifications for an individual element, each individual type can contribute up to a maximum of 1.5 points. Likewise, if there are four types, each can contribute up to a maximum of 0.75 points (the maximum points achievable is based on 80% of the applicable materials achieving tier 1 certification status). SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 190 Mat 5 Responsible sourcing of materials BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Table 13 Responsible Sourcing Tier Levels and Criteria Tier level Issue assessed Points Evidence / available per measure element assessed 1 Legality & 3 Certification responsible scheme sourcing 2a Legality and responsible sourcing 2.5 Certification scheme 2b Legality and responsible sourcing 2 Certification scheme 3 Legality & responsible sourcing 1.5 Certification scheme/ EMS Examples of compliant schemes FSC, CSA, SFI with CoC, PEFC, Reused Materials, Schemes compliant with BES6001:200861 (or similar) Excellent* and Very Good* Performance Ratings (Note; the EMS required to achieve these ratings must be independently certified**) Schemes compliant with BES6001:2008 (or similar) ‘Good’ Performance Rating (Note: the EMS required to achieve this rating must be independently certified**). Schemes compliant with BES6001:2008 (or similar) ‘Pass’ Performance Rating (Note: the EMS required to achieve this rating must be independently certified). Timber: MTCC***, Verified****, SGS, TFT Other materials: Certified EMS for the Key Process and Supply Chain. Recycled Materials with certified EMS for the Key Process Certified EMS for key process stage. 1 Certification Legality & scheme/EMS responsible sourcing Where any timber is used, it must be legally sourced. Where evidence cannot be provided to demonstrate legal sourcing for any element, no points can be awarded for the Responsible Sourcing Issue. 4 Where cement and aggregate, or dry mix concrete are mixed on site, (i.e. not concrete previously certified as pre–cast concrete products or wet ready mix concrete), certification must cover the manufacture of the cement as the primary process, and the extraction of the aggregate and limestone used to make the cement as the supply chain process. * Performance ratings for schemes compliant with BES6001:2008 (or similar) can only be used to demonstrate compliance with the assessment criteria for this issue where certification covers the key process and supply chain processes for the material being assessed. ** In BES6001:2008 to achieve a ‘Pass’, level ‘a’ must, as a minimum, be achieved for clauses 3.3.1, 3.3.2 and 3.3.3. Under clause 3.3.2 level ‘a’ requires a documented EMS system following the principles of ISO14001, but not formal certification. To achieve higher ratings such as ‘Good’, ‘Very Good’ and Excellent a minimum number of points from a combination of clauses 3.3.1, 3.3.2 and 3.3.3 must be achieved. It is possible therefore to get a ‘Good’ or ‘Very good’ rating by only complying with level ‘a’ for clause 3.3.2 and levels ‘c’ and ‘d’ for the other two clauses without necessarily having in place a formal independently certified EMS (as required above). In conducting BES6001 assessment, if the assessor confirms full compliance with clause 3.3.2 level ‘a’ the requirement for an independently certified EMS has been met. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Mat 5 Responsible sourcing of materials 191 *** PEFC International has recently endorsed the Malaysian MTCS scheme, as a result any MTCC timber certified against the new PEFC endorsed scheme documents can be classified as tier 1 for the purposes of the BREEAM assessment. The PEFC endorsement only covers certificates issued against the latest MTCC scheme documents, it must be stressed therefore that any holders of certifications against the previous MTCC scheme documents, including the forest management standard MC&I 2001 or any parts thereof, are NOT PEFC endorsed and this timber must still be classified as Tier 3. When seeking the higher tier level for MTCC certified timber the assessor will need to verify the above via the scope of the supplier’s certificate. For further information and guidance please visit the PEFC website: http://www.pefc.org/internet/html/members_schemes/4_1120_59/5_1246_320/5_1123_1887.htm *** “Verified” is the name of a scheme produced by SmartWood. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 192 Mat 5 Responsible sourcing of materials BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Table 14 EMS Criteria Material Brick (including clay tiles and other ceramics) Resin-based composites and materials (including GRP and polymeric render but excluding timber based composites) In situ Concrete (including ready mix and cemetitious mortars and renders) Precast concrete and other concrete products (including blocks, cladding, precast flooring, concrete or cementitious roof tiles) Glass Key Process Product Manufacture Supply chain processes Clay Extraction Composite product manufacture Glass fibre production (or other principle matrix material) Polymer production Ready mixed concrete plant Cement production Aggregate extraction production Cement production Aggregate extraction production Plastics and rubbers (including polymeric renders, EPDM, TPO, PVC and VET roofing membranes) Plastic/rubber product manufacture Metals (steel, aluminium etc) Metal Product manufacture - e.g. cladding production, steel section production Dressed or building stone (including slate) Plasterboard and plaster Stone product manufacture Virgin timber Timber from certified sources Cement Bonded Particle Board Due to the significant cement content, in addition to requiring timber certification, the key supply chain process must also be considered to obtain the relevant tier: Timber from certified sources Wood panel and wood based composite products such as Oriented Strand Board, plywood, HPL, chipboard/particle, glulam, LVL,etc.) Bituminous materials, such as roofing membranes and asphalt Wood products, including those with recycled content, can only use the Timber Certification route Other mineral-based materials, including fibre cement and calcium silicate Product manufacture Products with 100% recycled content Products with lower % of recycled content Product manufacture Any other product Key processes is likely to be product manufacture Excluded products: insulation materials, adhesives, additives Concrete product manufacture Glass production Plasterboard manufacture or plaster Product manufacture Product manufacture N/A fixings, SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 and and Sand extraction Soda Ash production or extraction Main polymer production Metal production: Steel: Electric arc furnace or Basic oxygen furnace process, Aluminium, ingot production, Copper: ingot or cathode production. Stone extraction Gypsum extraction Synthetic gypsum (from flue gas desulphurisation) by default (recycled content) Timber from certified sources Cement production Timber from certified sources Bitumen production Aggregate extraction production Cement production lime production other mineral extraction production Recycled input by default and and Supply chain process/processes for any virgin material in the relevant product type above. Recycled input by default 1 or 2 main inputs with significant production or extraction impacts should be identified N/A BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Mat 5 Responsible sourcing of materials 193 Timber and Environmental Management Schemes (EMS) Where an Environmental management scheme is used to assess products made from recycled timber, 100% of the timber content must be recycled or sourced from one of the recognised timber certification schemes in Table 13 Responsible Sourcing Tier Levels and Criteria. A timber product with 50% recycled timber and 50% legally sourced timber will not comply with the criteria and will not be awarded any points. Using an EMS for new timber does not demonstrate timber certification and therefore does not qualify for points. Chain of Custody This is a process used to maintain and document the chronological history of the evidence/path for products from forests to consumers. Wood must be tracked from the certified forest to the finished product. All the steps, from transporting wood from the forest to a sawmill, until it reaches the customer, must maintain adequate inventory control systems that allow for separation and identification of the certified product. Chain-of-custody certification ensures that a facility has procedures in place to track wood from certified forests and avoid confusing it with non-certified wood. Chain-of-custody is established and audited according to relevant forest certification systems rules. Third party certification process Auditable third party Certificate issuing body (e.g. Soil Association, BM Trada, CTB, IMO, KPMG, SGS…) Certification Accreditation process standards setting body (CSA, FSC, MTCC, PEFC, SFI) A certificate issued with CoC number Timber certification process CITES - Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of wild fauna and flora (extract taken from the CITES website) ‘’CITES works by subjecting international trade in specimens of selected species to certain controls. All import, export, re-export and introduction from the sea of species covered by the Convention has to be authorized through a licensing system. Each Party to the Convention must designate one or more Management Authorities in charge of administering that licensing system and one or more Scientific Authorities to advise them on the effects of trade on the status of the species. The species covered by CITES are listed in three Appendices, according to the degree of protection they need. 1. Appendix I includes species threatened with extinction. Trade in specimens of these species is permitted only in exceptional circumstances. 2. Appendix II includes species not necessarily threatened with extinction, but in which trade must be controlled in order to avoid utilization incompatible with their survival. 3. Appendix III contains species that are protected in at least one country, which has asked other CITES Parties for assistance in controlling the trade.’’ Calculation of Timber Volumes a. Most of the information on areas, lengths and volumes of timber will be available from the component manufacturers or estimator, who should provide a detailed breakdown of quantities of materials. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 194 Mat 5 Responsible sourcing of materials BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 b. In order to calculate the volume of wood in timber frame windows, the total length of frame must be obtained. This can then be converted to a volume by multiplying the length of frame on fixed windows by 0.00653 and the length of frame on opening windows by 0.01089. c. In order to calculate the volume of timber in composite timber doors such as a flush door, calculate the total area of all doors summed over the whole building and multiply this by 0.02187 (this factor gives the total volume of timber in the doors and frames). BES 6001:2008 Framework Standard for Responsible Sourcing of Construction Products BES 6001:2008 is a BRE Global standard that provides a framework for the assessment of responsible sourcing schemes and provides a route to certification of construction products. The framework comprises a number of criteria setting out the criteria of an organisation in managing the supply of construction products in accordance with a set of agreed principles of sustainability. To comply with the standard a product must meet a number of mandatory criteria, where a product demonstrates compliance beyond the mandatory levels, higher levels of performance can be achieved. The standard's performance ratings range from Pass to Good, Very Good and Excellent. The development of this standard and subsequent certification schemes will, it is envisaged, provide construction products, not wholly covered under current recognised standards, a means for demonstrating their responsibly sourced credentials. In turn this will allow clients, developers and design teams to specify responsibly sourced construction products with greater assurance and provide a means of demonstrating compliance with the assessment criteria for this BREEAM issue. To view a list of products approved to BES6001:2008 visit: www.greenbooklive.com/page.jsp?id=169 For further information about BES6001:2008, including a copy of the standard itself visit: www.greenbooklive.com/page.jsp?id=153 Relevant Definitions Composite material: can be defined as an engineered material made from two or more constituent materials with significantly different physical or chemical properties and which remain separate and distinct on a macroscopic level within the finished structure. Resin based composites such as GRP and polymeric render and timber composites such as Chipboard/Particleboard, MDF, OSB, plywood, hardboard, laminated veneered lumber, glulam and cement bonded particleboard are all required to be assessed for responsible sourcing. Frame: The frame is any of the main structural elements that are not included in the roof, external walls and floors. For example, timber or metal studwork within a plasterboard partition would be included within the internal walls, and timber joists would be included within the floor construction. Where a concrete or steel frame is used, this would be treated as the Frame as it would not be integral to the internal walls for example. Green Dragon Environmental Standard ® (Safon Amgylcheddol Y Ddraig Werdd ®): A stepped standard used to accredit compliance with the Green Dragon Environmental Management Scheme. Dependant on the content of the EMS being assessed, a Level of 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 may be achieved. At level 4 and above, the Green Dragon Environmental Standard ® can be used as evidence of a compliant EMS for small companies being considered under the assessment of this BREEAM issue. www.greendragonems.com Green Guide Element Number: See Mat 1. Key Processes: the final major aspects of processing that are carried out. There may be a single process or multiple processes requiring assessment, depending on the end product. The criteria for each of the assessed materials are detailed in Table 14 EMS Criteria. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Mat 5 Responsible sourcing of materials 195 Legally Sourced Timber: BREEAM follows the UK Government's definition of legally sourced timber, as outlined in the CPET 2nd Edition report on UK Government Timber Procurement Policy62, which states that legal timber and wood derived products are those which originate from a forest where the following criteria are met: 1. The forest owner/manager holds legal use rights to the forest. 2. There is compliance by both the forest management organisation and any contractors with local and national legal criteria including those relevant to: a. Forest management b. Environment c. Labour and welfare d. Health & safety e. Other parties’ tenure and use rights 3. All relevant royalties and taxes are paid. 4. There is compliance with the criteria of CITES. Relevant documentation demonstrating the above must be provided or made available on request subject to the availability of such materials in the country concerned. Certification from any of the timber certification schemes identified in tiers 1, 2 and 4 for this credit demonstrate legally sourced timber. Mat 5 & 8 Responsible Sourcing Calculator: The spreadsheet based calculator tool used by the BREEAM Assessor to determine the number of BREEAM credits achieved for the Mat 5 assessment issue (and in the case of the BREEAM Multi-Residential scheme, the Mat 8 assessment issue). Online Responsible Sourcing Calculator: A web based calculator tool for determining the percentage breakdown of materials that comprise a specific building elemental specification e.g. an external wall. Data is available for all elemental specifications that have a Green Guide rating. The calculator is available to Licensed BREEAM Assessors via the Assessor’s online Extranet. Pre-consumer waste stream: Waste material generated during manufacturing processes. Excluded is reutilisation of materials such as rework, regrind or scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed within the same process that generated it. Post-consumer waste stream: Waste material generated by households or by commercial, industrial and institutional facilities in their role as end-users of the product, which can no longer be used for its intended purpose. This includes returns of material from the distribution chain. Responsible Sourcing: Demonstrated through auditable third party certification schemes. Reused materials: Materials that can be extracted from the waste stream and used again without further processing, or with only minor processing, that does not alter the nature of the material (e.g. cleaning, cutting, fixing to other materials). Recycled Material: Materials diverted from the pre-consumer and/or post-consumer waste streams that require significant processing before they can be used again. For further information please see Calculating and declaring recycled content in construction products, “Rules of Thumb” Guide (WRAP, 2008) www.wrap.org.uk/wrap_corporate/news/wraps_rules_of.html. Supply Chain EMS: covers all of the major aspects of processing and extraction involved in the supply chain for the end product. Note that recycled materials are not required to demonstrate a Supply Chain EMS. If EMS certification is provided for the Key Processes for recycled materials, this is assumed by default. Small Company: A company is defined as ‘small’ if it satisfies at least two of the following criteria: a. A turnover of not more than £5.6 million; b. 50 employees or fewer. This is based on the definition stated in the Companies Act of 1985. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 196 Mat 5 Responsible sourcing of materials BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Tier levels – a graded scale to reflect the rigour of the certification scheme used to demonstrate responsible sourcing, forming the basis for awarding points (all as detailed in Table 13 Responsible Sourcing Tier Levels and Criteria). SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Mat 6 Mat 6 Insulation No. of credits available Issue Title Insulation 2 197 Minimum standards No Aim To recognise and encourage the use of thermal insulation which has a low embodied environmental impact relative to its thermal properties and has been responsibly sourced. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. Any new insulation specified for use within the following building elements must be assessed: • • • • External walls Ground floor Roof Building services First credit - Embodied Impact 2. The Green Guide rating for the thermal insulation materials must be determined. Green Guide ratings for thermal insulation can be found at: www.thegreenguide.org.uk (please refer to the Compliance Notes for guidance where specific insulation has been assessed within an element for the Mat 1 BREEAM issues). 3. Where the Insulation Index for the building insulation is the same as or greater than 2. 4. The Insulation Index is calculated using the Mat 6 Insulation Index Calculator Tool in the BREEAM assessor’s spreadsheet tool. For each type of thermal insulation used in the relevant building elements, the volume weighted thermal resistance provided by each type of insulation is calculated as follows: a. (Area of insulation (m2) * thickness(m)) / Thermal Conductivity (W/ m.K) OR b. Total volume of insulation used (m3) / Thermal conductivity (W/m.K) The volume weighted thermal resistance for each insulation material is then multiplied by the relevant Green Guide point(s) from the following table: Table 15 Green Guide rating points/element Green Guide Rating Points/element A+ 3 A 2 B 1 C 0.5 D 0.25 E 0 SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 198 Mat 6 Insulation BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 To calculate the Insulation Index, the sum of these values is divided by the sum of the volume weighted thermal resistance values (an example calculation is provided in the Additional Information section). Second credit - Responsible Sourcing 5. At least 80% of the thermal insulation used in the building elements identified in Item 1 must be responsibly sourced, i.e. each insulation product must be certified in accordance with Levels 1, 2 or 3 described in Table 13 Responsible Sourcing Tier Levels and Criteria, as outlined in Mat 5. The table below shows the key processes and supply chain processes required for common insulation products. Table 16 EMS criteria for insulation products Material Key Process Foam Insulation Insulation manufacture Supply chain processes Principal Polymer production, e.g. Polystyrene, MDI , Phenolic resin or equivalent Any quarried or mined mineral over 20% of input Stone wool, glass & cellular glass made using < 50% recycled input Wool Product manufacture Product manufacture Wool Scouring Products using > 50% recycled content except those using timber Product manufacture Recycled content by default Timber-based insulation materials including those using recycled timber Product manufacture Other renewable-based insulation materials using agricultural by-products (e.g. straw) Any other product Product manufacture Recycled timber by default, all other timber from one of the recognised timber certification schemes in Table 13 Responsible Sourcing Tier Levels and Criteria. By-product manufacture by default Compliance Notes New Build Refurbishment and materials reused in-situ Extensions to existing buildings Product manufacture 1 or 2 main inputs with significant production or extraction impacts should be identified There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. For each element that is reused in-situ, BREEAM allocates an ‘A+’ rating. For the purpose of responsible sourcing, existing in-situ insulating materials are not assessed. If no new insulating products are being specified as part of the refurbishment both credits can be awarded. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Mat 6 Insulation Insulation incorporated as part of an off-site manufactured element If the insulation is incorporated as a component of an element that has been manufactured offsite e.g. a wall or roof, and that element has been assessed as part of Mat 1, then for the purpose of assessing the insulation for this BREEAM issue, a Green Guide rating of A+ should be used. The same rule applies to insulation that has a significant additional function, such as providing supporting structure e.g. structural insulated panels (SIPS). In the Green Guide the actual insulation will be listed within the element title, rather than under the generic insulation category. Awarding credits Both credits can be awarded independently of each other - i.e. it is not a requirement of the second credit that the first is achieved, and vice-versa. Element consisting of more than one insulation Finding exact Green Guide Ratings Where more than one insulation type is present for a given element, the rating, area and conductivity for each insulation should be entered into the tool and an average is calculated (by area). 199 Where no similar insulation can be found assessors should seek guidance from BRE on the appropriate rating. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage 1-4 Marked-up design plan/elevations and/or a copy of the specification confirming: • The location of insulating materials. • The area (m2) and thickness (m) or volume (m3) of insulation specified. Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence confirming: • Element in-situ (where possible) Manufacturer’s technical details confirming: • Thickness and thermal conductivity of the insulating materials specified. As built drawings and, where relevant, written design team confirmation of any changes to the materials specification. AND A copy of the output from the Insulation Index Calculator Tool. The Green Guide rating and element number for the assessed insulation specifications. 5 Evidence (as outlined in Mat 5) confirming compliance for the insulating materials. Evidence (as outlined Mat 5) confirming compliance. Additional Information Relevant definitions Green Guide: Refer to definitions in Mat 1. Green Guide Element Number: Refer to definitions in Mat 1. Insulation Index: A measure of performance used in BREEAM that seeks to assess the thermal properties of insulation products used in the building relevant to the embodied impact of that insulating material. Insulation Index Calculator Tool: A spreadsheet tool used by the BREEAM assessor to determine the Insulation Index and therefore, whether the BREEAM credit is achieved. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 200 Mat 6 Insulation BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Example calculation The Insulation Index is calculated for a building using the following types of insulation as follows: Type 1 Walls Area = 450m2. Thermal insulation thickness = 100mm. Thermal conductivity = 0.023 W/mK Green Guide rating = A (2 points) Area weighted thermal resistance: ((450*0.100)/0.023) = 1956 Green Guide rating correction: 1956* 2.0 = 3912 Type 2 Building Services Volume of insulation used = 21m3. Thermal conductivity = 0.022 W/mK Green Guide rating = C (0.5 points) Area weighted thermal resistance: (21/0.022) = 955 Green Guide rating correction: 955 * 0.5 = 477 Type 3 Roof Area = 210m2. Thermal insulation thickness = 120mm. Thermal conductivity = 0.027 W/mK Green Guide rating = A+ (3 points) Area weighted thermal resistance: ((210*0.120)/0.027) = 933 Green Guide rating correction: 933 * 3.0 = 2799 Type 4 Ground Floor Area = 210m2. Thermal insulation thickness = 120mm. Thermal conductivity = 0.027 W/mK Green Guide rating = B (1 point) Area weighted thermal resistance: ((210*0.120)/0.027) = 933 Green Guide rating correction: 933 * 1.0 = 933 Total area weighted thermal resistance = 1956+955+933+933 = 4777 Green Guide rating correction = 3912 + 477 + 2799 +933 = 8121 Insulation Index: Green Guide Rating Correction / Total Area weighted thermal resistance = 8121/4777 = 1.7 (credit not achieved). SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Mat 7 Issue Title Designing for Robustness Mat 7 Designing for Robustness No. of credits available 1 201 Minimum standards No Credit aim To recognise and encourage adequate protection of exposed parts of the building and landscape, therefore minimising the frequency of use of replacement materials. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. Internal and external areas of the building where vehicular, trolley and pedestrian movement occur have been identified. 2. Suitable durability and protection measures or design features have been specified to prevent damage to the vulnerable parts of these building areas from such traffic. This must include, but is not necessarily limited to: a. Protection from the effects of high pedestrian traffic in main entrances, public areas and thoroughfares (corridors, lifts, stairs, doors etc). b. Protection against any internal vehicular/trolley movement within 1m of the internal building fabric in storage, delivery, corridor and kitchen areas. c. Protection against, or prevention from, any potential vehicular collision where vehicular parking and manoeuvring occurs within 1m of the external building façade for all car parking areas and within 2m for all delivery areas. Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the assessment of new-build projects. Refurbishment Where the assessment is of a refurbished building on an existing site then the criteria apply to the areas that form a part of the works or hard landscape for that building. Extensions to There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to existing the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. buildings Suitable Suitable durability and protection measures to vulnerable parts of the building durability can include: measures • Bollards/barriers/raised kerbs to delivery and vehicle drop-off areas • Robust external wall construction, up to 2m high • Corridor walls specified to Severe Duty (SD) as per BS 5234-263. • Protection rails to walls of corridors • Kick plates/impact protection (from trolleys etc) on doors • Hard-wearing and easily washable floor finishes in heavily used circulation areas (i.e. main entrance, corridors, public areas etc) • SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 202 Mat 7 Designing for Robustness Vehicle Impact Protection Public / Common Areas BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Any vehicle impact protection measures specified must be positioned at an adequate distance from the building to protect the fabric from impact from any vehicle with a measurable overhang of the body from the wheel track, in particular for any goods delivery areas. In vehicle movement areas only; where the specification of external robust wall construction is specified to comply with the credit, additional protection must be provided to ensure against potential damage to the robust façade from vehicle movement, i.e. specifying bollards or protection rails. Consideration should be given to materials specification in public/common areas (especially public waiting areas and toilet areas) to provide protection against potential malicious or physical abuse in as far as it is possible. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage 1 Design drawings marked up to illustrate: • Vulnerable areas/parts of the building. 2 Design drawings and/or specification confirming: • The durability measures specified. Additional Information Relevant definitions None. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 Post Construction Stage Assessor’s building/site inspection photographic evidence confirming: • Vulnerable areas of the building • The durability measures in-situ. and BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Mat 8 Mat 8 Responsible Sourcing of Materials – Finishing Elements Issue Title Responsible Sourcing of Materials – Finishing Elements No. of credits available Minimum standards 2 No 203 Aim To recognise and encourage the specification of responsibly sourced materials for finishing elements. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. Up to 2 credits are available where evidence provided demonstrates that 80% of the applicable materials (listed below) comprising the following fit out elements are responsibly sourced: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Stairs Windows External and internal doors Skirting Panelling Furniture Fascias Any other significant use Applicable materials • Brick (including clay tiles and other ceramics) • Resin-based composites and materials, including GRP and polymeric render • Concrete (including in-situ and pre-cast concrete, blocks, tiles, mortars, cementious renders etc.) • Glass • Plastics and rubbers (including EPDM, TPO, PVC and VET roofing membranes including polymeric renders) • Metals (steel, aluminium etc.) • Dressed or building stone including slate • Timber, timber composite and wood panels (including glulam, plywood, OSB, MDF, chipboard and cement bonded particleboard) • Plasterboard and plaster • Bituminous materials, such as roofing membranes and asphalt • Other mineral-based materials, including fibre cement and calcium silicate • Products with recycled content 2. Each applicable material is assigned to a responsible sourcing tier level based on the level and scope of certification achieved by the material supplier(s)/manufacturer(s) (see Table 13 Responsible Sourcing Tier Levels and Criteria and Table 14 EMS Criteria in the additional guidance section of BREEAM issue Mat 5 Responsible Sourcing of Materials). 3. Follow the Calculation Procedure outlined in the additional guidance section, and use the Responsible Sourcing Calculator to determine the number of credits to be awarded. 4. Any non-certified timber used in the development comes from a legal source and is not included on the CITES list (see definition for legally sourced timber). SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 204 Mat 8 Responsible Sourcing of Materials – Finishing Elements BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM issue: 1. Where, in addition to the above criteria, 95% of the applicable materials, comprised within the applicable building elements, have been responsibly sourced. Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. Refurbishment In the case of a refurbishment assess the newly specified applicable and reused materials (reused as defined below). Extensions to There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to existing the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. buildings Building element Where an element is not present in a project (e.g. an assessment of a ground not present floor of a building only and therefore no roof in the scope of the assessment), the points for this/these element(s) will be redistributed by the calculator to reward only the elements being assessed. Reused in-situ materials Materials reused in-situ can be excluded from the assessment. The aim of this issue is to focus on the responsible sourcing of new specified materials. Specified reused Materials Reused materials specified for the development e.g. recycled aggregates are considered equivalent to materials covered by certification schemes that fall within tier 1 of Table 13 Responsible Sourcing Tier Levels and Criteria. CITES list CITES (Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species) Appendices I and II of the CITES list64 illustrate species of timber that are protected outright. Appendix III of the CITES list illustrates species that are protected in at least one country. If a timber species used in the development is on Appendix III it can be included as part of the assessment as long as the timber is not obtained from the country(ies) seeking to protect this species (see Additional Information for further details). A Government licence e.g. UK Forestry Commission felling licence certificate, does not comply as a third party timber certification scheme for this credit, but can be used as evidence of legally sourced timber. Where materials being assessed (including timber) are part of a pre- or postconsumer waste stream, the EMS sections of the credit can be applied for; however, using an EMS scheme (ISO, EMAS etc.) for new timber does not demonstrate timber certification and therefore does not qualify for any of these BREEAM credits. Checklist A5 is contains information for the BREEAM assessor, including an explanation of what is required for each of the responsible sourcing tiers. A Government licence Pre or post consumer waste Checklist A5 SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 CSH assessed dwellings Mat 8 Responsible Sourcing of Materials – Finishing Elements 205 For buildings with self-contained dwellings also being assessed under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies: The number of credits available in the CSH compared to BREEAM differs for this issue. The credits achieved in the CSH cannot therefore be applied directly to the Multi-residential assessment. However, the assessment criteria for this issue are the same for Multi-residential and the CSH, so where the building is compliant with issue Mat 3 of the CSH, the building assessment is inherently compliant with this issue (albeit the number of credits achieved may differ). Where this is the case, the construction details of each element and the tiers that each material complies with should be entered into the Mat 5 & 8 calculator tool to determine the number of credits achieved for this BREEAM issue. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage 1 Design plan and/or specification confirming: • the location of elements and materials specified • Details of the materials specified. As built drawings or as built specifications confirming that the building has been constructed in accordance with the design stage drawings/specifications. Copies of purchase orders or receipts or certificate/letter of conformity for all applicable materials, including those recycled or reused 2&3 A copy of the output from the Responsible Sourcing of Materials Calculator Tool. A copy of the output from the Responsible Sourcing of Materials Calculator Tool (if different from Design Stage calculation). AND EITHER A letter of intent from the design team confirming: • The product shall be sourced from suppliers capable of providing certification to the level required for the particular tier claimed. OR A copy of the CoC and/or BES6001 and/or EMS (EMAS/ISO14001) certificate. OR For Small companies, (see Relevant Definitions) confirmation that the company EMS is structured in compliance with either: • BS8555 2003 (or equivalent) and the EMS has completed phase audits one to four as outlined in BS8555. This evidence can be found from company documentation demonstrating the process and typical outputs from phase four audits such as an EMS manual/paperwork and guidance to staff. Where independent certification exists to demonstrate these phases, it can be used as evidence. • Green Dragon Environmental Standard ® 2006 (Safon Amgylcheddol Y Ddraig Werdd ®) completed up to and including Level 4. Confirmation is taken from a Green Dragon Standard certificate stating the company’s achievement of Level 4. As company’s achieving Level 4 will If the material has been ordered, supplied or the supplier is known: • Purchase order from the supplier including (as appropriate) Chain of Custody (CoC) number and/or BES6001:2008 Certificate number and/or EMS Certificate number OR • A copy of the CoC and/or BES6001 and/or EMS certificate. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 206 Mat 8 Responsible Sourcing of Materials – Finishing Elements 4 Written confirmation from the developer confirming that: • All timber will come from a ‘legal source’ and one not on the CITES list*. * Or in the case of Appendix III of the CITES list, it has not been sourced from the country seeking to protect this species as listed in Appendix III. BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 normally be required to undertake annual audits, this certification should be dated within 1 year at the point of the last purchase made from the company. For smaller companies with low environmental impacts, a renewal date of within 2 years is acceptable. For clarification on whether a company is certified against the Green Dragon Environmental Standard please see the Register of companies available at the Green Dragon website. Where any non-certified timber is used, written confirmation from the supplier(s) confirming that: • All timber comes from a legal source. • All timber species and sources used in the development are not listed on any of the CITES appendices for endangered or threatened species (Appendix I, II, or III*). * Or in the case of Appendix III of the CITES list, it has not been sourced from the country seeking to protect this species as listed in Appendix III. 1-4 OR where relevant: OR where relevant: Evidence in line with the Design stage evidence requirements of the CSH Issue Mat 3. Evidence in line with the Post Construction Stage evidence requirements of the CSH Issue Mat 3. OR OR A copy of the Design stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH Issue Mat 3. A copy of the Post Construction Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH Issue Mat 3. Additional Information Calculation Procedure (using the Mat 5 & Mat 8 calculator) Please refer to the calculation procedure detailed in the Additional Guidance section of the BREEAM issue Mat 5 Responsible Sourcing of Materials for guidance on the calculation procedure. Once all data has been entered correctly and in compliance with the criteria, the Mat 5 & Mat 8 Calculator tool will calculate the total number of points achieved and translate this into the number of credits awarded. The following scale is used to award credits for compliant finishing elements: a. ≥15 points b. ≥10 points 2 credits awarded 1 credits awarded Note: Where not all applicable elements are specified within the development, the number of points required to credits available are re-allocated based on the number of elements that are specified. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Mat 8 Responsible Sourcing of Materials – Finishing Elements 207 Although only 80% of the materials in an element have to be assessed, it may be beneficial to include even small percentages of materials that are in the higher tiers. Relevant Definitions Please refer to the relevant definitions list in BREEAM issue Mat 5 Responsible Sourcing of Materials. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 208 Wst 1 Construction Site Waste Management BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 10.0 Waste Issue ID Wst 1 No. of credits available Issue Title Construction Site Waste Management Minimum standards 4 No Aim To promote resource efficiency via the effective and appropriate management of construction site waste. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. Where non-hazardous construction waste generated by the building’s construction phase (excluding demolition and excavation waste) meets or exceeds the following resource efficiency benchmarks: Amount of waste generated per 100m2 (gross internal floor area) m3 tonnes One credit 13.0 - 16.6 6.6 - 8.5 Two credits 9.2 – 12.9 4.7 - 6.5 <9.2 <4.7 BREEAM credits Three credits * Volume (m3) is actual volume of waste (not bulk volume) 2. Where there is a Site Waste Management Plan (SWMP) that contains: 3 2 a. The target benchmark for resource efficiency i.e. m of waste per 100m or tonnes of waste per 100m2 b. Procedures and commitments for minimising non-hazardous waste in line with the benchmark c. Procedures for minimising hazardous waste d. Procedures for monitoring, measuring and reporting hazardous and non-hazardous site waste e. Procedures for sorting, reusing and recycling construction waste into defined waste groups (see additional guidance section), either on site or through a licensed external contractor f. The name or job title of the individual responsible for implementing the above. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Wst 1 Construction Site Waste Management 209 Demolition & refurbishment projects 3. In addition to the above, sites with existing buildings that will be refurbished or demolished, where demolition forms a part of the principal contractor’s works contract, must comply with the following: a. Completed a pre-demolition/pre-refurbishment audit of the existing building to determine if, in the case of demolition, refurbishment is feasible and, if not, to maximise the recovery of material from demolition or refurbishment for subsequent high-grade/value applications. The audit must be referenced in the SWMP and cover: i. Identification of the key refurbishment/demolition materials. ii. Potential applications and any related issues for the reuse and recycling of the key refurbishment and demolition materials. One additional credit is available 1. Where at least 75% by weight or 65% by volume of non-hazardous construction waste generated by the project has been diverted from landfill and either: a. b. c. d. e. Reused on site (in-situ or for new applications) Reused on other sites Salvaged/reclaimed for reuse Returned to the supplier via a ‘take-back’ scheme Recovered from site by an approved waste management contractor and recycled. 2. For demolition projects, in addition to the above requirement for construction-related waste, 90% by weight or 80% by volume of non-hazardous demolition waste has been diverted from landfill. 3. Where there is a Site Waste Management Plan (SWMP) complying with the above criteria. 4. Waste materials will be sorted into separate key waste groups (according to the waste streams generated by the scope of the works) either onsite or offsite through a licensed contractor for recovery. Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM issue. 1. Where non-hazardous construction waste generated by the building’s development meets or exceeds the resource efficiency benchmark required to achieve three credits (as outlined above). 2. Where at least 90% by weight (80% by volume) of non-hazardous construction waste and 95% of demolition waste by weight (85% by volume) (if applicable) generated by the build has been diverted from landfill and either: a. b. c. d. e. Reused on site (in-situ or for new applications) Reused on other sites Salvaged/reclaimed for reuse Returned to the supplier via a ‘take-back’ scheme Recovered from site by an approved waste management contractor and recycled. 3. All key waste groups are identified for diversion from landfill at pre-construction stage SWMP. Compliance Notes New Build Refurbishment There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 210 Wst 1 Construction Site Waste Management Extensions to existing buildings CSH assessed dwellings BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 If the building is part refurbishment part new-build extension then the whole building must be used to determine compliance with this issue. For assessments of extensions to existing buildings, where only the extension is being assessed, it is the extension only that must comply. For buildings with self-containted dwellings that are also being assessed under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies: The number of credits achieved under the CSH assessment cannot be directly applied to a BREEAM Multi-residential assessment due to differences in assessment criteria between the two schemes. Predemolition/prerefurbishment audit SWMP Limited site space for segregation and storage Where the credits available for issue Was 2 Construction Site Waste management of the CSH has been achieved, the site waste management plan is also compliant with the requirements of this issue. However, where the project also includes the demolition of existing buildings/elements, the SWMP will need to comply with the Demolition and Refurbishment requirements defined above to qualify for credits. A pre-demolition/pre-refurbishment audit should be carried out using an appropriate methodology. At the time of writing BRE are currently developing a tool as part of the SMARTWaste system for carrying out such audits, and the ICE has produced guidance on pre-demolition audits, including ‘A report on the Demolition Protocol’65. Since April 2008 any construction project in England costing over £300k requires a Site Waste Management Plan. To achieve any of the construction site waste management credits the assessed development, regardless of value or locality, must have a SWMP compliant with best practice (see relevant definitions in additional guidance section). Where space on site is too limited to allow waste materials to be segregated, a waste contractor may be used to separate and process recyclable materials off site. Similarly, manufacturers’ take-back schemes could also be used. Where this is the case, sufficient documentary evidence must be produced which demonstrates that segregation of materials is carried out to the agreed levels and that materials are reused/recycled as appropriate. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage All Credits and Exemplary level All A copy of the compliant Site Waste Management Plan containing the appropriate benchmarks, commitments and procedures. Where relevant, a copy of the predemolition/pre-refurbishment audit. OR A copy of the specification clause that: SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 A copy of the SWMP summary datasheets or equivalent monitoring records/report confirming: • The total waste arising for the development. • Comparison of the total waste arising against the benchmark • Quantities of waste by groupings • Where required, the amount and proportion of waste arising that was reused, recycled and landfilled. BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 • • • Requires the principal contractor to produce a SWMP in line with the criteria Contains the detailed criteria with respect to resource efficiency benchmarks and target(s) and procedures to be included in the SWMP Where relevant, requires the principal contractor to carry out a predemolition/pre-refurbishment audit. OR A letter from the client or their representative containing: • Confirmation that the specification will contain a clause on site waste management criteria. • An outline of the detailed criteria that will be included in that specification clause. Wst 1 Construction Site Waste Management • Custody/application/destination reused/recycled materials. 211 of AND where relevant Evidence in line with the Post Construction Stage evidence requirements of the CSH Issue Was 2. OR A copy of the Post Construction Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH Issue Was 2. AND where relevant Evidence in line with the Design Stage evidence requirements of the CSH Issue Was 2. OR a copy of the Design Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH Issue Was 2 Additional Information Relevant definitions Significant Majority: Defined as meeting at least the percentages required within the assessment criteria section of this manual. Site Waste Management Plan (SWMP): SWMP aims to promote resource efficiency and to prevent illegal waste activities. Resource efficiency includes minimising waste at source and ensuring that clients, designers and principal contractors assess the use, reuse and recycling of materials and products on and off the site. Best Practice SWMP: Best practice (site waste management) is a combination of commitments to: a. design out waste b. reduce waste generated on site c. develop and implement procedures to sort and reuse/recycle construction waste on and off site (as applicable). d. follow guidance from: • DEFRA (Department of Environment, Food and Rural Affairs) • BRE (Building Research Establishment) • Envirowise SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 212 Wst 1 Construction Site Waste Management • BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 WRAP (Waste & Resources Action Programme) Table 17 Construction waste groups European Waste Key Group Catalogue) 170102 Bricks Examples Bricks 170101 Concrete Pipes, kerb stones, paving slabs, concrete rubble, precast and in situ Glass fibre, mineral wool, foamed plastic 170604 Insulation 1501 Packaging 170201 Timber 1602 200301 Electrical and electronic equipment Canteen/office Paint pots, pallets, cardboard, cable drums, wrapping bands, polythene sheets Softwood, hardwood, boards products such as plywood, chipboard, medium density fibreboard (MDF) Electrical & electronic TVs, fridges, airconditioning units, lamps equipment Office waste, canteen waste, vegetation 1301 1703 Oils Asphalt and tar Hydraulic oil, engine oil, lubricating oil Bitumen, coal tars, asphalt 170103 Tiles and ceramics 1701 Inert Ceramic tiles, clay roof tiles, ceramic, sanitaryware Mixed rubble/excavation material, glass 1704 Metals Radiators, cables, wires, bars, sheet 170802 Gypsum 170203 Plastics Plasterboard, render, plaster, cement, fibre cement sheets, mortar Pipes, cladding, frames, non-packaging sheet 200307 Furniture Tables, chairs, desks, sofas 1705 Most relevant EWC Soils Liquids Most relevant EWC Hazardous Most relevant EWC Floor coverings (soft) Soils, clays, sand; gravel, natural stone Non-hazardous paints, thinners, timber treatments Defined in the Hazardous Waste List (HWL) of the European Waste Catalogue (EWC) Carpets, vinyl flooring Most relevant EWC 170904 (Mixed) Architectural Features Mixed/ other Roof tiles, reclaimed bricks, fireplaces Efforts should be made to categorise waste into the above categories wherever possible BREEAM construction waste benchmarks The benchmarks used have been derived from BRE's SMARTWaste system and through a DEFRAfunded project for predicting construction waste and will be updated annually for the purposes of BREEAM. The benchmarks are based on real-life data and have been subject to a number of statistical and logical tests. The benchmarks used apply to actual volume, and standard conversion factors have been used for tonnages from the Environment Agency. Compliance with the benchmarks can be demonstrated using either volume of weight of construction waste. For more information on these benchmarks and to break them down by waste type, please go to www.smartwaste.co.uk SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Wst 1 Construction Site Waste Management 213 Tools for preparing, implementing and reviewing a SWMP SMARTWaste Plan is a free web-based tool for preparing, implementing and reviewing a SWMP. This tool includes an integrated waste measurement tool (a revised SMARTStart) which is aligned to defined waste groups. SMARTWaste Plan will manage all aspects of creating SWMPs and measuring waste generated on projects. Templates are available to meet the BREEAM credits and can also be downloaded. The tool includes online waste measurement, industry waste benchmarks and links to BREMAP. A carbon calculator and economic assessment of waste will also be added. BREMAP is a geographical information system of waste management facilities. See www.bremap.co.uk SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 214 Wst 2 Recycled aggregates Issue ID Wst 2 Issue Title Recycled Aggregates BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available 1 Minimum standards No Aim To recognise and encourage the use of recycled and secondary aggregates in construction, thereby reducing the demand for virgin material. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. Where the amount of recycled and secondary aggregate specified is over 25% (by weight or volume) of the total high-grade aggregate uses for the building. Such aggregates can be EITHER: a. Obtained on site OR b. Obtained from waste processing site(s) within a 30km radius of the site; the source will be principally from construction, demolition and excavation waste (CD&E) – this includes road plannings OR c. Secondary aggregates obtained from a non-construction post-consumer or post-industrial by-product source (see Compliance Notes). Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. Refurbishment The credit available for this issue can be awarded automatically where no new aggregate is being used. Potentially the case in most refurbishments. Extensions to There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to existing the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. buildings Secondary Recognised non-construction post-consumer or post-industrial by-products aggregates include: • China clay waste • Slate overburden • Pulverised Fuel Ash (PFA) • Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS) • Air-cooled blast furnace slag • Steel slag • Furnace bottom ash (FBA) • Incinerator bottom ash • Foundry sands • Recycled glass • Recycled plastic • Tyres • Spent oil shale • Colliery spoil • Municipal Solid Waste Treatment Residues SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Wst 2 Recycled aggregates 215 Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage 1 A copy of the relevant specification or contract clause confirming: • Recycled and secondary aggregate use criteria for the project. Structural engineers calculations demonstrating the weight/volume of: • Total high grade aggregate used. • Total recycled and secondary aggregates used. A letter from the design team or main contractor confirming: • The source of recycled/secondary aggregates • The amount and quality required can be obtained from this source. Third party documentation as follows: Delivery notes for all recycled and secondary aggregates confirming: • Source of recycled/secondary aggregate. AND/OR A letter or email from the aggregate/ concrete supplier confirming that: • The aggregate supplied and used was from a recycled/secondary source • Source of recycled/secondary aggregate. Additional Information Relevant definitions High Grade aggregate uses are considered to be: Bound • Structural frame; • Floor slabs including ground floor slabs; • Bitumen or hydraulically bound base, binder, and surface courses for paved areas and roads. Unbound • Asphalt-based or similar road surfaces • Granular fill and capping • Pipe bedding • Sub bases/building foundations • Gravel landscaping. Crushed masonry used as fill material for general landscaping is not considered to be high grade. This practice is now common place on construction sites due to landfill costs. Pre-consumer waste stream: Waste material generated during manufacturing processes. Excluded is reutilisation of materials such as rework, regrind or scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed within the same process that generated it. Post-consumer waste stream: Waste material generated by households or by commercial, industrial and institutional facilities in their role as end-users of the product, which can no longer be used for its intended purpose. This includes returns of material from the distribution chain. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 216 Wst 2 Recycled aggregates BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Recycled aggregates: are those derived from reprocessing materials previously used in construction, e.g. crushed concrete or masonry from construction and demolition waste material. Secondary aggregates: By-products of industrial processes that can be processed to produce secondary aggregates. Secondary Aggregates are sub-divided into manufactured and natural, depending on their source. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Wst 3 Recyclable waste storage No. of credits available Issue Title Wst 3 Recyclable Waste Storage 217 Minimum standards 2 Yes Aim To recognise the provision of dedicated storage facilities for a building’s operational-related recyclable waste streams, so that such waste is diverted from landfill or incineration. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: First credit 1. Buildings consisting of self contained dwellings/bedsits: Provision of three internal storage containers in each self contained dwelling/bedsit as follows: a. b. c. d. A minimum total capacity of 30 litres No individual container smaller than 7 litres All containers in a dedicated non obstructive position Storage for recycling provided in addition to non-recyclable waste storage. Buildings consisting of individual bedrooms and communal facilities: a. Where the above storage requirements are met for every six bedrooms. b. The recycled storage is located in a dedicated non obstructive position in either: • Communal kitchens or, • Where there are no communal kitchens present, in a communal space such as communal lounges or utility areas. Second credit 1. A dedicated storage space to cater for recyclable materials generated by the building during occupation, compliant with the following: a. Clearly labelled for recycling b. Placed within accessible reach of the building (see Compliance Notes) c. In a location with good vehicular access to facilitate collections. 2. The size of the space allocated must be adequate to store the likely volume of recyclable materials generated by the building’s occupants/operation. Whilst a fixed area cannot always be given, the following must be complied with as a minimum: 2 2 2 a. At least 2m per 1000m of net floor area for buildings <5000m b. A minimum of 10m2 for buildings ≥5000 m2 c. An additional 2m2 per 1000m2 of net floor area where catering is provided (with an 2 2 additional minimum of 10m for buildings ≥5000m ). Compliance Notes SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 218 Wst 3 Recyclable waste storage New Build BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Extensions to existing buildings There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Where there are facilities within the existing building, these can be used to assess compliance. The scope of these facilities must be adequate to cater for the total volume of predicted waste from the new and existing buildings. CSH assessed dwellings For buildings with self-contained dwellings also being assessed under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies: Refurbishment Where a minimum of two credits have been achieved for the CHS issue Was 1, the first credit of BREEAM issue Wst 3 can be achieved under the Multiresidential assessment. This is provided that all other residential and non residential areas not covered by the CSH assessment meet the criteria of this issue for the first credit (as defined above) Where four credits have been achieved under the CSH issue Was 1, the second credit under BREEAM issue Wst 3 can be awarded, provided that the recyclable storage capacity is sufficient for the whole building. Accessible reach of the building Individual Recycling Bins Internal storage areas General waste Stand-alone free standing recycling bins Typically ‘accessible reach’ is defined in BREEAM as within 20m of a building entrance. In some circumstances, depending on the size of the building, site restrictions or tenancy arrangements, it may not be possible to meet a 20m requirement. If it is the opinion of the assessor that it is not feasible to meet this 20m requirement then they can use their judgement to determine if the facility is in an easily accessible location for building occupants and vehicle collection and to state their reasons in the assessment report. Individual recycling bins located at convenient locations throughout the building are necessary to maximise recycling rates. On their own, however, these are not sufficient to obtain this credit. Where the facilities are situated internally, vehicular gate heights/widths and manoeuvring and loading space must be sized correctly to ensure ease of access for vehicles collecting recyclable materials. The area for recyclable materials storage must be provided in addition to areas and facilities provided for dealing with general waste and other waste management facilities, e.g. compactors and balers. Stand-alone free standing recycling bins placed directly on the floor do not comply with the requirements of BREEAM Multi-residential. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage All Marked-up building/site plan and/or copy of the specification confirming: • The location of the dedicated recyclable storage area • Storage area for general waste • The area (m2) of the storage space(s) • Description of the labelling. Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence confirming: • The location, size and capacity of the storage provision • Labelling of the dedicated facilities. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 AND where relevant BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Wst 3 Recyclable waste storage 219 AND where relevant Evidence in line with the Post Construction Stage evidence requirements of the CSH issue Was 1. Evidence in line with the Design Stage evidence requirements of the CSH issue Was 1, OR OR A copy of the Design Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH issue Was 1. A copy of the Post Construction Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH issue Was 1. Additional Information Relevant Definitions Dedicated non-obstructive position: Ideally this would be in an easily accessible cupboard under the sink or any other cupboard in the kitchen, next to the storage or likely area for storing non-recyclable waste, where practical. Where a kitchen cupboard location is not possible the bins can be located near to the kitchen, in a utility room or connected garage for example. The following footprint dimensions can act as a guide when determining size and accessibility criteria for the recyclable storage space: • • • • • Compactor dimensions: about the size of one car parking bay; 4.8 x 2.4m Skip: The footprint of an 8 and 12 cubic yard skip measures 3.4m x 1.8m, therefore allow a minimum of 2.0m width and 4.0m length or 8m2 area for the storage and access of such containers Wheeled bins: 360 litre = 0.86m x 0.62 / 660L= 1.2m x 0.7m / 1100L = 1.28m x 0.98m Roll-on-roll-off containers: allow a minimum of 6.1m x 2.4m. Vehicle access: The following are dimensions for lorry types that are typically used to collect waste. Therefore gate height/widths should not be smaller than these measurements: o Dustcart: medium capacity; length = 7.4m Height = 4m width 3.1m o Skip lorry: length = 7m Height = 3.35m width 3.1m Consideration must also be given to any other types of vehicle requiring access to this area, e.g. lorries for roll on/off containers. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 220 Wst 4 Compactor / Baler Issue ID Wst 4 Issue Title Compactor / Baler Issue not assessed under this scheme. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available N/A Minimum standards No BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Wst 5 Issue Title Composting Wst 5 Composting No. of credits available 1 221 Minimum standards No Aim To encourage the provision of facilities that help facilitate the reduction in volume of compostable organic waste going directly to landfill during the building’s operation. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. A vessel is installed on site for composting suitable food waste resulting from the building’s daily operation and use. 2. There is adequate space for storing segregated food waste and composted organic material. 3. At least one water outlet is provided for cleaning in and around the facility. OR 4. Where there are space or access limitations on site, the following demonstrates compliance: a. There is a dedicated segregated space for storing compostable food waste prior to collection and delivery to an alternative composting facility. b. At least one water outlet is provided for cleaning in and around the facility AND (in addition to criteria 1-3 or 4 above) 5. Individual dwellings/communal kitchens are provided with home composting facilities and a home composting information leaflet is provided with each individual dwelling/communal kitchen. Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. Refurbishment There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Extensions to There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to existing the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. buildings Home The leaflet must provide information on: composting • How composting works and why it is important information • The materials that can be composted (e.g. raw vegetable peelings and leaflet fruit, shredded paper, teabags, etc.); and • Details of the operation and management plan for the communal composting scheme Where a green/kitchen waste collection scheme is in operation, the information leaflet provided by the Local Authority is sufficient to meet the information leaflet criteria. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 222 Wst 5 Composting CSH assessed dwellings Storage Capacity BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 For buildings with self-contained dwellings also being assessed under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies: Where one credit has been achieved in the assessment of CSH issue Was 3, the assessment criteria of this issue for self-contained dwellings has been met. Furthermore, to achieve the credit for this BREEAM assessment issue, the remaining residential and non-residential areas of the building, that do not form part of a self-contained dwelling, must comply with the above assessment criteria. No criteria are defined for the type of vessel or storage capacity required as this will be determined by the end user and predicted volumes of organic compostable waste. The assessor should be satisfied that, within reason, the installation is adequate for the size of development, bearing in mind the likely quantity of organic waste that will be produced by the development. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage 1-4 Marked-up design plan and/or a copy of the specification confirming (as appropriate): • Specification of composting vessel • Location and size of space for vessel and storage of waste/compost • Water outlet. Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence confirming: • The installation of the vessel • The provision of adequate storage space/facilities • Installation of a water outlet AND where relevant If appropriate, a letter from the occupier or service provider confirming: • Location of the off-site facility where compostable material will be delivered. • The procedure and frequency for collecting the compostable material. Evidence in line with the Design stage evidence requirements of the CSH Issue Was 3. OR AND where relevant A copy of the Design Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH Issue Was 3. Evidence in line with the Post Construction Stage evidence requirements of the CSH Issue Was 3. OR A copy of the Post Construction Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming that the number of credits achieved for CSH Issue Was 3. Additional Information Relevant definitions None. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 LE1 Reuse of Land 223 11.0 Land Use and Ecology Issue ID LE 1 Issue Title Reuse of Land No. of credits available 1 Minimum standards No Aim To encourage the reuse of land that has been previously developed, and discourage the use of previously undeveloped land for building. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. At least 75% of the proposed development’s footprint is on an area of land which has previously been developed for use by industrial, commercial or domestic purposes in the last 50 years. Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new build projects. Refurbishment In the case of refurbishment, the credit can be awarded by default where no new building work or infrastructure is being constructed as part of the refurbishment. Extensions to Where a refurbishment includes new buildings, hard landscaping, or existing infrastructure, 75% of the total proposed development footprint (refurbished buildings plus new build and/or hard landscaping and/or infrastructure) must comply with the requirement. Infill New buildings developed within the boundary of existing sites do not development automatically comply with the criteria. The land on which at least 75% of the new building will be sited must meet the definition of previously developed. Temporary works Undeveloped areas of the site to be used for temporary works (e.g. temporary offices/parking, material/machinery storage) must be considered as development on undeveloped land and therefore included in the calculations unless they have been defined as ‘land of low ecological value’ (Ecological Value and Protection issue, LE3). Developed more than 50 years ago Where a site has been previously developed (more than 50 years ago) but is now considered undeveloped, the credit may only be awarded on this basis if the site is deemed to be “contaminated” as defined in BREEAM issue LE2. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 224 LE1 Reuse of Land BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage 1 Existing site plan, report or site photographs confirming: • Type and duration of previous land use. • Area (m2) of previous land use. Assessor’s building/site inspection or as built drawings confirming: • The footprint or orientation of the developed area has not altered from that confirmed in the design stage evidence. • Where alteration has occurred the % must be re-calculated using ‘as built’ plans. Proposed site plan showing; • Location and footprint (m2) of proposed development and temporary works. Additional Information Relevant definitions Proposed Development: Is defined as the area of any building, hard landscaping, car park and access roads that fall within the boundary of the proposed site. Previously Developed Land: For the purposes of this issue, BREEAM uses the definition from Planning Policy Statement 366 which defines previously developed land as that which is or was occupied by a permanent structure, including the curtilage of the developed land and any associated fixed surface infrastructure. The definition includes: a. Defence buildings The definition excludes: a. Land that is or has been occupied by agricultural or forestry buildings. b. Land that has been developed for minerals extraction or waste disposal by landfill purposes where provision for restoration has been made through development control procedures. c. Land in built-up areas such as parks, recreation grounds and allotments which, although may feature paths, pavilions and other buildings, have not been previously developed. d. Land that was previously developed but where the remains of the permanent structure or fixed surface structure have blended into the landscape in the process of time (to the extent that it can reasonably be considered as part of the natural surroundings). SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID LE2 LE2 Contaminated land Issue Title Contaminated Land No. of credits available 1 225 Minimum standards No Aim To encourage positive action to use contaminated land that otherwise would not have been remediated and developed. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. The site is deemed to be significantly contaminated as confirmed by a contaminated land specialist’s site investigation, risk assessment and appraisal identifying: a. the degree of contamination b. the contaminant sources/types c. the options for remediating sources of pollution which present an unacceptable risk to the site. 2. The client or contractor confirms that remediation of the site will be carried out in accordance with the remediation strategy and its implementation plan. Compliance Notes New Build Refurbishment There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new build projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Extensions to existing buildings There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. Prior Decontamination The credit can only be awarded where remediation has taken place to enable current development of the site for the assessed building, or part of a larger phased development that includes the assessed building (see below). The credit is not achievable for instances where historical remediation and development of the site has occurred outside the scope of the current development proposals. Where a large site has been decontaminated and is then packaged up into smaller plots of land for individual buildings (possibly as part of a phased development strategy), the credit can be awarded regardless of the plot location of the assessed building. This is on the condition that the whole site could not have been developed without remediation work taking place. Contaminated land that has been decontaminated solely for health and safety reasons (rather than for the specific purpose of re-development) does not comply. Large sites split into smaller plots Health and Safetyrelated decontamination Asbestos Where the only decontamination required is for the removal of asbestos within an existing building fabric, this cannot be classified as contaminated land. However, where asbestos is found to be present in the ground this will be classed as contamination for the purposes of assessing this issue. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 226 LE2 Contaminated land BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage 1 A copy of the specialist’s land contamination report confirming: • The degree, type and sources of site contamination. • The options for re-mediating the site. Post Construction Stage The evidence required at the post construction stage is the same as for a design stage assessment. Existing site plan(s) showing: • Location of areas contaminated and to be remediated in relation to any proposed development. 2 A letter from the main contractor or remediation contractor confirming: • The remediation strategy for the site. • Summary details of the implementation plan. If a contractor has not yet been appointed, a letter from the client, or their representative confirming: • That the appointed contractor will undertake necessary remediation works to mitigate the risks identified in the specialist report. A copy of the verification report (or relevant sections of the report) confirming: • Description of remedial works undertaken. • Description of relevant pollution linkages addressed*. * This may not be applicable where the contaminant is a non-native invasive plant species. Additional Information Relevant definitions Contaminant: Is defined as any solid, liquid or gaseous material in, or on the ground to be covered by the building, which is classed as a hazard and therefore presents an unacceptable risk to human health and the environment. The definition also includes land significantly infested by non-native invasive plant species (see below). Significant contamination: For the purposes of this issue, significant contamination is contamination compliant with the above and that, without remediation, development of the site is not possible. Remediation: Activity undertaken to prevent, minimise, remedy or mitigate the risk caused by contaminated land to human health or the environment. Non-native invasive plant species: Are non-indigenous species that adversely affect the habitats they invade economically, environmentally or ecologically. For the purposes of BREEAM this currently includes Japanese Knotweed and Giant Hogweed only. Further information on the control and disposal and how this fits into the legislative framework relating to such species can be obtained from DEFRA. Pollution Linkages: A relevant pollutant linkage is one that has been identified during the risk assessment stage as representing unacceptable risks to human health or the environment. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID LE3 LE3 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features Issue Title Ecological Value of Site and Protection of Ecological Features No. of credits available 1 227 Minimum standards No Aim To encourage development on land that already has limited value to wildlife and to protect existing ecological features from substantial damage during site preparation and completion of construction works. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. Land within the construction zone is defined as ‘land of low ecological value’ using either: a. BREEAM checklist A4 OR b. A suitably qualified ecologist who has identified the land as being of ‘low ecological value’ within an ecological assessment report, based on a site survey. 2. All existing features of ecological value surrounding the construction zone and site boundary area are adequately protected from damage during clearance, site preparation and construction activities as listed below: • • • • Trees of over 100 mm trunk diameter, and/or of significant ecological value, are protected by barriers. Barriers must prohibit construction works in the area between itself and the tree trunk. Minimum distance between tree trunk and barriers must be either the distance of branch spread or half tree height, whichever is the greater. In all cases trees must be protected from direct impact and from severance or asphyxiation of the roots. Hedges and natural areas requiring protection must either have barriers erected and be protected, or, when remote from site works or storage areas, be protected with a prohibition of construction activity in their vicinity. Watercourses and wetland areas are to be protected by cut-off ditches and site drainage to prevent run-off to natural watercourses (as this may cause pollution, silting or erosion). 3. In all cases, the contractor is required to construct ecological protection prior to any preliminary site construction or preparation works (e.g. clearing of the site or erection of temporary site facilities). Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new build projects. Refurbishment A refurbishment of a building (with no new construction), must protect any existing ecological features of value. Protection includes clear exclusion procedures for construction traffic/personnel and material storage, as well as physical barriers. Extensions to Where a refurbishment includes new building work or infrastructure, the land existing on which the new build area and its associated infrastructure (e.g. roads, buildings pavements, car parks etc) will be situated, must comply with the criteria. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 228 LE3 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features CSH assessed dwellings No features of ecological value Use of a suitably qualified ecologist Features of little or no ecological value Removal of features of ecological value Site clearance prior to purchase of the site BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 For buildings with self-contained dwellings also being assessed under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies: This credit can be awarded where the credits for CSH assessment issues Eco 1 and Eco 3 have been achieved. Where the construction zone is defined as ‘land of low ecological value’ and where the surrounding site contains no features of ecological value, this credit can be awarded. Where a suitably qualified ecologist is employed and has, using their professional judgement, defined the site as land of low ecological value, this assessment/judgement overrides any assessment determined using checklist A4. The suitably qualified ecologist must base their findings on data collected from a site visit conducted at appropriate time(s) of the year, when different plant and animal species are evident. The content of the Ecology Report is to be representative of the existing site’s ecology prior to the commencement of initial site preparation works (i.e. before RIBA stage K, construction to practical completion). Where the ecologist has made no on-site visit, the credit cannot be awarded. See additional guidance for definition of a suitably qualified ecologist. If a suitably qualified ecologist has confirmed that a feature has little or no ecological value, or where a tree is deemed to create a significant danger to the public or occupants by a statutory body or qualified arboriculturalist, then that feature may be exempt from the protection of ecological features requirement of this issue. If features of ecological value have been removed as part of site clearance then the development cannot achieve this credit, even if they are to be replaced as part of a new landscaping strategy. For sites that have been cleared more than five years ago, the ecological value of the site would be its present ecological value, on the basis that in the intervening five years, ecological features would have started to re-establish themselves and therefore act as an indicator of the site’s ecological value. For sites that have been cleared less than five years before assessment, a suitably qualified ecologist should make an estimation of the site’s ecological value immediately prior to clearance on the basis of available desktop information (including aerial photography) and the landscape type/area surrounding the site. Where it is not possible for the ecologists to determine that the site was of low ecological value prior to the site clearance then the credit must be withheld. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage 1&2 A completed copy of checklist A4 signed and dated by the client, their representative or a design team member e.g. architect. AND One of the following: SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 Post Construction Stage The evidence required at the post construction stage is the same as for a design stage assessment. BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 LE3 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features 229 A plan and/or site photographs of the existing site highlighting any ecological features OR A copy of the ecologist’s report containing: • Confirmation that the land within the construction zone is of low ecological value. • A description of any ecological features within the site or on the site boundary. • Date(s) of site survey(s). A completed, signed copy of sections A and B of checklist A6 ‘Guidance for relating ecology reports to BREEAM’ to confirm the ecologist’s professional status OR A copy of the ecologist’s report containing the information in sections A and B from the above. 2&3 A copy of the relevant section of the contract specification confirming: • Requirement to protect all identified features of ecological value. • Scope of protection measures required. • Protection measures implemented prior to commencement of site activities. Assessor site inspection report OR ecologist’s report confirming: • The boundary of the site and the construction zone has not been altered. • Where applicable, all existing ecological features still remain. OR All Evidence in line with the Design stage evidence requirements of the CSH Issues Eco 1 and Eco 3 Evidence in line with the Post Construction Stage evidence requirements of the CSH Issues Eco 1 and Eco 3, OR OR A copy of the Design Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH Issues Eco 1 and Eco 3. A copy of the Post Construction Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH Issues Eco 1 and Eco 3. Additional Information Relevant definitions Construction zone: For the purpose of this BREEAM issue the construction zone is defined as any land on the site which is being developed (and therefore disturbed) for buildings, hard standing, landscaping, site access, plus a 3m boundary in either direction around these areas. It also includes any areas used for temporary site storage and buildings. If it is not known exactly where buildings, hard standing, site access and temporary storage will be located it must be assumed that the construction zone is the entire site. Suitably qualified ecologist (SQE): An individual achieving all the following items can be considered to be “suitably qualified” for the purposes of a BREEAM assessment: SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 230 LE3 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 1. Holds a degree or equivalent qualification (e.g. N/SVQ level 5) in ecology or a related subject. 2. Is a practising ecologist, with a minimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five years). Such experience must clearly demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting ecology in relation to construction and the built environment; including, acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations for ecological protection, enhancement and mitigation measures. Examples of relevant experience are: ecological impact assessments; Phase 1 and 2 habitat surveys and habitat restoration. 3. Is covered by a professional code of conduct and subject to peer review. Peer review: Is defined as the process employed by a professional body to demonstrate that potential or current full members maintain a standard of knowledge and experience required to ensure compliance with a code of conduct and professional ethics. Full members of the following organisations, who meet the above criteria, are deemed suitably qualified ecologists for the purposes of BREEAM: • Association of Wildlife Trust Consultancies (AWTC) • Chartered Institution of Water and Environmental Management (CIWEM) • Institute of Ecology and Environmental Management (IEEM) • Institute of Environmental Management and Assessment (IEMA) • Landscape Institute (LI) Where a suitably qualified ecologist is verifying an Ecology Report produced by another ecologist who does not meet the SQE criteria, they must, as a minimum, have read and reviewed the report and confirm in writing that they have found it to: a. represent sound industry practice b. report and recommend correctly, truthfully and objectively c. be appropriate given the local site conditions and scope of works proposed d. avoid invalid, biased and exaggerated statements. Additionally, written confirmation from the third party verifier that they comply with the definition of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist is required. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID LE4 Issue Title Mitigating Ecological Impact LE4 Mitigating ecological impact No. of credits available 231 Minimum standards 2 Yes Aim To minimise the impact of a building development on existing site ecology. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. One credit where the change in ecological value of the site is less than zero and equal to or greater than minus nine plant species i.e. a minimal change. 2. Two credits where the change in ecological value of the site is equal to or greater than zero plant species i.e. no negative change. The change in ecological value of the site is calculated using EITHER of the following: 3. Determine the following information and input this data in to Ecology calculator 1 within the spreadsheet tool: a. Plot type(s) that define the landscape of the assessed site, in its existing pre-developed state and proposed state (see additional guidance) b. Areas (m2) of the defined existing and proposed plot types. OR 4. Where a suitably qualified ecologist has been appointed and, based on a site survey, they confirm the following and the assessor or ecologist inputs this data in to the Ecology calculator 2: a. Actual plot/habitat types that define the landscape of the assessed site in its existing predeveloped state and proposed state b. Area (m2) of each plot/habitat type c. Number of different plant species found within each plot type. Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new build projects. Refurbishment There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Extensions to existing buildings There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. Refer also to the note below on infill developments. CSH assessed dwellings For buildings with self-contained dwellings also being assessed using the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies: The number of credits achieved under the CSH assessment of issue Eco 4 cannot be directly applied to this issue due to the difference in number of SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 232 LE4 Mitigating ecological impact Completing Ecology Calculator 1 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 credits available and respective benchmarks. However, the data/information and output used in CSH assessment to calculate the change in ecological value can be used to determine the number of credits for this BREEAM issue (and vice-versa, BREEAM to CSH), provided compliance with all requirements of the CSH technical guide is met. First, define the landscape type (based on the typology of the surrounding sites, Table 18 General Landscape Types). This category is unlikely to change through the development, although it may in some cases, e.g. when a disused site is developed as part of a master plan for a large multi-use or multi-building development/regeneration project. Then, define and calculate the area (m2) of each vegetation-plot type ( Table 19 Vegetation Plot Types) and building or hard landscaped area, both before and after development, for the site. Once the data is entered, the Ecology Calculator 1 will indicate the indicative change in ecological value. The result must be used to award the credits. Number of plant species BREEAM measures ecological value using number of plant species. The plant species figures for each land type are programmed into the Ecology Calculator tool 1. These figures are based on national figures from the Countryside Survey prepared for the Digest of Environmental Statistics67 (see Table 20 Number of plant species by plot for different landscape types). Where an ecologist has been appointed actual number of plant species (before and after construction), based on the ecologists site survey should be used to determine the change in ecological value. Wildlife garden planting In the ‘change of ecological value’ table, ‘garden planting (typical)’ and ‘wildlife garden planting’ will always record a score of zero, unless a suitably qualified ecologist has been appointed: whereby they will make the distinction between ‘typical’ and ‘wildlife’ garden planting species and record ‘actual’ species numbers. Derelict Sites The ecological value of derelict sites is time dependent (Table 20 Number of plant species by plot for different landscape types); a linear scale has been used to determine intermediate values between zero ecological value at 1 year from dereliction/demolition to a value at 30 years based on marginal upland figures. This presents a worst case figure which can be amended on the advice of a suitably qualified ecologist. Where the assessment is of a single building that forms part of a larger site development and the landscaping and ecological features form a common part of the whole site, for the purpose of assessing this issue the plot types and areas for the entire site must be used. Assessment of a single development on a larger site Infill developments on existing occupied site Site clearance prior to purchase of the site Green Roofs Where a development is an infill (or new building) on an existing occupied site, then the construction zone for the new building would be the area of site assessed for the purposes of this issue. Refer to the compliance note in LE3 on this issue. The contribution of species from a Green roof can only be incorporated where a suitably qualified ecologist has been appointed. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 LE4 Mitigating ecological impact 233 Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage First & Second Credit 1,2 & 3 Existing and proposed site plans and, if required, maps and aerial photographs confirming: • Landscape and vegetation plot types • Area (m2) of vegetation plot types AND 1,2 & 4 A completed copy of Ecology Calculator 1. A copy of the suitably qualified ecologist’s report confirming prior to and after the development: • Landscape and vegetation plot types • Area (m2) of vegetation plot types The evidence required at the post construction stage is the same as for a design stage assessment. Plus: Assessor’s/ecologist’s building/site inspection confirming: • Post construction vegetation plot types and areas are in accordance with design stage evidence. AND A completed, signed copy of checklist A6 – Relating ecology reports to BREEAM OR a copy of the ecology report containing the information outlined in checklist A6. AND A completed copy of Ecology Calculator 2. OR 1,2,3 &4 Evidence in line with the Design Stage evidence requirements of the CSH Issue Eco 4 confirming the change in ecological value. Evidence in line with the Post Construction Stage evidence requirements of the CSH Issue Eco 4 confirming the change in ecological value. Additional Information Relevant Definitions Construction zone: As defined for issue LE3 – Ecological Value of site AND Protection of ecological features Suitably qualified ecologist (SQE): As defined for issue LE3 – Ecological Value of site AND Protection of ecological features SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 234 LE4 Mitigating ecological impact BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Table 18 General Landscape Types Pastoral Mainly grasslands. Arable Land dominated by cereals and other arable crops, as well as intensively managed grasslands. Marginal Upland Areas which are on the periphery of the uplands, and which are dominated by mixtures of low intensity agriculture, forestry and seminatural vegetation. Upland Land generally above a height suitable for mechanised farming and frequently dominated by semi-natural vegetation. Building & Derelict Land Land currently or previously occupied by buildings. Urban Mosaic A complex mix of habitats located within cities, towns, or villages, which will include; buildings, hard standing, pockets of disused land and scrub, and areas of managed green spaces, such as gardens, allotments, and parkland. Parklands can be characterised as being accessible to the public and will usually be fairly intensively managed spaces, consisting of a matrix of grassland (grazed or mown) with scattered trees at various densities and areas of dense planting. This landscape type is to be used only when no other landscape type in the table is more appropriate / predominates. Table 19 Vegetation Plot Types Crops/weeds Mostly highly disturbed vegetation of arable fields and their boundaries; includes cereal and vegetable crops. Tall grassland/herb Typical vegetation of overgrown lowland field boundaries, ditches and roadside verges. Fertile grass The bulk of agriculturally improved grasslands, intensive pasture and silage crops; but also includes mown areas of improved grasslands for recreational and amenity purposes, as well as re-sown roadside verges. Infertile grass A diverse group of semi-improved and semi-natural grasslands; includes acidic to basic, wet to dry grasslands, and tall-herb vegetation mainly present in the lowlands; often found on stream sides and roadside verges. Lowland wooded Includes wooded vegetation of hedges and broadleaved woods in the lowlands. Upland wooded A varied group of acidic vegetation types usually associated with upland woods, including: semi-natural woodland; conifer plantations; bracken and wooded streamsides. Moorland grass/mosaic Typically grazed moorland vegetation, including extensive upland acidic and peaty grassland, and species-rich but very localised flushes. Heath/bog Mostly heather moorland, blanket bog and montane heath, but also lowland heath and raised bog. Wildlife garden planting Garden planting that uses native species and/or those that have a known attraction or benefit to local fauna, based on the advice of a suitably qualified ecologist. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 LE4 Mitigating ecological impact 235 Table 20 Number of plant species by plot for different landscape types Landscape Types Upland Existing Building/Hard Landscaped Areas Urban Mosaic Derelict Land <1 Years Derelict Land < 10 Years Derelict Land < 20 Years Derelict Land <= 30 Years Arable Pastural Marginal Upland Crop Weeds 5.4 8.3 - - - - - - - - Tall Grassland/Herb 12.7 15.0 - - - 17.6 0 6.3 15.8 21.1 Fertile Grassland 11.6 12.7 15.3 - - 11.6 0 4.6 11.5 15.3 Infertile Grassland 17.1 17.6 21.1 - - 17.6 0 6.3 15.8 21.1 Lowland Wooded 12.9 12.5 - - 0 13.8 - - - - Upland Wooded - 12.7 13.8 20.4 0 13.8 - - - - Moorland Grass/Mosaic - 2.0 20.4 21.0 - - - - - - Heath/Bog - - 14.3 20.0 - - - - - - Hard Landscaping 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Buildings 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Garden Planting (typical) - - - - 0 0 0 0 0 0 Wildlife Garden Planting* - - - - 0 0 0 0 0 0 Types of Plot - Insufficient data to produce national averages, as not all vegetation plot types are found in all landscaped types. * Only where the rule concerning wildlife garden planting in Table 19 Vegetation Plot Types has been met can actual species values be used. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 236 LE4 Mitigating ecological impact BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Calculating the change and increase in ecological value BREEAM calculates the change in ecological value by comparing the diversity (number and area) of plant species on the site pre and post construction. The ecological value of the site is expressed as an area-weighted average of plant species for the site’s landscape type. This enables BREEAM to use this as an indicator of the proposed development’s impact on the site’s existing ecological value. A simple example of the calculation is outlined below. 1. Calculate the ecological value of a previously developed existing site: A 2065m2 existing site consists of the following types of land: a. 1865 m2 hard landscaping = 0 species b. 200m2 urban mosaic - infertile grassland = 17.6 species (Table 20 Number of plant species by plot for different landscape types). The ecological value of the existing site is calculated as follows, for each plot type; • Number of species on plot type x plot type area as % of total area. Therefore, for our example site: a. Hard landscaping: {(0 species x (1865m2/2065m2)} = 0 species b. urban mosaic-infertile grassland: {(17.6 species x (200m2/2065m2)} = 1.70 species c. Ecological value of the existing site = 0 + 1.70 = 1.70 species 2. Calculate the ecological value of the proposed site: The 2065m2 post-construction site consists of the following types of land: a. 1375m2 of building = 0 species. b. 550m2 of hard landscaping = 0 species c. 140 m2 has remained as urban mosaic-infertile grassland = 17.6 species The ecological value of the proposed site is as follows: a. b. c. d. Building: {(0 species x (1375m2/2065m2)} = 0 species Hard landscaping: {(0 species x (550m2/2065m2)} = 0 species Urban mosaic-infertile grassland: {(17.6 species x (140m2/2065m2)} = 1.19 species Ecological value of the proposed site = 0 + 0 + 1.19 = 1.19 species The ecological impact is the difference between the two ecological values: Change in ecological value: 1.19 – 1.70 = - 0.51 species Therefore, for this example 1 credit is achieved. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID LE5 LE5 Enhancing site ecology No. of credits available Issue Title Enhancing Site Ecology 3 237 Minimum standards No Aim To recognise and encourage actions taken to maintain and enhance the ecological value of the site as a result of development. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: First credit 1. A suitably qualified ecologist (SQE) has been appointed to report on enhancing and protecting the ecology of the site and: a. The SQE provides an Ecology Report with appropriate recommendations for protection and enhancement of the site’s ecology. b. The report is based on a site visit/survey by the SQE prior to the commencement of initial site preparation works. 2. The general recommendations of the Ecology Report for enhancement and protection of site ecology have been, or will be, implemented. Second credit 1. The first credit is achieved. 2. The recommendations of the Ecology Report for enhancement and protection of site ecology have been implemented, and the suitably qualified ecologist confirms that this will result in an increase in ecological value of the site up to (but not including) 6 plant species. 3. The increase in plant species has been calculated using Ecology calculator 2, using actual species numbers. Third credit 1. The first credit is achieved. 2. The recommendations of the Ecology Report for enhancement and protection of site ecology have been implemented, and the suitably qualified ecologist confirms that this will result in an increase in ecological value of the site of 6 plant species or greater. 3. The increase in plant species has been calculated using Ecology calculator 2, using actual species numbers. Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new build projects. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 238 LE5 Enhancing site ecology Refurbishment BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Extensions to existing buildings There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. CSH assessed dwellings For buildings with self-contained dwellings also being assessed using the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies: The number of credits achieved under the CSH assessment of issue Eco 4 cannot be directly applied to this issue due to the difference in number of credits available and respective benchmarks. However, the data/information and output used in CSH assessment to calculate the change in ecological value can be used to determine compliance with the second and third credits of this BREEAM issue (and vice-versa, BREEAM to CSH, provided compliance with all requirements of the CSH technical guide is met). Timing of Ecologist Report It is recommended that the suitably qualified ecologist is appointed to carry out site surveys of existing site ecology, on which their report is based, or to provide verification where the report is prepared by others, at the design brief stage (RIBA Stage B or equivalent) in order to facilitate and maximise potential ecological enhancement. General recommendations ‘General’ recommendations for enhancing and protecting the ecological value of the site are to include, and go beyond, compliance criteria for all current EU and UK legislation relating to protected species and habitats. These ‘general’ recommendations may recommendations as detailed in the definitions. include ecological Guidance for ecologists and assessors Please refer to Checklist A6 – Relating ecology reports to BREEAM, section D for assistance in assessing and interpreting the assessment criteria for this BREEAM issue. Plant species Only native floral/plant species, and/or those contributing to a local or UK Biodiversity Action Plan or those with a known attraction or benefit to local fauna can be considered for the purpose of increasing the number of species on site, as well as general enhancement. The Natural History Museum has an online Postcode Plants Database which generates lists of native plants and wildlife for any specified postal district in the UK. http://www.nhm.ac.uk/nature-online/life/plantsfungi/postcode-plants/index.html No ecological survey completed or construction works have commenced Where it is not possible to determine ‘actual’ number of species per vegetation plot type, either because an on-site ecological survey has not been conducted, or, because construction works have already commenced, the second and third credits cannot be achieved. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 LE5 Enhancing site ecology 239 Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage A copy of the ecologist’s report containing: • Details and scope of the site survey. • Information as outlined in checklist A6 – Relating ecology reports to BREEAM. The evidence required at the post construction stage is the same as for a design stage assessment. First Credit 1 OR A copy of the ecologist’s report containing a completed, signed copy of checklist A6. 2 Proposed site plan highlighting implementation of the ecologist enhancement recommendations. Assessor site inspection report and photographic evidence confirming that the ecologist’s recommendations have been implemented. AND One of the following: A copy of the relevant section of the specification requiring the main contractor to implement the SQE’s recommendations for protection and enhancement For large mixed-use/multi-building developments, where the whole site has not been completed and ecological enhancements have not been added, or where features are being added at a later date in an appropriate planting season: • OR A letter from the client or design team member confirming: • That the specification will require the main contractor to implement the ecologist’s recommendations. Second & Third Credit 1-3 Evidence as outlined above, compliance with the first credit. confirming A copy of the SQE’s report containing the information outlined in checklist A6 – Relating ecology reports to BREEAM. OR A copy of the SQE’s report containing a completed, signed copy of checklist A6. AND A copy of the contract/specification or a letter from the main contractor confirming when the planting will be complete. This must be within 18 months from completion of the development. Evidence (as outlined above) confirming compliance with the first credit. AND if relevant Evidence in line with the Design stage evidence requirements of the CSH Issues Eco 4. OR A copy of the Design Stage CSH certificate and CSH compliance report confirming the change in ecological value for the site. A completed copy of Ecology Calculator 2. AND if relevant Evidence in line with the Design stage evidence requirements of the CSH Issues Eco SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 240 LE5 Enhancing site ecology BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 4. OR A copy of the Design Stage CSH certificate and CSH compliance report confirming the change in ecological value for the site. Additional Information Relevant Definitions Suitably qualified ecologist (SQE): As defined for BREEAM Issue LE3. Ecological recommendations are defined as measures adopted to enhance the ecology of the site, which may include: • The planting of native species or those with a known attraction or benefit to local wildlife • The adoption of horticultural good practice (e.g. no, or low, use of residual pesticides) • The installation of bird, bat and/or insect boxes at appropriate locations on the site • Development of a full Biodiversity Management Plan including avoiding clearance/works at key times of the year (e.g. breeding seasons) • The proper integration, design and maintenance of SUDs and Green Roofs, community orchards etc. Only native floral species or those with a known attraction or benefit to local wildlife can be considered for the purpose of enhancing the ecological value of the site. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID LE6 Issue Title Long Term Impact on Biodiversity LE6 Long term impact on biodiversity No. of credits available 2 241 Minimum standards No Aim To minimise the long term impact of the development on the site’s, and surrounding area’s, biodiversity. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: One credit can be awarded where there is a commitment to achieve the mandatory criteria and at least two of the additional criteria (listed below). Two credits can be awarded where there is a commitment to achieve the mandatory criteria and at least four of the additional criteria (listed below). Mandatory Criteria 1. A suitably qualified ecologist (SQE) has been appointed prior to commencement of activities on site. 2. The suitably qualified ecologist confirms that all relevant UK and EU legislation relating to protection and enhancement of ecology has been complied with during the design and construction process. 3. A landscape and habitat management plan, appropriate to the site, is produced covering at least the first five years after project completion. This is to be handed over to the building occupants and includes: • • • Management of any protected features on site Management of any new, existing or enhanced habitats A reference to the current or future site level or local Biodiversity Action Plan. Additional Criteria 1. The contractor nominates a ‘Biodiversity Champion’ with the authority to influence site activities and ensure that detrimental impacts on site biodiversity are minimised in line with the recommendations of a suitably qualified ecologist. 2. The contractor trains the site workforce on how to protect site ecology during the project. Specific training should be carried out for the entire site workforce to ensure they are aware of how to avoid damaging site ecology. Training should be based on the findings and recommendations for protection of ecological features highlighted within a report prepared by a suitably qualified ecologist. 3. The contractor records actions taken to protect biodiversity and monitor their effectiveness throughout key stages of construction. The requirement commits the contractor to make such records available where publicly requested. 4. Where a new ecologically valuable habitat, appropriate to the local area, is created. This includes habitat that supports nationally, regionally or locally important biodiversity, and/or which is SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 242 LE6 Long term impact on biodiversity BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 nationally, regionally or locally important itself; including any habitat listed in the UK Biodiversity Action Plan (UK BAP)68, Local Biodiversity Action Plan (LBAP), those protected within statutory sites (e.g. SSSIs), or those within non-statutory sites identified in local plans. 5. Where flora and/or fauna habitats exist on site, the contractor programmes site works to minimise disturbance to wildlife. For example, site preparation, ground works, and landscaping have been, or will be, scheduled at an appropriate time of year to minimise disturbance to wildlife. Timing of works may have a significant impact on, for example, breeding birds, flowering plants, seed germination, amphibians etc. Actions such as phased clearance of vegetation may help to mitigate ecological impacts. This additional requirement will be achieved where a clear plan has been produced detailing how activities will be timed to avoid any impact on site biodiversity in line with the recommendations of a suitably qualified ecologist. Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new build projects. Refurbishment There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the assessment of refurbished buildings (unless the building is listed – see below). Extensions to There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to existing the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. buildings Refurbishment of The refurbishment of a listed building may be exempt from the assessment listed buildings criteria if they conflict with the need to maintain the building’s listed features, or are counter to the conservation criteria. Confirmation is required from a suitably qualified ecologist that all possible criteria/enhancements have been achieved before the credit can be awarded (i.e. if no suitably qualified ecologist has been appointed then this credit cannot be awarded). Biodiversity A Biodiversity Champion does not have to be an ecologist or ecological expert Champion but must have sufficient authority and time on site to influence activities and ensure that they have minimal detrimental impact on biodiversity. Local Local biodiversity expertise should be sought at, or before, the design stage to biodiversity help identify species of local biodiversity importance on site. It is likely that expertise their recommendations will draw on the Local Biodiversity Action Plan (LBAP) where one exists. The site and The steps taken in the above criteria will depend on the nature of the site, e.g. surrounding urban sites, and the surrounding areas. It is likely that either all, or none, of the areas optional items will apply. Where the optional items and the mandatory item 3, the management plan, are deemed, in writing, by the appointed suitably qualified ecologist not to be applicable, all credits can be awarded. Mandatory items 1 and 2 must be met in all instances. Sites of no ecological value This is likely to be the case in the majority of assessments in central town/city areas which have a high proportion of surrounding and existing development and no existing external landscaped areas within the boundary of the assessed site. Where a site is deemed to have no ecological value, it is still necessary to employ a suitably qualified ecologist to achieve this credit. The ecologist must confirm that all the mandatory items (1), (2) and (3) have been achieved and provide guidance on how to achieve optional item (4). Note that in such cases, mandatory item (1) and additional requirement (4) is likely to be applicable in relation to any ecological enhancements (e.g. green roofs, bird boxes, etc.) adopted in order to achieve the Enhancing Site Ecology issue (LE5). SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Not all additional items are applicable LE6 Long term impact on biodiversity 243 Where the SQE confirms that not all additional items are applicable to the development, for example it is a city centre refurbishment on a confined site with no external areas, then the credits can be awarded accordingly: No. applicabl e items 1 item 2 items 3 items No. of BREEAM credits One credit Two credits One credit Two credits One credit Two credits 4 items One credit Two credits Criteria Meet mandatory reqs. plus applicable item Meet mandatory reqs. plus all applicable items Meet mandatory reqs. plus 2 applicable items Meet mandatory reqs. plus all applicable items Meet mandatory reqs. plus 2 applicable items Meet mandatory reqs. plus all applicable items Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage The SQE report or letter confirming: • That they were appointed prior to commencement of activities on site. • All relevant UK and EU legislations will be complied with. A letter from the SQE confirming: • That all relevant UK and EU legislation relating to protection and enhancement of ecology has been complied with. Mandatory Criteria 1&2 AND A completed, signed copy of checklist A6 – Relating ecology reports to BREEAM OR A copy of ecology report containing the information outlined in checklist A6. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 244 LE6 Long term impact on biodiversity 3 A copy of the site management plan. BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 A copy of the site’s landscape and habitat management plan. OR A copy of the specification requiring the development of plan and outlining the scope of its content. OR Where the timing of assessment does not permit either of the above, a letter from the client confirming: • A commitment to produce a management plan • The scope of the management plan Additional Criteria 1 A letter from the contractor confirming: • The appointment of the biodiversity champion and their job title. • Their on site role and responsibilities. OR A copy of the relevant sections of the site log book, highlighting: • Details of any action/events taken by the biodiversity champion. If no actions required/taken, this should be confirmed in the log book. Where not yet appointed, a copy of the specification clause requiring the appointment of a biodiversity champion. 2 Training schedule or letter of confirmation from the contractor committing to provide relevant training. OR A record of training undertaken by the site workforce confirming: • Who delivered & developed the training • The scope of the training delivered. Where not yet appointed, a copy of the specification clause requiring the training of the site’s workforce. 3 A letter from the contractor confirming: • Monitoring and reporting criteria for the development. • The records will be publicly available if and when requested. A copy of the relevant sections of the site log book, highlighting: • Records of monitoring and actions taken to protect biodiversity. • Records and outcome of any requests to view such information. OR Where not yet appointed, a copy of the specification clause outlining the contractor’s monitoring and reporting criteria. 4 A copy of the proposed site plan highlighting the new ecologically valuable habitat. A SQE’s report or letter confirming that the habitat supports the relevant biodiversity action plan(s) SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 Assessor’s (or SQE’s) site inspection report and photographic evidence confirming the existence of the proposed habitat. BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 5 The SQE’s report or letter confirming: • Wildlife on site that needs to be accounted for in programming works. • Actions required with respect to programming site works to minimise disturbance. LE6 Long term impact on biodiversity 245 A letter from the SQE, or a copy of their report confirming: • Site works executed in a manner that minimised disturbance to wildlife in accordance with their recommendations. A copy of the contractor’s main programme of works. OR A copy of the relevant section of the main contract confirming: • The programme of site works will minimise disturbance to wildlife in accordance with SQE’s recommendations. Additional Information Relevant definitions Suitably qualified ecologist (SQE): As defined for Issue LE3 – Ecological Value of site AND Protection of ecological features Biodiversity: Is defined as the variety of life on earth. It includes all species, animal, plants, fungi, algae, bacteria and the habitats that they depend upon. Biodiversity Action Plan: A plan which sets specific, measurable, achievable, realistic and time bound conservation targets for species and habitats. The UKBAP website www.ukbap.org supports the implementation of the UK Biodiversity Action Plan (UK BAP) on behalf of the UK Biodiversity Partnership and the UK Government. Steps to produce a BAP are outlined in the UK Business and Biodiversity Resource Centre website, hosted by Earthwatch Institute Europe http://www.businessandbiodiversity.org under ‘your sector’ SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 246 Pol 1 Refrigerant GWP – Building services BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 12.0 Pollution Issue ID Pol 1 Issue Title Refrigerant GWP – Building Services No. of credits available 1 Minimum standards No Aim To reduce the contribution to climate change from refrigerants with a high global warming potential. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. The building has no refrigerants OR 2. The refrigerants used within the building services have a GWP less than 5. Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new build projects. Refurbishment There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Extensions to If the extended and existing building share the same building services, then existing these services must be assessed against the criteria regardless of whether the buildings existing building forms a part of the assessment or not. If the extension is served by independent services, only these need be assessed against the Assessment Criteria. Solid refrigerant The credit can be awarded by default where a solid refrigerant is used. Refrigerant charge less than 5kg The credit can be awarded where the total refrigerant charge used in the building services is less than 5kg. Multiple split units In the case of multiple split units, through-the-wall or other packaged units, the credit can be awarded where the total collective refrigerant charge is less than 5kg. If the total collective refrigerant charge in such systems is greater than 5kg, then the refrigerant(s) must comply with the BREEAM criteria. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Office server and comms rooms Pol 1 Refrigerant GWP – Building services 247 Refrigerants used in services for typical office server and comms rooms cannot be excluded from the assessment. Where air conditioning equipment is provided, the equipment may not be able to achieve this credit as smaller systems often require refrigerants with a GWP > 5. In this instance the credit cannot be awarded by default as there are alternatives for designers to consider. These alternatives include revisiting the design and the room conditions specification to see if the cooling equipment is necessary. In addition, whilst a manufacturer or supplier may specify a narrow temperature band for server equipment, acceptable limits detailed in ASHRAE guidance69 may allow a greater temperature range without adverse effect and thus the cooling equipment may not be necessary. GWP data not available Where GWP data for the specified refrigerant is not available, the credit cannot be awarded on a default basis. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage 1&2 A copy of the specification clause confirming either: • Absence of refrigerant in the development OR • Type(s) of refrigerant to be used. Assessor’s building/site inspection and as built drawings confirming: • Presence or absence of any refrigeration plant. OR AND • Manufacturer’s information confirming: • GWP of each refrigerant. A letter from the design team/developer confirming: - The refrigerant type specified remained unchanged. OR Where a change has occurred, written confirmation from the design team confirming: • Type of refrigerant(s) used. AND Manufacturer’s information confirming: • GWP of each refrigerant. Additional Information Global Warming Potential: GWP is defined as the potential for global warming that a chemical has relative to 1 unit of carbon dioxide, the primary greenhouse gas. In determining the GWP of the blowing agent, the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) methodology using a 100-year Integrated Time Horizon (or ITH) should be applied. Ozone Depleting Potential: ODP is the ratio of the relative amount of degradation to the ozone layer caused by a particular substance relative to the calculated depletion for the reference gas CFC 11 (ODP = 1.0). The ODP of the refrigerants is not assessed under this issue and there is no link between GWP and ODP. Refrigerant: there are three main make-ups of refrigerants: SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 248 • • • Pol 1 Refrigerant GWP – Building services BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Hydrogenated Fluorocarbon Refrigerants (HFCs) are made up of hydrogen, fluorine, and carbon. Because they do not use a chlorine atom (which is used in most refrigerants) they are known to be one of the least damaging to our ozone. Hydrogenated Chlorofluorocarbon Refrigerants (HCFCs) are made up of hydrogen, chlorine, fluorine, and carbon. These refrigerants contain minimal amounts of chlorine; they are not as detrimental to the environment as some other refrigerants. Chlorofluorocarbon Refrigerants (CFCs) contain chlorine, fluorine and carbon. These refrigerants carry high amounts of chlorine so they are known for being the most hazardous to the ozone layer. Table of refrigerants and their Global Warming Potentials: the table below includes available substances which are capable of acting as refrigerants. Many are not currently used as such and some have been phased out and withdrawn from the market. Table 21 Refrigerant GWP Refrigerant type GWP Refrigerant type GWP R11 (CFC-11) * 4000 R32 (HCFC-32) * 580 R12 (CFC-12) * 8500 R407C (HFC-407) 1600 R113 (CFC-113) * 5000 R152a (HFC-152a) 140 R114 (CFC-114) * 9300 R404A (HFC blend) 3800 R115 (CFC-115)* 9300 R410A (HFC blend) 1900 R125 (HFC-125) 3200 R413A (HFC blend) 1770 Halon-1211 N/A R417A (HFC blend) 1950 Halon-1301 5600 R500 (CFC/HFC) * 6300 Halon-2402 N/A R502 (HCFC/CFC) * 5600 Ammonia 0 R507 (HFC azeotrope) 3800 R22 (HCFC-22) * 1700 R290 (HC290 propane) 3 R123 (HCFC-123) * 93 R600 (HC600 butane) 3 R134a(HFC-134a) 1300 R600a (HC600a isobutane) 3 R124 (HCFC-124) * 480 R290/R170(HC290/HC170) 3 R141b (HCFC-141b) * 630 R1270 (HC1270 propene) 3 R142b (HCFC-142b) * 2000 R143a (HFC-143a) 4400 N/A Indicates that there is insufficient data available to give a GWP value. • Global warming potential (GWP) values are based on best available data at the time of writing and are based on a 100-year time horizon. Other published data may be based on different time horizons. • All CFC/HCFC refrigerants (marked *) have an ODP > 0 and as such are illegal for new installations. Existing equipment may continue to use them at present. The use of CFCs and HCFCs as refrigerants has been addressed under the Montreal protocols. Phase out programmes have been agreed resulting in these substances no longer being used as refrigerants in all new build and most existing situations. The industry’s favoured replacements are currently HFCs which are often potent global warming contributors. • Whilst it is currently still legal to have an existing system that uses refrigerants with an ozone depleting potential, it is now illegal to top up with CFCs (either new or recycled refrigerant). It will be illegal to top up with new HCFCs from 2010, and it will be illegal to top up with recycled/recovered HCFCs from 2015. • Hydrocarbons and ammonia-based refrigerants have low or zero GWP and are therefore preferred long-term options. These are now widely available and are valid alternatives to HFCs in all buildings, provided health and safety issues are fully addressed. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Pol 2 Issue Title Preventing Refrigerant Leaks Pol 2 Preventing refrigerant leaks No. of credits available 2 249 Minimum standards No Aim To reduce the emissions of refrigerants to the atmosphere arising from leakages in cooling plant. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: First Credit - Refrigerant leak detection 1. The building has no refrigerants OR 2. Systems using refrigerants are contained in a moderately air tight enclosure (or a mechanically ventilated plant room), and a refrigerant leak detection system is installed covering high-risk parts of the plant. OR 3. An automatic permanent refrigerant leak detection system is specified, which is NOT based on the principle of detecting or measuring the concentration of refrigerant in air. Second Credit4 - Refrigerant recovery system 4. The automatic shutdown and pump down of refrigerant occurs on the detection of high concentrations of refrigerant in the plant room/enclosure. For the majority of cases only systems in mechanically ventilated/moderately air tight plant rooms (or enclosures) comply. 5. Automatic pump-down to either a separate storage tank or into the heat exchanger is acceptable but only where automatic isolation valves are fitted to contain the refrigerant once fully pumped down. 6. The alarm threshold that triggers automatic pump down is set to a maximum of 2000ppm (0.2%), but lower levels can be set. The credit cannot be awarded for manual systems. Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new build projects. Refurbishment There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Extensions to Where an existing building is being extended and it has existing building existing services plant and systems that will be common to both the new extension and buildings existing building, the existing plant must be assessed against the criteria of this issue. If the extension is served by independent services, only these need be assessed against the Assessment Criteria. 4 The first credit must be achieved in order to award the second credit. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 250 Pol 2 Preventing refrigerant leaks BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Type of refrigerant This issue is applied in instances where any type of refrigerant is present, i.e. even if the ozone depleting potential (ODP) of the refrigerant is zero and the global warming potential (GWP) is less than 5. Solid refrigerant The credit(s) can be awarded by default where a solid refrigerant is used. CO2 as a refrigerant Where CO2 is used as a refrigerant, the refrigerant recovery system credit/requirements can be awarded/met without the need for a recovery system, provided that the design team confirm the system/installation requirements of BS EN 378:200870 and the Institute of Refrigeration Carbon Dioxide as a Refrigeration Code of Practice71 is complied with. Where Ammonia is used as a refrigerant, the refrigerant recovery system credit/requirements can be awarded/met without the need for a recovery system, provided that the design team confirm the system/installation requirements of BS EN 378:200870 and the Institute of Refrigeration Ammonia Refrigeration Systems Code of Practice72 is complied with. The credit(s) can be awarded by default where the total refrigerant charge used in the building is less than 5kg. Ammonia as a refrigerant Total refrigerant charge less than 5 kg Multiple split systems High-risk parts Manual refrigerant recovery system For installations of small multiple hermetic systems only, where the refrigerant charge in each unit is less than 5kg but the total refrigerant charge in the building is greater than 5kg, the credit(s) can be awarded by default. This is on the basis that the risk of a large refrigerant leak is minimised and individual leaks from each system will be small i.e. <5kg. High-risk parts of refrigeration plant typically include the pipe work and compressor. Evaporator or condenser coils can be omitted from the coverage of the system. The provision of any manual system, including manual storage cylinders on site, does not comply with the criteria of this issue. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage 1 A copy of the specification clause or design plan confirming: • Absence of refrigerants in the development. Assessor’s building/site inspection photographic evidence confirming: • Absence of refrigeration plant. 2&3 A copy of the specification clause or letter from the M&E engineer confirming: • Type of leak detection system(s). • Scope of the system(s) • Where relevant, containment strategy for such equipment. 4,5&6 A copy of the specification clause or letter from the M&E engineer confirming: • Type, scope and operation of automatic refrigerant recovery equipment • Details of the plant room enclosure where the refrigeration plant is installed • Alarm threshold for triggering automatic pump down. Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence confirming: • Installation of leak detection system(s) • Installation of automatic refrigerant recovery equipment • Pre-set threshold level for automatic pump down. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 Post Construction Stage and BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Pol 2 Preventing refrigerant leaks 251 Additional Information Relevant definitions Moderately airtight enclosure: this can be defined as an enclosure that does not produce a draught or significant fresh air ingress that would dilute any leaked refrigerant gas (dilution may prevent detection). Refrigerant Leak Detection: a permanently installed multi-point sensing system; this may be aspirated or have multiple sensor heads linked to a central alarm unit or BMS. Various sensor types are available including infra-red, semi-conductor or electro-chemical. Please see below for further guidance on the coverage of refrigerant leak detection systems. Refrigerant Recovery: The process of removing refrigerant from a system and storing it in an airtight container. Leak detection systems/devices • Handheld detectors (which include semi-conductor and corona discharge types) do not comply with BREEAM criteria. • Corona discharge detectors are not suitable where flammable refrigerants are used, or in potentially explosive atmospheres. • Indicator dyes: these consist of fluorescent or coloured dyes added to the refrigerant to show leakage sites. The use of the dye should be approved by the compressor manufacturer. Some compressor manufacturers do not approve the use of indicator dyes, in which case either an alternative type of equipment should be used, or an alternative type of leak detection specified. • Halide torch detectors: this type of detection is only appropriate for chlorine-based substances such as CFCs and HCFCs, and should not be used in areas where naked flames are prohibited. Compounds which do not contain chlorine, e.g. HFCs, cannot be detected by this method. When awarding this credit in instances where these detectors are in use, the assessor should confirm that the refrigerant is chlorine based. • Electronic leak detectors: these must be designed to detect a certain type of, or multiple types of, refrigerant, i.e. CFC, HFC, HCFC, etc. • Standing hold test: systems based on monitoring pressure drops within the pipe work are not necessarily compliant with the BREEAM criteria. There are natural fluctuations to the pressure of the refrigerant due to changes in volume and temperature of the system, and to the ambient temperature of the surroundings. Low pressure and high pressure switches, which are standard equipment on refrigerant plant, are therefore not sufficient to award the credit. Other methods exist, such as pressurising the system with a high pressure, dry nitrogen gas for a period of time and then identify whether or not the pressure drops during this time. However, this requires systems to be shut down for a period of time (usually overnight or longer). • Systems NOT based on the principle of detecting or measuring the concentration of refrigerant in air: Such systems (for example based on sensing the presence of refrigerant vapour in liquidcarrying pipes) are now commercially available. Refrigerant pump down The specification of automatic refrigerant pump down can further limit potential losses and damage to the environment and have subsequent economic benefits to the building owner. Under the United Kingdom 1990 Environmental Protection Act unwanted refrigerant and refrigerating system oil are classified as either controlled or hazardous waste. Not only is it an offence to discharge them to the environment, but there are procedures regarding transport, storage, transfer of ownership and ultimate disposal. Article 16 of EC regulation 2037/2000 specifies that used CFCs and HCFCs must be recovered for destruction or recycling/reclamation. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 252 Pol 3 Refrigerant GWP – Cold storage Issue ID Pol 3 Issue Title Refrigerant GWP – Cold Storage Issue not assessed under this scheme. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available 1 Minimum standards No BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID Pol 4 Issue Title NOx emissions from heating source Pol 4 NO x emissions from heating source No. of credits available 253 Minimum standards 3 No Aim To encourage the supply of heat from a system that minimises NO x emissions, and therefore reduces pollution of the local environment. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. Where manufacturer’s details demonstrate that the plant installed to meet the building’s space heating demand has dry NOx emission levels as follows: a. One credit where the dry NOx emissions from delivered space heating energy are ≤100 mg/kWh (at 0% excess O2). b. Two credits where the dry NOx emissions from delivered space heating energy are ≤70 mg/kWh (at 0% excess O2). c. Three credits where the dry NOx emissions from delivered space heating energy are ≤40mg/kWh (at 0% excess O2). The emissions should be estimated under normal operating conditions (not standby). Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new build projects. Refurbishment If the heating demand for the refurbished building is being met by an existing system, then the NOx emission level for the existing system must be assessed against the criteria of this issue. Extensions to The rule above for refurbishment projects also applies to new build extensions existing to existing buildings. buildings CSH assessed For buildings with self-contained dwellings also being assessed under the dwellings Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies: If the heating system, and therefore NOx emissions, used to demonstrate compliance in the CSH assessment for the self contained dwellings, is of the same specification as that used to provide heating for the other residential/communal areas of the building, the credits achieved, and information demonstrating compliance for CSH issue Pol 2 can be used for the purpose of the assessment and compliance of BREEAM issue Pol 5. If separate systems are used, then data/information from the CSH assessment can be used in part to demonstrate compliance. To demonstrate full compliance the NOx emissions from the heating system used to serve the parts of the building not falling within the scope of the CSH assessment will need to be factored in to the assessment. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 254 Pol 4 NO x emissions from heating source BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Highly insulated building Where the heating load for a highly insulated/exemplar environmental building is less than or equal to 7% of the heat load for a Building Regulationscompliant building of the same size and type, 1 credit can be awarded regardless of the primary fuel used. Figures used for calculations of the percentage of total heat demand must be based on the output from an approved energy modelling software. NOx data provided in different units Where data is provided in different units, or at a level of excess oxygen greater than zero, the manufacturer/supplier should be asked to convert this to comply with the BREEAM criteria. Alternatively, the assessor may correct these using the correction factors provided in the Additional Information section. Where some of the building’s space heating is fuelled by electricity from the National Grid, however small the incidence is on the overall consumption, the credits will not be achievable as power stations emit NOx at an average rate of approximately 1200 mg/kWh. Grid electricity This figure is a UK average and therefore also applies to areas/countries with a higher proportion of renewable sources, such as Scotland. Electricity from a renewable source Where electricity used by the heating system is sourced from a zero emission renewable source such as PVs, wind etc, there are no resulting emissions. This source of heating can therefore be counted as having zero NOx emissions. Heat pumps Heat pumps powered by grid electricity are likely to indirectly produce emission rates higher than those required by BREEAM and are therefore typically unable to achieve any credits under issue Pol 4. However, there is a formula for determining NOx emissions from heat pumps in the Additional Information section below. Please note, the energy saved by using certain types of heat pumps is recognised in BREEAM issue Ene 1 and the reduced emissions are recognised under BREEAM issue Ene 5. District heating systems that incinerate waste usually have NOx emission rates higher than the levels set to achieve any BREEAM credits. District heating Heat recovery Heat recovery can be considered as having zero NOx emissions for the purpose of this issue. Combined Heat & Power Refer to the additional guidance section for guidance on calculating NOx emission levels from CHP. Biomass Whilst Biomass systems are recognised as low carbon systems, they can produce a significant amount of NOX and so may not achieve this credit; however they can score highly in the Energy section of BREEAM. Biomass systems are also recognised as reducing the impact of fossil fuel depletion by employing a renewable combustion fuel source. More than one heating system Refer to the additional guidance section for guidance on calculating NOx emission levels where heat is provided by more than one system. Green Tariff Commitments to use a Green tariff to supply electricity to heat the building or power heat pumps are not recognised in this issue due to the uncertainty that this electricity will be zero emission. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Pol 4 NO x emissions from heating source 255 Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage 1 A copy of the specification clause confirming: • Type of heating system(s) installed. For each system specified, a letter, email or literature from the manufacturer(s) confirming: • Dry NOx emissions rate in mg/kWh. If more than one system is providing heat, design team calculations confirming: • The average NOx emission rate. Post Construction Stage Assessor’s building/site inspection photographic evidence confirming: • Heating system(s) installed. and OR A letter from the design team or main contractor confirming: • No changes to the specification. AND where relevant AND where relevant Evidence in line with the Design Stage evidence requirements of the CSH Issue Pol 2. Evidence in line with the Post Construction Stage evidence requirements of the CSH Issue Pol 2. OR OR A copy of the Design Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH Issue Pol 2. A copy of the Post Construction Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH Issue Pol 2. Additional Information Relevant definitions Approved energy modelling software: Refer to BREEAM issue Ene 1 for a definition. NOx emissions: are pollutant gases produced by the combustion of fossil fuels. NOx reacts with heat and sunlight to produce ozone that can cause serious respiratory problems. It also reacts with water to produce acid rain which has a detrimental effect on ecosystems. Dry NOx Levels: the NOx emissions (mg/kWh) resulting from the combustion of a fuel at 0% excess oxygen levels. Calculating NOx emission levels from Combined Heat & Power (CHP) systems Where CHP systems are present or specified, only the heat-related emissions are considered for the assessment of this issue. The NOx emissions are allocated to heat and electricity in line with the respective power outputs. This is done using a NOx emission rate for the electrical output equivalent to the current rate for grid electricity, and allocating the remaining NOx to the heat output. Only the heatrelated component is then compared with the credit scale. The following formula should be used to determine this: SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 256 Pol 4 NO x emissions from heating source BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 X = (A - B) / C Where: X = NOx emissions per unit of heat supplied (mg/kWh heat) A = NOx emissions per unit of electricity generated (mg/kWhelec) i.e. the NOx emitted by the CHP system per unit of electricity generated. This figure should be obtained from the installer/supplier of the system. B = NOx emissions per unit of electricity supplied from the grid (mg/kWhelec) this should be assumed to be 1200mg/kWh C = Heat to Electricity Ratio of the CHP scheme. The above methodology determines the net NOx emissions from CHP-generated electricity compared with central generation of electricity and allocates this amount to the heat production. Where X is calculated to be negative, it should be assumed to be zero. Where heat is provided by more than one system, an average NOx emission rate should be used based on the ratio of power outputs from each source, i.e. multiply the emissions of each boiler by the percentage of heat demand it supplies and total these values. This is likely to be the case where a CHP system has been sized on the base power demand rather than the heat demand and therefore a secondary heating system is required. The following formula can be used: Average NOx Emission Rate = (N1 x (H1/HT)) + (N2 x (H2/HT)) …… + (Nn x (Hn/HT)) Where: N1 = NOx emissions rate for source 1 N2 = NOx emissions rate for source 2 Nn = NOx emissions rate for source n HT = Total heat output from all sources H1 = Heat output from source 1 H2 = Heat output from source 2 Hn = Heat output from source n Calculating NOx emission levels from heat pumps For the purpose of assessing this BREEAM issue, either of the formulas below can be used to determine the contributing NOx emissions from a heat pump: MElec x W Elec MHeat = MElec OR W Heat MHeat = . EER Where: MHeat = NOx emission per unit of heat generated in mg/kWhHeat MElec = NOx emissions from UK grid electricity mg/kWh, this should be assumed to be elec 1200mg/kWh W Elect = Total quantity of electricity consumed by heat pump kWhElec W Heat = Total quantity of heat produced by heat pump kWhHeat EER = Energy Efficiency Ratio (also referred to as Co-efficient of Performance) Conversion factors Manufacturers should be asked to supply dry NOx emissions data in mg/kWh. Where this is not possible the assessor may use the following conversion factors to convert figures in ppm, mg/MJ, mg/m3 or wet NOx. It should be noted that these conversion factors assume worst case efficiencies and are likely to give conservative answers. This could have the effect of lowering the number of credits achieved. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Pol 4 NO x emissions from heating source 257 • Figures in mg/m3 should be multiplied by 0.857 in order to gain emissions in mg/kWh. A conversion may also be necessary for data not calculated at 0% excess oxygen (see below). • Figures in parts per million (ppm) should be multiplied by 1.76 in order to obtain mg/kWh. A conversion may also be necessary for data not calculated at 0% excess oxygen. (see below) • Figures in mg/MJ should be multiplied by 3.6 in order to show emissions in mg/kWh (1 kWh = 3.6 MJ). A conversion may also be necessary for data not calculated at 0% excess oxygen (below). • This Issue’s criteria are based on dry NOx values – almost all manufacturers will quote emissions in dry NOx. However if wet NOX figures are supplied, these should be converted to dry NOx. This can be done by multiplying the wet NOX figure by 1.75. Excess Oxygen Correction: If a NOx emission rate is quoted by the manufacturer in mg/m3 or ppm, then it should be established at what % excess oxygen this emission was measured. The greater the amount of excess oxygen in the flue gases at the time of measurement, the more “diluted” the NOx. It is therefore important to convert any emission rate back to 0% excess oxygen. For the purpose of BREEAM, the following conversion factors can be used for the most frequently used rates supplied by manufacturers: % Excess O2 3% 6% 15% Conversion factor Conversion (c) x 1.17 x 1.40 x 3.54 c = 20.9/(20.9 – x) Where x = % excess O2 (NOT excess air) and 20.9 is the percentage of O2 in the air. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 258 Pol 5 Flood risk Issue ID Issue Title Pol 5 Flood Risk BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available 3 Minimum standards No Aim To encourage development in low flood risk areas or to take measures to reduce the impact of flooding on buildings in areas with a medium or high risk of flooding. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: Two credits 1. Where the assessed development is situated in a flood zone that is defined as having a low annual probability of flooding. 2. A site specific Flood Risk Assessment (FRA) confirms that there is a low risk of flooding from all sources. Or one credit 1. Where the assessed development is situated in a flood zone that is defined as having a medium or high annual probability of flooding AND 2. A site specific Flood Risk Assessment (FRA) confirms to the satisfaction of the local authority and statutory body that the development is appropriately flood resilient and resistant from all sources of flooding AND 3. The ground level of the building, and access to it and the site, are designed (or zoned) so they are at least 600mm above the design flood level of the flood zone in which the assessed development is located (see compliance notes for further guidance). One additional credit 1. Where attenuation measures are specified to ensure that the peak rate of run-off from the site to the watercourses (natural or municipal) is no greater for the developed site than it was for the predevelopment site. This should comply with the Interim Code of Practice for Sustainable Drainage73 systems published by CIRIA, or for at least a 1 year and 100 year return period event with a 6 hour duration. 2. The capacity of the attenuation measures must include an allowance for climate change; this should be made in accordance with current best practice74. Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new build projects. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Pol 5 Flood risk 259 Refurbishment Refurbishment projects, where no new building or hard landscaping areas are developed, are likely to achieve the credit for attenuation of surface water runoff. In such instances, as a minimum, a Flood Risk Assessment must have been carried out and any identified opportunities to reduce surface water runoff as a result of the refurbishment works must be implemented. Extensions to existing buildings There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. CSH assessed dwellings For buildings with self-contained dwellings also being assessed under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies: Where the equivalent credits have been assessed and awarded for CSH issue Sur 1 and 2, the same number of relevant credits may be awarded in this BREEAM Multi-residential issue, provided that compliance can be demonstrated for the whole site. Compliance with issue Sur 1 & 2 of the CSH must be in line with the CSH Technical Guide. Definition of flood zones Please refer to the Additional Information section. Sources of flooding If the development is in Zone 1, the FRA must demonstrate that there is low risk of flooding from the following sources: • Fluvial (rivers) • Tidal • Surface water: sheet run-off from adjacent land (urban or rural) • Groundwater: most common in low-lying areas underlain by permeable rock (aquifers) • Sewers: combined, foul or surface water sewers. Functional flood plain The BREEAM credit for locating in a flood zone of ‘medium or high annual probability’ cannot be awarded where the building is located in the functional flood plain. PPS2575 defines the functional flood plain as a ‘zone [that] comprises land where water has to flow or be stored in times of flood’. If the building assessed is or has been defined as ‘water-compatible development’, please refer to the BREEAM office for guidance on assessing this BREEAM issue. The Environment Agency flood map and associated information is intended for guidance, and cannot provide details for individual properties. In addition the EA map only covers the likelihood of flooding from the rivers or sea and not all sources of flooding (listed above). EA flood maps cannot therefore be used as evidence to demonstrate compliance with the assessment criteria. Environment Agency flood maps SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 260 Pol 5 Flood risk Pre-existing flood defences BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 In an area protected by existing flood defences (designed to withstand a certain magnitude of flooding) the appropriate number of credits can be awarded where the defences reduce the risk to ‘low’ or ‘medium’ and the following conditions are met: 1. The development is not located in an area where new flood defences have to be, or have been, constructed to minimise the risk of flooding to the site and its locality purely for the purpose of the development and/or its wider master plan 2. The development is located on a previously developed land (as defined by the criteria in BREEAM issue LE1 Re-use of land) and the appropriate statutory body confirm that, as a result of the existing defences, the risk of a flood event occurring is reduced to low or medium (as appropriate to the credit levels set in BREEAM). If firm confirmation is not provided then the credit cannot be awarded 3. The relevant agency confirms that, as a result of such defences, the risk of a flood event occurring is reduced to low or medium risk. A statutory body’s local/regional office may be able to provide more information on existing defences in the area in which the assessed development is located. 600mm threshold It is accepted that, for buildings located in a medium flood zone, areas of the car park and site access may be allowed to flood and therefore fall below the 600mm threshold. In such cases the credit is still achievable provided safe access to the site and the ground floor of the building can be maintained (i.e. they are 600mm above the design flood level) to ensure the building/site does not become an ‘island’ in the event of a flood. Where the development has been permitted and the ground levels of the topography/infrastructure immediately adjacent to the site fall below the 600mm threshold, the credit can still be awarded, provided there are no other practical solutions for access to the site above this level and the assessed building, and access to it, meets the assessment criteria. As much of the external site area as possible (or as required by an appropriate statutory body) should be designed at or above the threshold. Third-party defences There are many defences, owned by third parties, which due to their location act as a flood defence by default e.g. motorway, railway embankments, walls etc. It can be assumed that embankments will remain in place for the lifetime of the development, unless the assessor or project team have reason to believe otherwise. For walls, assurance must be sought that the wall is likely to remain for the design life of the building. Effectiveness of the water run-off attenuation measures To ensure effective operation of the water run-off attenuation measures, the facilities must discharge half their volume within 24-48 hours (unless advised otherwise by a statutory body) of the storm event in readiness for any subsequent storm inflow. Calculating peak rate of run-off There are British Standards that contain guidance on calculating the peak flow rate and determining the design flooding frequency. The assessor is not required to perform any calculation as this should be provided by the design team to demonstrate that they have sized the attenuation facilities to store the relevant volume of storm water necessary to achieve the credit. Discharge to the sea or estuaries If all run-off is discharged directly from the site to either the sea, the foreshore, estuaries covered by a shoreline management plan or designated wildlife/SSSI areas (as part of habitat management) then the credit can be awarded without the need to specify additional attenuation measures. 76 & 77 SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Pol 5 Flood risk 261 More stringent criteria Where the local authority (or other statutory body) requires a greater attenuation than the percentages above, and/or a more onerous design flooding frequency than that recommended in BS EN752-4, then the higher criteria must be met in order to achieve the credit. Recommendations from an appropriate statutory body None of the credits can be awarded where the assessed development has proceeded against the recommendation of the statutory body on the basis that the flooding implications are too great. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage First & Second Credit 1 A copy of a flood map or flood risk assessment confirming: • Flood zone or annual probability of flooding in the site location. Post Construction Stage As design stage, no further evidence is needed. Where appropriate, correspondence from the appropriate statutory body confirming: • Reduced annual probability of flooding due to existing flood defences. 2 A copy of the Flood Risk Assessment. Formal written correspondence from the design team confirming: • The FRA has not changed or required updating in the intervening period. 3 Site plans/sections confirming: • The design flood level for the site • The design ground level(s) for all developed areas of the site. • Safe access and escape routes OR where relevant ‘As built’ site plans/sections. OR where relevant Evidence in line with the Design Stage evidence requirements of the CSH Issue Sur 2. Evidence in line with the Post Construction Stage evidence requirements of the CSH Issue Sur 2. OR OR A copy of the Design Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH Issue Sur 2. A copy of the Post Construction Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH Issue Sur 2. 1,2 &3 SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 262 Pol 5 Flood risk Additional SUDS Credit 1&2 Site plans and a copy of the specification or consultants report confirming: • Type and storage volume (l) of the water run-off attenuation measures • Total area of hard surfaces (m2) • Peak flow rate (l/s) for the design storm event • Additional allowance for climate change designed in to the system. BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence confirming: • Installation of water run-off attenuation measures • No changes to the evidence provided at the interim ‘design’ assessment stage. A letter from the design team or main contractor confirming: • No changes to the specification. OR where relevant Evidence in line with the Design Stage evidence requirements of the CSH Issue Sur 1. Where changes have occurred, copies of asbuilt designs and calculations must be provided. OR OR where relevant A copy of the Design Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH Issue Sur 1. Evidence in line with the Post Construction Stage evidence requirements of the CSH Issue Sur 1. OR A copy of the Post Construction Stage CSH certificate and report from the CSH online reporting system confirming the number of credits achieved for CSH Issue Sur 1. Additional Information Relevant definitions Appropriate Consultant: a consultant with qualifications and experience relevant to the calculation of surface water run-off and design SUDS and flood prevention measures. Where complex flooding calculations and prevention measures are required, this must be a specialist hydrological engineer. Appropriate statutory body: this refers to either the Environment Agency in England and Wales, the Rivers Agency in Northern Ireland, the Scottish Environment Protection Agency in Scotland or the local authorities and internal drainage boards. Catchment: the area contributing surface water flow to a point on a drainage or water course. It can be divided into sub-catchments. Design flood level: the maximum estimated water level during the design storm event. The design flood level for a site can be determined through either known historical data or modelled for the specific site. Design flood event: an historic or notional flood event of a given annual flood probability, against which the suitability of a proposed development is assessed and mitigation measures, if any, are designed. Design storm event: historic or notional weather conditions of a given annual probability, against which the suitability of a proposed development is assessed and mitigation measures, if any, are designed. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Pol 5 Flood risk 263 Flood event: A flooding incident characterised by its peak level or flow, or by its level or flow hydrograph. Flood probability: The estimated probability of a flood of given magnitude occurring or being exceeded in any specified time period. For example, a 100-year flood has a 1% chance of occurring in any given year. Flood risk: the combination of the flood probability and the magnitude of the potential consequences of the flood event. Flood risk assessment: a study to assess the risk of a site flooding, and to assess the impact that any changes or development on the site will have on flood risk on the site and elsewhere. A Flood Risk Assessment should be prepared according to good practice guidance as outlined in Development and Flood Risk: A practice guide companion to PPS 25, available from www.communities.gov.uk. Flood storage: The temporary storage of excess run-off or river flow in ponds, basins, reservoirs or on the flood plain during a flood event. Flood zone: see table below for definition of flood zones. Greenfield: a site which has either never been built on, or one which has remained undisturbed for five years or more. Greenfield run-off rate: the rate of run-off that would occur from the site in its undeveloped and therefore undisturbed state. Hard surfaces: these include roofs, car parks, access roads, pavements, delivery/service yards and external hard landscaping. Footpaths less than 1.5m wide which have free drainage to soft landscaped areas on both sides may be excluded. ICoP (SUDS): the Interim Code of Practice for Sustainable Drainage Systems (SUDS) aims to facilitate the implementation of sustainable drainage in developments in England and Wales by providing model maintenance agreements and advice on their use. It provides a set of agreements between those public organisations with statutory or regulatory responsibilities relating to SUDS. Available to download from www.ciria.org.uk/suds/icop.htm Infiltration: the passage of water into a permeable surface, such as soil, permeable paving, soakaways and so on. Natural watercourses: any natural channel that conveys surface water. Peak run-off rate (referred to as Qp [m³/sec]): this is the highest rate of flow from a defined catchment area assuming that rainfall is uniformly distributed over the drainage area, considering the entire drainage area as a single unit and estimation of flow at the most downstream point only. Pre-development: the state of the site under assessment immediately prior to purchase of the site by the client/developer (or, where the client has owned/occupied the site for a number of years, its current state). Run-off: this is usually rainwater, but can also be groundwater or overspill from sewers and other sources. Run-off rate: the rate of discharge of water from a surface. Run-off attenuation measures: this covers the range of construction and equipment which can be employed to attenuate run-off from hard surfaces and roofs. Measures include: underground storage, oversized pipes, holding ponds, swales, reed beds, permeable paving, green roofs, local or centralised soakaways etc. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 264 Pol 5 Flood risk BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Peak flow rate: the peak rate of discharge of water from hard surfaces. For the purpose of calculating the peak flow rate volume, a 60 min duration of the design storm event should be used (unless a different duration is required by a statutory body). Sewerage undertaker: this is a water company with statutory responsibility for sewerage and sewerage disposal and also surface water from roofs and yards of premises. Shoreline Management Plan: SMPs provide a large-scale assessment of the risks associated with coastal processes and present a policy framework to reduce these risks to people and the developed, historic and natural environment in a sustainable manner. SUDS - sustainable drainage systems or sustainable (urban) drainage systems: a sequence of management practices and control structures designed to drain surface water in a more sustainable fashion than some conventional techniques. SUDS devices include: • Holding ponds • Swales • Reed beds • Permeable paving - in areas where local geological and hydrological conditions allow this to function, e.g. block paved surface on permeable sub-base over gravel bed to store the water and allow it to seep into the soil. For less permeable soils, the gravel layer might be deeper and the water taken to a soakaway although this is not an option in some areas. • Local or centralised soakaways either as full systems or as ‘overflow’ or ‘holding’ systems, in areas where local geological and hydrological conditions allow them to function. • Run-off from roofs collected as a part of a rainwater harvesting system. • Run-off from roofs directed to a local soakaway or other holding facility such as tanks, ponds, swales etc. • Green roofs. Surface Water Run-off: water flow over the ground surface to a drainage system. This occurs if the ground is impermeable, is saturated or if the rainfall is particularly intense. Flood zones Flood zones are defined in the relevant planning, policy and technical guidance documents for each country in the UK: PPS25 (England), TAN15 (Wales), SPP7 (Scotland), PPS15 (N. Ireland). Please note, PPS15 does not categorise flood risk zones and there are no similar publicly available flood maps covering Northern Ireland. Assessments in NI will therefore need to rely on site-specific flood risk assessments, or other relevant date/surveys, to determine the extent of flood risk for a specific development, and use the same definitions as those outlined for England (table below). The Northern Ireland Department of Environment or Rivers Agency may offer further advice or recommendations in this respect www.doeni.gov.uk/ and www.riversagencyni.gov.uk/ Whilst the definitions of flood zones and probabilities of flooding are generally the same throughout the UK, there are some differences. The definitions are outlined in the table below. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Table 22 Definition of flood zones by country Definition England Pol 5 Flood risk Wales Scotland Low annual probability of flooding Zone 1 Less than 1 in 1000 chance of river and sea flooding (<0.1%) Zone A Considered to be at little or no risk Zone B If site levels are greater than the flood levels used to define adjacent extreme flood outline. Little or no risk area As defined for England Medium annual probability of flooding Zone 2 Between 1 in 100 and 1 in 1000 chance of river flooding (1% – 0.1%) and between a 1 in 200 and 1 in 1000 chance of sea flooding (0.5% – 0.1%). Zone B If site levels are not greater than the flood levels used to define adjacent extreme flood outline. Zone C Equal to or greater* than 0.1% (river, tidal or coastal flooding). Low to medium risk area Watercourse, tidal or coastal flooding in the range 0.1% – 0.5% (1:1000 – 1:200). High annual probability of flooding Zone 3a High Probability 1 in 100 or greater chance of river flooding(>1%) and a 1 in 200 or greater chance of flooding from the sea (>0.5%). * For the purposes of BREEAM assume upper probability of flooding no greater than that specified for England. Zone C1 & C2 * For the purposes of BREEAM assume the same lower and upper probability of flooding as that specified for England. 265 Medium to high risk areas Annual probability of watercourse, tidal or coastal flooding: greater than 0.5% (1:200) Zone 3b The Functional Floodplain Land where water has to flow or be stored in times of flood. Flood defences Flood defences do not completely remove the risk of flooding, but they do reduce it. Building in areas where flood defences are present (and appropriately designed to withstand a certain magnitude of flooding) is therefore preferable to those built in medium/high risk areas without defences. However, for the purpose of this issue, it is still preferable to build in areas of low risk than encourage development of new flood defences in areas with a higher risk of flooding purely for the sake of new development. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 266 Pol 6 Minimising watercourse pollution Issue ID Pol 6 Issue Title Minimising Watercourse Pollution BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available 1 Minimum standards No Aim To reduce the potential for silt, heavy metals, chemicals or oil pollution to natural watercourses from surface water run-off from buildings and hard surfaces. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. Specification of Sustainable Drainage Systems (SUDs) or source control systems such as permeable surfaces or infiltration trenches where run-off drains are in areas with a relatively low risk source of watercourse pollution. 2. Specification of oil/petrol separators (or equivalent system) in surface water drainage systems, where there is a high risk of contamination or spillage of substances such as petrol and oil (see Compliance Notes for a list of areas). 3. All water pollution prevention systems have been designed and detailed in accordance with the recommendations of Pollution Prevention Guideline 378 and where applicable the SUDS manual79. 4. A comprehensive and up-to-date drainage plan of the site will be made available for the building/site occupiers. In addition, where the building has chemical/liquid gas storage areas the following must also be achieved: 5. Shut-off valves fitted to the site drainage system to prevent the escape of chemicals to natural watercourses (in the event of a spillage or bunding failure). 6. All external storage and delivery areas designed and detailed in accordance with the 80 recommendations of UK environment agencies’ Pollution Prevention Pays Guidance . Compliance Notes New Build Refurbishment Extensions to existing buildings Areas that are a source of pollution There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new build projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. Please refer to the compliance note below regarding ‘infill building on an existing site’. For the purpose of assessing this issue an area that presents a risk of watercourse pollution includes vehicle manoeuvring areas, car parks, waste disposal facilities, delivery and storage facilities or plant areas. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Pol 6 Minimising watercourse pollution 267 Areas where oil separators are required The following site areas (where present) require oil separators in surface water drainage systems: • Car parks larger than 800m2 or with 50 or more parking spaces • Smaller car parks discharging to a sensitive environment • Areas where goods vehicles are parked or manoeuvred • Vehicle maintenance areas • Roads • Industrial sites where oil is stored or used • Refuelling facilities SUDS and oil interception In some instances, where the risk of contamination is infrequent and potential spills will be small, oil interceptors may not be required if appropriately designed Sustainable Urban Drainage systems are specified. Refer to PPG3 for additional guidance. Where the assessment is of an individual building on an existing site, i.e. infill development, the criteria apply to areas within the construction zone that present a risk of pollution, as well as any areas external to the construction zone that are affected by the new works i.e. drainage onto or from the proposed development. Infill building on existing site Suitable level of treatment In all cases the assessor should determine the operational use of the site in order to determine if the proposed surface water run-off strategy is suitable. Rainwater run-off This issue is not intended to cover the treatment of rainwater run-off except where there is a risk of significant pollution arising. Where it can be demonstrated that there will be no drainage or wash down facilities that may lead water from inside the underground or covered area to natural watercourses, then such areas comply with the assessment criteria by default. Underground/ covered areas Roof plant Roof top plant space must be considered where there is a risk from substances such as petrol or oil. Refrigerants are not assessed under this issue, as the only risk of pollution is to air and not the watercourse. No areas at risk from pollution Where it can be demonstrated that there are no external areas that present a pollution risk, e.g. parking, delivery, manoeuvring or servicing facilities (including individual parking spaces), external waste storage space or other hard standing areas AND there is no plant supported on the roof, then this credit can be awarded by default. Permeable paving system Where it can be demonstrated that a permeable paving system designed to retain silts and degrade oils has been used, then this will meet the assessment criteria of this issue for car parks and access roads. Drainage plan A comprehensive and up-to-date drainage plan of the site, which accurately identifies all drains, must be produced and handed over to the new occupier. If there is no in-house expertise to do this, a reputable drainage company should be used. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 268 Pol 6 Minimising watercourse pollution BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Schedule of Evidence Required Req. 1&2 Design Stage Marked-up proposed site plan highlighting: • Low and high risk areas of the site. A copy of the specification or design plan confirming: • Type of pollution control systems specified. Post Construction Stage Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence confirming: • Installation of pollution control system(s). A letter from the design team confirming: • All water pollution prevention systems designed in accordance with PPG3 and the SUDS manual (where appropriate) • Outlining indicative examples of compliance with PPG3 and the SUDS manual • A copy of the drainage plan will be produced and handed over to the building occupier. A letter from the design team or main contractor confirming: • Installation of systems in accordance with compliant design. • No changes to the evidence provided at the interim ‘design’ stage assessment. 5 A copy of the specification or site plan confirming: • Installation of shut-off valves and system type. Assessor’s building/site inspection photographic evidence confirming: • Installation of shut-off valves. 6 A letter from the design team confirming: • Design of all external storage and delivery areas is in compliance with relevant Pollution Prevention Guidance • Outlining indicative examples of compliance with the PPG. A letter from the design team or main contractor confirming: • Installation of systems in accordance with compliant design. • No changes to the evidence provided at the interim ‘design’ stage assessment. 3&4 Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence confirming: • Existence of the drainage plan in the building’s O&M manual/file. and Additional Information Relevant definitions Appropriate statutory body: This refers to either the Environment Agency in England & Wales, the Environment and Heritage Service (EHS) in Northern Ireland or the Scottish Environment Protection Agency in Scotland. Low risk areas: Low risk areas can be defined as areas where the risk of contamination or spillage of substances such as petrol and oil is reduced. For the purpose of this credit, roofs and small car parks may be considered as low risk areas. Soakaways: A sub-surface structure designed to promote the infiltration of surface water in to the ground. As a general point, soakaways may be shallow and broad – as in a blanket under permeable paving, or deeper structures. Deeper, point source soakaways should be avoided for road and car-park drainage, but shallow structures providing infiltration in an extensive way (infiltration trenches and permeable paving) do not need oil separators. See Pollution Prevention Guideline (PPG) 3 “Use and design of oil separators in surface water drainage systems”, Environment Agency/SEPA/Environment & Heritage Service, 2006 for further guidance. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Pol 6 Minimising watercourse pollution 269 Types of Oil Separator • Class 1 Separators: These are designed to achieve a concentration of less than 5mg/l oil under standard test conditions. They should be used when the separator is required to remove very small oil droplets, such as those arising from car park run-off. • Class 2 Separators: These are designed to achieve a concentration of less than 100mg/l oil under standard test conditions. They are suitable for dealing with discharges where a lower quality requirement applies and/or for trapping large spillages. Both classes can be produced as ‘full retention’ or ‘by pass’ separators: • Full retention separators treat the flow that can be delivered by the drainage system, which is normally equivalent to the flow generated by a rainfall intensity of 50mm/hr. • Bypass separators fully treat all flows generated by rainfall rates of up to 5mm/hr. Flows above this rate are allowed to bypass the separator. These separators are used when it is an acceptable risk not to provide full treatment for high flows. Pollution Prevention Guideline 3 contains more detailed guidance on the selection and sizing of an appropriate type of separator. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 270 Pol 7 Reduction of Night Time Light Pollution Issue ID Pol 7 Issue Title Reduction of Night Time Light Pollution BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 No. of credits available 1 Minimum standards No Aim To ensure that external lighting is concentrated in the appropriate areas and that upward lighting is minimised, reducing unnecessary light pollution, energy consumption and nuisance to neighbouring properties. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: 1. The external lighting strategy has been designed in compliance with Table 1 (and its accompanying notes) of the ILE Guidance notes for the reduction of obtrusive light, 200581, (see Additional Information below - Buildings located in Scotland must also refer to the Compliance Notes below for additional criteria). 2. All external lighting (except for safety and security lighting) can be automatically switched off between 2300hrs and 0700hrs. This can be achieved by providing a timer for all external lighting set to the appropriate hours. 3. If safety or security lighting is provided and will be used between 2300hrs and 0700hrs, this part of the lighting system complies with the lower levels of lighting recommended during these hours in Table 1 of the ILE’s Guidance notes, for example by using an automatic switch to reduce the lighting levels at 2300 or earlier. 4. Illuminated advertisements, where specified, must be designed in compliance with ILE Technical Report 5 – The Brightness of Illuminated Advertisements82. Compliance Notes New Build There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new build projects. Refurbishment For refurbishment projects, in addition to any new external lighting specified, any existing lighting that will remain post development must be assessed against the criteria of this issue. Extensions to existing buildings If the scope of the assessment covers the new extension only, then it is only new lighting specified as part of that extended works that must be assessed against the criteria for this issue. If the new and existing building is being assessed as one, then the rule for refurbishments (above) applies to the existing building. No external lighting If there is no external lighting on or around the assessed development the credit can be awarded by default. Buildings located in Scotland In addition to the criteria above, buildings located in Scotland must comply with the light pollution criteria in the guidance note ‘Controlling Light Pollution and Reducing Lighting Energy Consumption’83. This can be demonstrated via completion of the checklists in Annexes B and C of this document by a relevant member of the design team. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Pol 7 Reduction of Night Time Light Pollution 271 Safety lights Flush stud lights used for safety purposes in vehicle manoeuvring areas may be excluded from the assessment. Floodlighting, signage lighting The guidance notes recommend the setting of a curfew, during which all nonessential external lighting is switched off. This will normally include floodlighting, signage and all lighting that is not required for safety or security. Where essential lighting is provided between 2300 and 0700, i.e. for 24-hour operating buildings, the system is able to automatically switch to the lower levels of lighting recommended in the ILE Guidance notes for lighting during these hours (or provide these lower levels at all times). Essential lighting between 2300 and 0700 Specific security criteria Any light fittings in the areas outlined above that are specified to comply with specific security criteria/standards, and where those criteria and the BREEAM assessment criteria are not complementary, can be excluded from the assessment of this issue. In these circumstances the assessor must obtain evidence confirming that such criteria are applicable to the assessed development. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage 1-4 A marked-up copy of the site plan showing: • Areas of the building and site that will be externally lit • Any nearby properties. Assessor’s building/site inspection and photographic evidence confirming: • Cut-off luminaires, if provided, have been angled to limit spill light to potentially obtrusive directions. • External lighting controls A copy of the specification clause requiring, or external lighting design confirming: • The external lighting design in compliance with Table 1 of the ILE Guidance notes • Controls for all external lighting. • Illuminated advertisements designed in compliance with ILE Technical Report 5 (if relevant). A letter from the design team or main contractor confirming: • Installation of systems in accordance with compliant design. • No changes to the evidence provided at the interim ‘design’ stage assessment. In the case of the external lighting design, the M&E engineer or lighting designer must provided indicative examples of where and how the strategy complies with the assessment criteria. Additional Information Relevant definitions Construction zone: For the purpose of this credit the construction zone is defined as the site which is being developed for the BREEAM assessed building and its external site areas i.e. the scope of the new works. The ILE Guidance notes for the Reduction of Obtrusive Light, 2005 are available free of charge from the ILE website www.ile.org.uk. Table 1 of ILE guidance Table 1 of the ILE guidance and its accompanying notes outlines four sets of recommendations: SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 272 Pol 7 Reduction of Night Time Light Pollution BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 1. Limits to the average upward light ratio of the luminaires, to restrict sky glow. 2. Limiting illuminance at the windows of nearby properties for which light trespass might be an issue. 3. Limiting the intensity of each light source in potentially obtrusive directions beyond the site boundaries. 4. Limiting the average luminance of the building, if it is floodlit. In each case the limiting values depend on the location of the site of the building (for example rural, urban or city centre). A calculation of illuminance (b) or intensity (c) is not required if all luminaires are cut-off types and angled so that light in potentially obtrusive directions is blocked. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Inn 1 Innovation 273 3.0 Innovation Issue ID Issue Title Inn 1 Innovation No. of credits available 10 Minimum standards No Aim To provide additional recognition for a procurement strategy, design feature, management process or technological development that innovates in the field of sustainability, above and beyond the level that is currently recognised and rewarded within standard BREEAM issues. Assessment Criteria The following demonstrates compliance: A maximum of 10 credits are available in aggregate from any combination of the following: Up to 10 credits are available by meeting Exemplary Performance for existing BREEAM issues 1. Exemplary performance is demonstrated by meeting Exemplary Performance criteria for existing BREEAM Issues. Please refer to the table below for a list of BREEAM issues with defined exemplary performance criteria (this is also found in section 3.0 of the manual, Scoring and Weighting). For the specific Assessment Criteria please refer to the section of the technical guidance containing the relevant BREEAM issue. Table 23 BREEAM issues with exemplary level criteria Man 2 - Considerate Constructors Hea 1 - Daylighting Hea 14 - Office Space (BREEAM Retail & Industrial Schemes only) Ene 1 - Reduction of CO2 emissions Ene 5 - Low or Zero Carbon Technologies Wat 2 -Water Meter Mat 1 - Materials Specification Mat 5 - Responsible Sourcing of Materials Wst 1 - Construction Site Waste Management SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 274 Inn 1 Innovation BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Up to two credits are available for the Comprehensive use of a BREEAM Accredited Professional (AP) throughout project work stages First credit 1. BREEAM performance objectives are agreed, (and must be achieved at final certification – see Compliance Notes below) no later than the end of the design brief stage (e.g. RIBA Stage B or equivalent procurement stage). 2. The appointed BREEAM Accredited Professional is given the opportunity to attend key design team meetings (see Compliance Notes below) held from the start of RIBA Stage B (Design Brief) up to and including Stage E (Technical Design) or equivalent, and is to be included on the circulation list for minutes from all meetings. 3. A Design stage assessment report is submitted to BRE Global for interim certification. Second credit 4. The first credit is achieved. 5. The project is reviewed against BREEAM performance objectives by the appointed BREEAM Accredited Professional no later than the end of the Pre-Construction stage (e.g. RIBA Stage H (Tender Action) or equivalent procurement stage). 6. The appointed BREEAM Accredited Professional is given the opportunity to attend key design team meetings held from the start of RIBA Stage F (Production Information) up to and including Stage K (Construction to Practical Completion) or equivalent, and is to be included on the circulation list for minutes from all meetings. 7. A Post Construction stage assessment report is submitted to BRE Global for final certification. Additional credits are available for Approved Innovations not currently recognised by an existing BREEAM issue 1. An application is made to, and approved by the BREEAM office using the Innovation Application Form (downloaded from the Assessor Extranet). 2. The Assessor confirms compliance with the criteria set out within the Innovation Application Form. Compliance Notes New Build Refurbishment Extensions to existing buildings Shell Only Fit Out only Credit limit for Innovation section Key design team meetings There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to new-build projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to refurbishment projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to the assessment of extensions to existing buildings. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to shell only projects. There are no additional or different criteria to those outlined above specific to fit-out only projects. A maximum of ten credits may be sought in the Innovation section (e.g 3 credits for Exemplary performance / 2 credits for the use of a BREEAM Accredited Professional / 5 credits for the use of an Approved Innovation ) Key design team meetings can be classed as all site and office meetings between representatives from at least three of the following parties: SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 • • • • • • • • BREEAM performance objectives Inn 1 Innovation 275 Representatives of the Client / Developer The Main Contractor The Architect Structural Engineers Building Services Engineers Cost Consultants Environmental Consultants Project Management Consultants Team meetings must be related to the building under assessment. If, at Post Construction, the BREEAM performance objectives (the target rating) set at the end of the Concept Stage have not been achieved, the credits awarded, at the interim ‘design’ certification stage, for appointing the BREEAM Accredited Professional must be withheld in the final certification report. Schedule of Evidence Required Req. Design Stage Post Construction Stage Exemplary Performance against existing BREEAM criteria 1 As defined within existing BREEAM Issues As defined within existing BREEAM Issues Use of a BREEAM Accredited Professional 1, 2, 4&6 A copy of a letter confirming the appointment of a BREEAM AP no later than completion of RIBA Stage B (Design Brief) or equivalent. This must confirm that the BREEAM AP will be invited to all key design team meetings. As Design stage, but with documentary evidence confirming that the BREEAM AP was given the opportunity to attend all key design team meetings between the dates corresponding to the start of RIBA Stage F and finish of Stage K, or equivalent. AND A completed Pre-Assessment Estimator/Report signed and dated by the BREEAM AP to correspond with no later than RIBA Stage B AND A copy of the project programme indicating the dates by which the key work stages (Preparation and Design) are to be completed. AND 5 Documentary evidence in the form of meeting notes/minutes, recorded correspondence or schedules that can demonstrate BREEAM issues are a regular agenda item. An updated interim report (this does not need to be formally submitted to BRE Global but must be used as evidence). As Design stage. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 276 Inn 1 Innovation 3&7 The Interim Design stage assessment report. BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 The Post Construction stage assessment report. In the case of req. 7, a commitment from the client to complete (to final certification) the BREEAM Assessment process. This can take the form of confirmation from the assessor that they have been appointed by the client to complete the BREEAM assessment to final certification. Use of an Approved Innovation not covered by existing BREEAM criteria 1&2 A copy of the relevant Innovation Application Form and BRE Global report confirming approval of the innovation. As Design stage AND Documentation confirming that the project has achieved the Approved Innovation as described and quantified within the approved Innovation Application Form. Relevant evidence demonstrating compliance with the criteria defined in the approved Innovation Application Form. AND Additional Information Relevant definitions BREEAM Accredited Professional: An individual qualified and accredited by BRE as a specialist in built environment sustainability, environmental design and assessment. The role of the BREEAM AP is to facilitate the project team's efforts to successfully schedule activities, set priorities and negotiate the trade-offs required to achieve a target BREEAM rating when the design is formally assessed. For a list and contact details of BREEAM Accredited Professionals visit www.greenbooklive.com Approved Innovation: Any technology, method or process that can be shown to improve the sustainability performance of a building’s design, construction, operation, maintenance or demolition, and which is approved as innovative by BRE Global. See Innovation Application Form (available from the Assessor Extranet) or scoring and weighting section (section 3) of this technical guide. Procedure for reviewing applications for BREEAM Innovations and awarding BREEAM credits for approved Innovations Applications for approval of Innovations can only be made by Licensed BREEAM Assessors with reference to a specific registered assessment. Applications will only be accepted when submitted on the formal Innovation Application Form (downloaded from the Assessor Extranet). A flat rate charge will be levied to cover the costs of administering and reviewing the application. Details of this charge are set out in the BREEAM Certification and Licence Fee Sheet and are non refundable. A separate application will be required for each proposed innovation credit. The process for approving Innovations is as follows: 1. On receipt of an application form, the BREEAM office will carry out an administrative review to ensure completeness. An acknowledgement will be sent by email giving a credit application reference number which should be used in all correspondence. This acknowledgement will be sent within 3 working days. 2. The application will be forwarded for peer review by one or more experts from the BRE Group of companies and where/if appropriate individual(s) from a relevant external organisation. All expert reviewers will be asked to declare any interest that they may have in the project SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Inn 1 Innovation 277 concerned and no confidential information concerning the applicant or application will be communicated to an external organisation. 3. The expert will independently review the submission against the criteria outlined in the Eligibility criteria in the Scoring and Weightings section. The review will result in a recommendation for or against approval, together with a justification for that decision. The expert will review the application based on the descriptions and commitments made in the Innovation Application Form and their knowledge/expertise of the subject matter. 4. The BREEAM office will prepare a report setting out a clear recommendation based on the expert review. 5. BREEAM’s Technical Director will review the report and make a final decision on whether to approve or not approve the Innovation. 6. The final decision will typically be communicated to the Assessor by email within 20 working days from receipt of the initial application. 7. Finally, to achieve the credit for the approved Innovation the design team must demonstrate to the BREEAM Assessor that the building meets the criteria defined in the application form. If the design/project team are unable to provide the BREEAM Assessor with auditable evidence of compliance, then the additional credit for the approved Innovation must be withheld. Appeals against any decision can be made in accordance with BRE Global’s published appeals procedures which are available on request. The decision made on any appeal is final. Appeals will be subject to a flat rate charge per application; in the instance of a successful appeal, the appeal fee will be refunded. At final certification of the project, BRE Global will publish basic information on all approved Innovations included within the Post Construction stage assessment. This will be done in a way that is sensitive to applicant’s intellectual property and commercial rights, who will be given a chance to comment on, and if necessary amend, entries before they are made public. BREEAM Assessors and Accredited Professionals will have access to a list of previously approved or not approved Innovations published on the Assessor Extranet. This list will be updated regularly. Innovations are considered to be so until information on the Approved Innovation is published. In the instance of similar Innovation being submitted concurrently by independent projects BREEAM Assessors and clients can expect BRE Global to make a reasonable assessment of whether the later submission can still be held as Innovative as described in credit criterion. BRE Global will not review, or charge a BREEAM Assessor for an identical application that has previously been applied for and not approved. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 278 Technical Checklist A1 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 14.0 Technical Checklists 14.1 Technical Checklist A1: Man 2 Considerate Constructors For each of the eight sections (below) the Considerate Constructors Scheme awards a score on a scale of 0 to 5 (with half points). The score achieved or required must be entered into boxes 1-8 below i.e. EITHER 0; 0.5; 1; 1.5; 2.0; 2.5; 3.0; 3.5; 4.0; 4.5; OR 5.0. • When a firm commitment is made to achieve certification under the Considerate Constructors Scheme without reference to particular scores, a score of 3 should be entered in each of the boxes 1-8 below. This gives a total score of 24 in box 9 below and subsequently one credit can be awarded. • When a firm commitment is made to require the constructor to achieve certification AND a score greater than 3 is required in one or more sections, the scores required should be added in boxes 1 to 8 below and totalled accordingly. Considerate Section Score achieved 1 Environmentally Aware Section Score achieved 2 Site Cleanliness Section Score achieved 3 Good Neighbour Section Score achieved 4 Respectful Section Score achieved 5 Safe Section Score achieved 6 Responsible Section Score achieved 7 Accountable Section Score achieved 8 (sum of 1-8) 9 TOTAL Considerate Constructors Score Total CC score achieved is less than 24 Total CC score is between 24 to 31.5 incl. Total CC score is between 32 and 35.5 incl. Total CC score is greater than ≥36 0 credits 1 credit 2 credits 2 + Innovation credit Assessor to award credits based on committed CCS Score and above table Signed: …......................................................................................................................... Name [PRINT]: …............................................................................................ SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 Date: 10 …………………………………………………………… Organisation: ………………………………………………… BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Technical Checklist A2 279 14.2 Technical Checklist A2: Man 2 Considerate Constructors Compliance with an alternative to the Considerate Constructors Scheme • 1 credit can be awarded where the assessment stakeholder confirms in writing that the alternative scheme is to be independently assessed and the assessor confirms that the alternative scheme addresses all the mandatory items plus 50% of the optional items in Checklist A2 (complete box 1). • 2 credits can be awarded where the assessment stakeholder confirms in writing that the alternative scheme is to be independently assessed and the assessor confirms that the alternative scheme addresses all the mandatory items plus 80% of the optional items in Checklist A2 (complete box 2). • An additional innovation credit can be awarded where post construction, the site has complied in full with the alternative, independently assessed scheme, and the alternative scheme addresses all the mandatory and optional items in Checklist A2 (complete box 3). POST CONSTRUCTION REVIEW When certification can be demonstrated the actual items achieved in each section should be quoted. Where the mandatory criteria + 50% of optional criteria are complied with/committed to 1 Score achieved: 1 credit OR Where the mandatory criteria + 80% of optional criteria are complied with/committed to 2 Score achieved: 2 credits OR Where post-construction ALL the mandatory and optional items are complied with. Score achieved: Innovation credit (in addition to the two credits achieved for complying with the standard BREEAM assessment criteria). 3 The assessor must ensure that the commitment is specific to the BREEAM assessment criteria and not a general commitment to satisfy the above statements. Total Credits for Alternative Independently Assessed Scheme SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 280 Technical Checklist A2 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 1) Considerate Mandatory Ref Compliance Guidance a Where introductory letters have been sent / are to be sent to all the neighbours. See copies of letters to be sent or sent with a list of the addresses b Where there is provision for parking on site OR Buses are provided from local transport nodes OR The nearest transport links are within 500m and run every 30 minutes OR An area offsite has been designated for site parking. See copies of parking plan, check local vicinity for transport links. c Where there are ramps and signs, indicating footpaths AND Where pathways are wide enough for wheelchair access AND Where pedestrians who are mobility impaired or who have sight/hearing difficulties can still gain access around the site boundary. View on site. d Where there are barriers and signposts indicating footpaths around the site. Where footpaths are clean Where the passageways are safe and protected. View on site. e Where all the road signs / names can be seen OR Where a road sign /name is obstructed a replacement has been erected. Is there a temporary works plan highlighting these items. View on site. P Optional Ref Compliance Guidance e Does the site have a traffic plan? Request a copy of the plan. f Where site entrances / exits clearly marked AND These are clear for lorry/delivery drivers and other visitors to see. View on site. g Where there is a clearly signed site reception AND. Where appropriate, visitors are inducted into the site AND Where visitors are escorted to the member of staff they are visiting. Check on arrival for the signs. See copy of the induction procedure. h Where there are areas of high minority communities and English is not the first language, notices are printed in the common local language. i Where the site is near a school, community centre / or other building and delivery times are outside peak times. j Where the site manager is authorised to reimburse minor financial complaints. Where the parish registry has been checked to establish the names of neighbours to personalise your letters. Where a map has been sent to suppliers indicating where they should access the site by a particular route. Where the post box has been placed on the pavement to avoid the postman from entering the site. Check the area, local shops and members of the public, community centres for a minority culture community. Where this is present check for signs in the communities language. School peak times considered to be 8-9.30am and 35pm Residential peak times 7-9am and 4-6pm. Other shops / industries may have regular deliveries, this should also be considered by the Contractor. Ask the site manager what authorisation he needs to reimburse financial complaints. List of names and addresses to be viewed on site. k l m SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 Check a copy of the map sent to all suppliers with accompanying letter. View on site. P BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Technical Checklist A2 281 2) Environmentally Aware Mandatory Ref Compliance Guidance a Where site hours and noisy work restrictions are appropriate to the area. Consider particularly areas near; -Houses -Schools - Hospitals -Industrial Units -Public Transport Nodes -City centres -Shopping facilities Copy of statement of intent, policy, agreement etc to be provided. b Where the Contractor has made provisions to reduce the noise. Are reasonable sound restrictions in force e.g. whispering generators, straw bales, sound barriers etc Has the Contractor demonstrated that noise/plant have been considered and measures implemented to reduce the disturbance? c Where there is a written commitment from the Contractor to protect any sensitive ecological features such as plants and trees. AND This is demonstrated onsite. NOTE: Plants cannot be removed and replanted as part of this work. Written commitment to be provided, along with a copy of “before and after” drawings. The commitment should include how the features will be protected and how the protection measures were determined. Temporary works procedures to include the appropriate protective measures. View on site. d Where the site boundary is clearly and safely marked and appropriate to the environment. AND Where the colour of the hoarding has been considered in terms of the surrounding environment. Ask site manager if any thought was given to the hoarding and the location of the site. Is the hoarding clearly /safely marked, clean, neat and well maintained? e Where protected wild life issues in the local area have been addressed by the company. Speak to the site manager about the local wildlife issues and how the site are addressing them and how they are monitored See evidence of drawings or specification clauses that back up the claims. f Where the site has an environmental policy AND The site manager can relate the environmental policy to the procedures on his site AND The site staff are aware of the environmental policy and how it relates to their work Request a copy of the policy. Ask the site manager what the policy includes and how this relates to the site. Ask members of staff at different levels how the policy relates to work at their level. g Where there is a procedure and adequate equipment for protecting watercourses from site pollution (i.e. oils, paints and chemicals). Bunds, absorbent material to soak up any spillages, must be present at risk areas on site. If there is a site specific environmental policy which commits to preventing water pollution and describes how this is to be on the site this point can be awarded. h Where fuel oil spillage equipment is available. View on site. Ensure the spillage equipment is located where spillages may occur to ensure a rapid response time. i Have local suppliers and materials, and also recycled materials been considered? If a list of recycled/local suppliers and materials has been produced the point can be awarded.. j Where there are restrictions on the effects of light pollution and all lights are directional and non-polluting View on site. If there is a site specific environmental policy which sets restrictions on lighting, this point can be awarded. k Where the site is segregating, recycling or re-using waste (including canteen and office waste). This can be viewed on site. A company wide policy promising to segregate, recycle and re-use waste will NOT satisfy this credit. If there is a site specific environmental policy which commits to segregating, recycling and re-using waste then the inspector can award this point. l Where the site has a system to monitor the amount of material waste produced, and provides feedback as to how much is recycled. This can either be viewed on site. If there is a site specific environmental policy which commits to monitoring site waste and providing feedback on recycling, indicating how this is to be carried out, then this point can be awarded. P SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 282 Technical Checklist A2 Ref m BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Compliance Guidance Where energy saving measures implemented on site. P Examples of this include: • • • • • low energy lighting switching off equipment when not in use, Installing thermostats Installing timers, choosing energy efficient equipment n Are the carbon emissions from the site activities monitored? Where a site specific environmental policy monitors the carbon emissions of site activities the point can be awarded. o Where areas with dust problems are enclosed, or alternative methods of mitigating dust have been provided. Check how dust mitigation has been considered with the Site Manager; check that this will be effective. p Where sumps are provided in cases of heavy water run off. View on site. If there is a site specific environmental policy which indicates how heavy water run off will be minimised and dealt with on site, this point can be awarded. q Where a site with severe congestion has a delivery point remote from a site. Deliveries from the remote site can then be made in smaller vehicles at times to cause the least inconvenience. View procedures on site. Where a site specific environmental policy addresses the problem of deliveries to a severely congested site, then the point can be awarded. r Where permission has been obtained to use a fire hydrant or fire brigade to damp down. Written permission to be provided. s Where an impact minimisation strategy review is in place for the site. The review should consider the impact of the site in environmental terms and how any adverse effects are being minimised. t Where there is adequate space for new materials to be stored in secured covered areas to avoid damage, theft and to protect from weather. View on site. Ensure that where space has been provided, it is being used correctly. u Where visible stacked materials are sheeted out. View on site. 3) Clean Mandatory Ref Compliance Guidance a Where all accesses to the site are clean, mud free and safe. View on site. Where a site specific policy indicates measure that will be implemented to maintain clean, mud free, safe accesses, then this point can be awarded. b Where the roads adjacent to the site that are used by site vehicles are swept. Evidence in the form of a contract with a road sweeping company. View on site. c Where there is an area specified within the site boundary for the storage of materials and plant. The area must be clean and dry where necessary, and the space should be sufficient for the materials / plant stored. For the material storage part, this could be replaced on congested sites by a ”just in time” delivery policy View on site. d Where there are dust prevention measures present. Where there is a regular damping down of the roads during the hot weather AND Where dust sheets are provided where areas are being demolished. OR Where any other measures can be demonstrated to meet this point. e Where materials and equipment are tidily stacked and protected / covered where necessary. View on site. f Where areas around the canteen, offices and skips are tidy and clean AND View on site. Check all the areas ensure screening is in place where SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 P BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Ref Technical Checklist A2 Compliance Guidance Areas are screened where necessary. necessary. g Where covered rubbish bins are available. View on site. The inspector should ensure that where bins are provided they are spaced at intervals which will facilitate staff using them h Where a free car cleaning service is offered, where dirt or dust is a problem. View on site. Check procedures, notice boards, with staff to see if this is in operation. i Where the wind direction is checked and the work pattern is varied to suit, if dust is a problem. View whether dust is a problem on site, this should be checked in the driest season. If dust is a problem then ask the site manager how work is varied depending on the wind direction. j Where a hard road is provided into the site to reduce mud problems. View on site. k Where site welfare facilities well maintained and clean? View on site. l Where areas around the site cleaned, including the collection of rubbish not related to site? View on site. m Where measures in place to deal with graffiti? View on site. 283 P 4) Good Neighbour Mandatory Ref Compliance Guidance a Where there is a single line entry complaints book. Copy of the book to be provided or seen AND the book should be kept in an easily accessible place. b Are complaints responded to immediately and dealt with correctly. Look through the complaints book and check the responses. Ensure all complaints were dealt with and responded to in a polite, considerate and timely manner. c Where there is light shielded from the neighbours. Copy of the temporary works including lighting to be provided. These must either indicate light shielding or the site manager must demonstrate how the light shielding works or is not applicable. P Optional Ref Compliance Guidance d Where there are viewing boards in the hoardings AND They give a good impression. Ask the site manger to explain why the views in the hoardings were chosen and how they best represent the site. Check that the areas that can be seen are tidy and clean. e Where an arrangement is in place for a neighbour to act as a representative for a group. Request to see a letter of confirmation that one local will act as a representative of the community or group. f Where reasonable steps have been taken to ensure a minimum of false alarms. For example • 24 hour security. Speak to the security guard. Ensure that the security guard know how to deal with alarms procedures both real and false. Check that this information is transferred to new staff. • Alarms are linked to a central office open 24hours which responds immediately. • Other measures to minimise false alarms can be considered on their merits and how appropriate they are to site criteria. g Where the site and its surroundings are seen by the public as tidy AND Where the site and its surroundings are seen by the public as clean. Ensure that there are no complaints about the site being untidy or dirty or that if there were this was quickly rectified and not repeated. Check on site that the views in the hoardings show a clean and tidy site. P SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 284 Technical Checklist A2 h Where there is a congested site, and there is a compound away from the site used for plant/ material storage. Only applicable if the site is congested. Speak to the site manager about this extra storage and visit extra compound. i Where local people are informed of site progress by the use of a notice board. View on site. j Where there are rewards for a neighbour’s help. View procedures or examples of what Is being done on site k Where there is a model of the project to better show neighbours the exact implications of the project. Where a model has been built and had been shown at local residents meetings OR Where there is a commitment to build a model for this purpose. l Where there is a procedure for a member of staff to check the view in the viewing apertures at regular intervals. Where there is a written procedure or commitment to regularly check the viewing apertures, or where the viewing apertures are to be changed at different stages of the project to ensure the best view is provided. During site visits, check the viewing apertures and ensure the view is safe, tidy, clean and inoffensive. m Where there is a commitment to write and thank neighbours at the end of the contract for their forbearance. A copy of this commitment should be provided or a copy of a standard letter that is always sent at the end of a project. n Where, on completion of the project, the neighbours who have been affected by the work are given a feedback form, to indicate their concerns and mark the Contractors performance These results should then be used to improve your performance next time. Where a copy of feedback form for neighbours can be provided. AND; Where there is a commitment to send these forms to affected neighbours. AND; Where there are procedures in place to monitor the results and implement changes for future work. o Where extra sets of posters are prominently displayed illustrating how the site is being a good neighbour. View on site. p Where appropriate get involved with local community charities and initiatives. Where there is evidence of such events having already occurred or where there are future arrangements or a commitment to do so. q Where measures are in place to reduce negative displacement (e.g. pigeons). View on site. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Technical Checklist A2 285 5) Respectful Mandatory Ref Compliance Guidance a Where there is a dress code specified in the induction. Check the induction content for items related to dress code. N.B. This does not relate to PPE, this is to prevent “builders bum” syndrome b Where there is an enforcement procedure i.e. someone does check that operatives are dressed considerately, Check the induction content for these details. Ask how operatives who are not dressed “appropriately” are dealt with? Is the procedure rigorous Check the complaints book for any items on this issue and see how quickly they were dealt with. c Where inappropriate behaviour is dealt with in site policy. Where this is highlighted in the site induction. Copy of the policy to be provided. Check the induction content for these details. Ask the site manager what the enforcement procedures are and how they are carried out. Check the complaints book for any items on this issue and see how quickly they were dealt with. Where there is a no offensive calendar policy. Check how this policy is implemented. AND; d P Optional Ref Compliance Guidance d Does the site have female toilets. Does the site have disabled toilets. View on site. e Where operatives are prevented from having their breaks in view of the public. Examples of how this might be achieved include: • A site canteen • A common room available for operatives to eat in. View on site. f Where toilets are screened from public view. View on site g Where lockers are provided in the drying room. View on site h Are working usable showers available and suitable changing areas are available. View on site. i Where site personnel are discouraged from using local facilities in their site clothes. Examples of how this might be achieved include : A canteen. Staggered breaks for different gangs. Provision of showers / wash rooms. Provision of lockers. A request to leave PPE on site. View on site. Check procedures with the Site Manager. j Where there is a volume restriction on radio use or there is a radio ban. Check if restrictions/ban is in place and how it is enforced. k Where operatives are provided with suitable clothing with the companies logo. Check company policy to do this and check with operatives on site that they have clothing with the company’s logo. l Provide operatives with a clip on ID card with photo. Check company policy and procedures for issuing clip on ID cards. Check if there is a mandatory requirement for operatives to wear these when on site. Check operatives in site are wearing them. m Where the site encourages only 1 person to visit the local shop at any one time. Examples of how this can be achieved include : • Where there are facilities on site to buy newspapers, confectionary and snacks • Where breaks are staggered to prevent large groups of operatives visiting local shops together. • One person is nominated to go to the local shop for the team. n Is there sufficient action taken regarding operatives’ exposure to the sun? Check company policy and procedure and if it is being implemented on site. P SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 286 Technical Checklist A2 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 6) Safe Mandatory Ref Compliance Guidance a Where there are well lit warning signs for the benefit of the pedestrian and road user. Check if the signs are indicated on the temporary works / other plans OR if they are being implemented on site. b Where the temporary works are safe and are erected only after they have been checked by an experienced engineer. See copy of the temporary works checking procedure, check the responsible engineer has the relevant qualifications. Check that the temporary works are checked by a visual or physical inspection on a regular basis. Carry out a site inspection. c Are the temporary works near adjacent buildings likely to produce a security risk. Ask if a risk assessment was carried out when designing the works and check if this was identified. View on site. d Pedestrians have a suitable, safe and protected passage around the site boundary. View on site. P Optional Ref Compliance Guidance e Is safe access to the site office provided by; good lighting AND Adequate barriers AND Uniform surfaces i.e. no trip hazards AND Being a minimum of 1m wide. View on site. f Where work has interrupted the pavement ensure ramps are provided. View on site. g Where the scaffolding is boxed in or taped where likely to obstruct pedestrians. View on site. h Where the hoarding or scaffold is properly lit externally at night? View on site. i Where scaffold netting is in place and well maintained. View on site. j Where emergency escape routes are well identified? View on site. k Are even the most minor accidents recorded. Check first aid book for minor accidents. Minor considered to be e.g. small cuts (plaster only necessary), dust in eyes. l Where others use the site and there is a regular fire drill. Check times of drill and visit a day the drill should be carried out. m Where there is a procedure to report serious incidents and near misses. Copy of procedure to be provided. Procedure to cover internal QA reporting format, and notifying HSE. n Where there is satisfactory out of hour’s security. Examples of satisfactory out of hours security include: • Locked gates. • Night lighting. • 24 hour on site security. • An alarm linked directly to a police station or 24 hour (local) off site security. • The security guard has an emergency number and knows who to call in an emergency. o Where non English speaking operatives are tested during their induction, to ensure that their levels of reading, writing and speaking do not pose a safety risk to those that they work with. This needs to be robust enough to ensure that in a health and safety risk environment, the operative would be capable of warning others or contacting help. p Where temporary road crossings are in a suitable safe place. Check: Road crossings away from corners. The design has been checked by a traffic expert. There is a risk assessment for these areas, are the remaining risks acceptable? q Where the site office is well sign posted and easily accessible. View on site. r Where safety helmets are positioned close to the entrance to the site office. View on site. s Where the visitors book is to be filled in on all View on site. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 P BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Ref Technical Checklist A2 Compliance Guidance 287 P occasions. y Where safety and other criteria in connection with deliveries are given to suppliers. Check this information is given to suppliers; AND Check that this is enforced at every delivery, not just a one off letter to the company at the beginning of the project. u Where there is a procedure for recording operative concerns and near misses. Check if this is in place and how it operates. v Where all site hazards are advertised at the site entrance (s). View on site. Check that the list of site hazards is complete. w Where there is an initiative to provide incentives to promote and improve safety on site. Check this document and how it is disseminated. x There are clear fire points, an assembly station and fire drills take place. View on site and ask for written proof of a fire drill procedure. 7 Responsible Mandatory Ref Compliance Guidance a Where the Environmental Officer has been informed of your presence on site. See a copy of the letter, informing the Environmental Officer of the project, including start and finish construction dates. b Where there is well posted material indicating nearest Police Station and Hospital (with A&E facilities) Are there posters indicating the nearest Police Office, Hospital with A&E facilities in key areas e.g. site reception, site canteen, main site office. Spot check managers, operatives, reception staff to check they know this information or at least where they would find it. Check Induction talk. P Optional Ref Compliance Guidance c Where a record of your immediate neighbours names and telephone numbers are known. A copy of this list should be provided. d Where all subcontractors first aiders are recorded in a formal document and a copy of this record provided. Check for the formal document which has all subcontractors first aiders registered. e Where an in-house newsletter is distributed to the neighbours. Where a copy of this letter can be provided and evidence that this has been distributed, e.g. accompanying letters, recorded minutes etc. f Where a local person provides out of hours cover. If there is 24 hour security this is automatically awarded. Where there is no 24 hour security, but someone is identified as living local to the site and can act quickly in the event of an emergency on site. g Where the workforce hold CSCS (Construction Skills Certification Scheme) cards. Where the company has procedures in place to ensure that the majority of their workers hold CSCS cards. h Where your company is recognised as having either ISO 9001, 14001 or IIP status. Evidence that this has been achieved must be provided. i Where operatives skills and medical conditions are recorded. Check records and /or procedures to demonstrate this. j Where there are the appropriate number of first aiders and first aid equipment for the site. The HSE produce guidance on the number of required first aiders for a site. A copy of the trained first aider list should be provided and their qualifications, ensure that the qualifications are all still valid (i.e. in the last 3 years). Check that each first aider have a box with basic equipment in. Check that each first aider has access to more equipment is necessary and that they know where this is. k Where local schools have been contacted and asked to participate in visits, talks or competitions. Evidence should be provided that this has or will be occurring e.g. copies of press cuttings, letters etc. If there are no schools within a 3km radius this is not applicable. l Where the site has a static gate man, he is trained in first aid. Check with the static gate man that he is trained, see his certificates and ensure they are current. P SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 288 Technical Checklist A2 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 m Where up to date information on site performance is posted in public view. View on site. Check this is up to date and ask how regularly this is changed. n Where you have a web page link to demonstrate your commitment to being a considerate neighbour throughout the construction project. The link must highlight what the scheme includes and it aim. o Where procedures are in place to enable the employment of disabled operatives. A copy of the procedure should be provided in order to award the point. 8) Accountable Mandatory Ref Compliance Guidance a Where there are posters in a public space displaying your local scheme for considerate construction and the main bodies involved. Posters must identify the client, consultant, architect, and contractor. Posters must be well distributed over the site, as well as in the public eye. b The scheme is mentioned in the site induction. Check documentation. c There has been a safety inspection and report, and any points raised have been dealt with. Check report and view on site. P Optional Ref Compliance Guidance d Where an inspection has been carried out by HSE. Only applicable if HSE have carried out an inspection, Where there are recommendations, there is a commitment to implement them. e Where the company sign board is prominently displayed with telephone number / Web Site / Email address. View on site. f Where the site personnel and sub-contractors are familiarised with the local / national scheme at induction or other. Check if induction procedures cover this item and if not how operatives are aware that they are involved in the scheme. g Where the Client is aware of the Scheme. This can be demonstrated by a letter or endorsement etc. h Where frames and Perspex covers for posters advertising this Scheme are provided. View on site. i Where a suggestion box is provided for the general public. View on site. This must be in a place accessible to the general public AND well advertised. i Where all site signage and posters are illuminated at night. View on site. j Where a 24 hour hotline is provided and this is displayed to the public. View on site. Check how this is manned and how phone calls, queries, complaints are dealt with. k Where your operatives/subcontractors are given points for infringement of your safety and considerate standards. Record these on a card held by the operative. X points and you’re out. Check if this system is operating. ‘X’ must be decided by the company, however the aim is to encourage operatives to work safely and considerately. This point can also be awarded where there is an incentive scheme for exemplar behaviour. l Training/toolbox talks are provided for site operatives. Ask for copies of a schedule of talks. m The site has a record of social/community activities. See documentation to check compliance. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 P BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Technical Checklist A3 289 14.3 Technical Checklist A3: Man 3 Construction Site Impacts 1a. Monitor, report and set targets for CO2 production of energy use arising from site activities Compliance requirement Tick Evidence/Reference Monthly measurements of energy use will be/has been recorded and displayed on site. Appropriate target levels* of energy consumption will be/were set and displayed (targets could be annual, monthly, or project targets). As a minimum, monitoring will/did include checking the meters and displaying some form of graphical analysis in the site office to show consumption over the project duration and how actual consumption compares to the targets set. The design/site management team will/did nominate an individual who will be responsible for the monitoring and collection of data. * Notes: • Targets for energy consumption during the construction process should be set using Constructing Excellence’ Environmental KPI benchmarks. These documents do not specify targets but facilitate projects in setting appropriate targets. www.constructingexcellence.org.uk/zones/kpizone/default.jsp. • BREEAM does not require targets to be met but is encouraging the process of setting, monitoring and reporting against targets. 1b. Monitor and report CO2 or energy arising from transport to and from the site Compliance requirement Tick Evidence/Reference A site monitoring system will be/was in place to monitor and record deliveries*. This system will/did record: • The number of deliveries • The mode of transport • The km/miles travelled for all deliveries If the design team or contractor confirms that the project is aiming to achieve the ‘Construction Site Transport, measures for traffic movements and distances’4 then this aspect has been achieved automatically. The information obtained for this item can also be used to satisfy the Constructing Excellence’ Environmental KPI on transport. The design/site management team will/did nominate an individual responsible for the monitoring and collection of data. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 290 Technical Checklist A3 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Notes: • Where the delivery is specifically for the site, a figure of total distance travelled should be used, i.e. a round trip (from the point of origin, to the site and back to the point of origin). • Where the delivery to the site is part of a multiple delivery route, the recorded figure for distance travelled should be the distance travelled to the site (from the previous delivery), plus the distance to the next delivery or return. • This information can then be used to estimate a total figure for kg of CO2 for the project. BREEAM does not require this information to be converted to CO2 but the information must be made available to the senior project and site management staff/suppliers to establish benchmarks and aid future decision-making towards improving site and transport efficiency. If the project team wishes to convert this information into CO2 emissions there are tables provided at the end of this checklist which can be used to do this. 1c. Monitor, report and set targets for water consumption arising from site activities Compliance requirement Tick Evidence/Reference Monthly measurements of water consumption will be/were recorded and displayed on site. Appropriate target* levels of water consumption will be/were set and displayed (targets could be annual, monthly or project targets). As a minimum, monitoring will/did include checking the meters and displaying some form of graphical analysis in the site office to show consumption over the project duration and how actual consumption compares to targets set. The design/site management team will/did nominate an individual responsible for the monitoring and collection of data. Notes: • Targets for water consumption during the construction process should be set using Constructing Excellence’ Environmental KPI benchmarks. These documents do not specify targets but facilitate projects in setting appropriate targets. www.constructingexcellence.org.uk/zones/kpizone/default.jsp. • BREEAM does not require targets to be met but is encouraging the process of setting, monitoring and reporting targets. 1d. Adopt best practice policies in respect of air (dust) pollution arising from site activities Compliance requirement Tick Evidence/Reference The site will/did adopt best practice procedures in relation to minimising air/dust pollution. This should include: • ‘dust sheets’ • regular proposals to damp down the site in dry weather • covers to skips etc. This information will be/was disseminated to site operatives. Notes: • Further information can be obtained from BRE/EA publications ‘Control of Dust from Construction 4 5 and Demolition Activities’ and Pollution Control Guide Parts 1-5 provide good practice guidelines on construction related pollution. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Technical Checklist A3 291 1e. Adopt best practice policies in respect of water (ground and surface) pollution occurring on the site Compliance requirement Tick Evidence/Reference The site will/did adopt best practice procedures in relation to minimising impact, as outlined in the following documents. PPG 1 - General guide to the prevention of pollution. Environment Agency PPG 5 - Works in, near or liable to affect watercourses. Environment Agency PPG 6 - Working at demolition and construction sites. Environment Agency This information will be/was disseminated to site operatives. 1f. A main contractor with an environmental materials policy Compliance requirement Tick Evidence/Reference The main contractor operates an environmental materials policy, used for sourcing of construction materials to be utilised on site. The policy should cover/promote the following: • Use of local materials (where possible) • Use of responsibly sourced materials • Re use of materials • Use of materials with a high recycled content • Waste minimisation and recycling • Use of non-toxic materials & refrigerants with a low global warming potential • Use of materials with a low embodied impact • Use of durable materials Post construction: indicative examples have been provided to demonstrate the policy in action. 1g. A main contractor that operates an Environmental Management System* Compliance requirement Tick Evidence/Reference The main contractor operates an Environmental Management System covering their main operations. The EMS must be either: • Third party certified, to ISO14001/EMAS or equivalent standard. OR • The structure of the EMS is in compliance with British Standard 8555 2003 and has reached phase four of the implementation stage, ‘implementation and operation of the environmental management system’, and completed phase audits one to four, as defined in BS8555. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 292 Technical Checklist A3 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 2. 80% of site timber is reclaimed, re-used or responsibly sourced Compliance requirement Tick Evidence/Reference 80% of timber used during construction, including formwork, site hoardings and other temporary site timber used for the purpose of facilitating construction, will be/was procured from sustainably managed sources, independently certified by one of the top two levels as set out in the Responsible Sourcing of Materials Issues (BREEAM issue Mat 5) in the Materials section of this document. Additionally 100% of all site timber will be/was legally sourced. Notes: • Re-used timber from off site can be counted as equivalent but re-usable formwork only complies if it meets the above criteria. • This credit can be awarded where all the timber used is reclaimed timber. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Technical Checklist A3 293 Table 24 Standard Road Transport Fuel Conversion Factors Size of car and distance units Total units travelled Units x kg CO2 per unit Small Diesel car 2.0 litres engine and under miles x 0.26 km x 0.16 Large Diesel car over 2.0 litres 2.1 litre engine miles x 0.31 km x 0.19 miles x 0.27 km x 0.17 Average Diesel car Total kg CO2 Source: NAEI (Netcen, 2005) based on data from DfT combined with factors from TRL as functions of average speed of vehicle derived from test data under real world testing cycles. Table 25 Freight road mileage conversion factors Fuel Total kg Conversion CO2 Factor Petrol 2.30 Articulated x 0.35 x Diesel 2.63 LPG 1.49 Petrol 2.30 Diesel 2.63 Rigid x 0.40 x LPG 1.49 Source: Guidelines for Company Reporting on Greenhouse Gas Emissions, DEFRA. Continuing Survey of Road Goods Transport 2001. Type of lorry Total km travelled x Litre Fuel per km x Fuel Type SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 294 Technical Checklist A4 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 14.4 Technical Checklist A4: LE3 Land of Low Ecological Value Section 1: Ecological features of the site Instruction: criteria 1.1-1.5 can be used to determine the presence of existing ecological features across the total site. However, if YES is recorded against any question in Section 1 for the construction zone, then it cannot be defined as land of low ecological value and the credit cannot be awarded. If the construction zone records a NO against all the questions in Section 1 then proceed to Section 2. 1.1 Does the site contain any trees or hedges above 1m high or with a trunk diameter greater than 100mm? YES NO 1.2 Are there any ponds, streams or rivers on, or running through the site? YES NO 1.3 Is there any marsh or other wetland present on the site? YES NO 1.4 Are there any meadows or species-rich grassland present on the site? YES NO 1.5 Is there any heath land such as heather present on site? YES NO Section 2: Type of land to be used for the new building Instruction: in addition to answering NO to all the questions in Section 1, if YES is recorded against one or more of the questions in Section 2 then the construction zone can be defined as land of low ecological value. This credit can then be awarded, as long as all features of ecological value (as defined in Section 1) in the surrounding site and boundary area are adequately protected from damage. 2.1 Does the construction zone consist of land which is entirely within the footprint of existing building(s) or building(s) demolished within the past 2 years? YES NO 2.2 Does the construction zone consist of land which is entirely covered by other construction such as hard surfaces, car parking or such constructions which have been demolished within the past two years? YES NO 2.3 Does the construction zone consist of land which is contaminated by industrial or other waste to the extent that it would need decontamination to facilitate development? YES NO 2.4 Does the construction zone consist of land which is a mixture of either existing building(s), hard surfaces and/or contaminated land? YES NO 2.5 Does 80% of the land within the construction zone comply with statements 2.1, 2.2 or 2.3 and the remaining 20% of the footprint of the construction zone extend into land which has been either: a. Used for single-crop arable farming for at least 5 years, OR b. Consists of regularly cut lawns and sports fields YES NO SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 14.5 Technical Checklist A5: Mat 5 Responsible Sourcing of Materials Table 26 Checklist of criteria for Tiers 1-4 Tier Criteria Third party certification scheme with CoC and rigorous stakeholder consultation (at both standard setting and during implementation) 1 2a 2b Scheme must have developed standards which meet the criteria outlined in Table 28 Features of a top tier (1) comparable certification scheme: Standard setting (below). Third party certification scheme with CoC and stakeholder consultation. Scheme must have developed standards which meet the criteria outlined in Table 28 Features of a top tier (1) comparable certification scheme: Standard setting (below). Examples of compliant schemes Checklist of documentation required FSC CSA SFI with CoC PEFC Reused materials, Schemes compliant with BES6001:2008 (or similar) Excellent* and Very Good* Performance Ratings (Note; the EMS required to achieve these ratings must be independently certified) Design Schemes compliant with BES6001:2008 (or similar) ‘Good’ Performance Rating (Note: the EMS required to achieve this rating must be independently certified**). Schemes compliant with BES6001:2008 (or similar) ‘Pass’ Performance Rating (Note: the EMS required to achieve this rating must be independently certified). As above. One of the following indicating that the material will comply with the relevant certification scheme. o Letter of intent from supplier OR o Purchase order from the supplier including CoC number (if the material has been ordered) or BES6001:2008 Certificate number OR o Chain of Custody (CoC) or BES6001 certificate (if material has already been supplied) Post Construction • A copy of the CoC certificate and/or BES6001:2008 certificate for all appropriate materials/elements. AND • Delivery notes for all appropriate materials/elements. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 296 Technical Checklist A5 Tier Criteria Certification Scheme for timber Environmental Management System at extraction & process stages - see Table 27 Diagram of how the required EMS relates to the process and extraction phases (below) for description of stages. Examples of compliant schemes ISO 14001 EMAS Evidence of BS8555 (for SME’s) MTCC Verified** SGS TFT Checklist of documentation required Design Timber One of the following indicating that the material will comply with the relevant certification scheme. o Letter of intent from supplier OR o Purchase order from the supplier including CoC number (if the material has been ordered) OR o Chain of Custody (CoC) certificate (if timber has already been supplied) Non timber materials 3 One of the following indicating that the material will comply with the relevant EMS standards (see issue for further information). • • • SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 EMS (or equivalent) certificate from the manufacturers at the process and extraction stages OR Signed letter from the manufacturers at the process and extraction stages confirming EMS (or equivalent) certification details OR Letter of intent from the developer to use a manufacturer at the process and extraction stages, who has an EMS (or equivalent), if supplier is not yet appointed. BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Tier Criteria Examples of compliant schemes Checklist of documentation required Post Construction • Delivery notes for all appropriate elements Timber • CoC certificate for all appropriate elements Non timber materials One of the following indicating that the material will comply with the relevant EMS standards (see issue for further information). 3 • • EMS certificate (or equivalent) from the manufacturers at the process and extraction stages OR Signed letter from the manufacturers at the process and extraction stages confirming EMS (or equivalent) certification details In addition: • Environmental Management System at process stages for other materials - see Table 27 Diagram of how the required EMS relates to the process and extraction phases (below) for description of stages. 4 EMAS ISO 14001 Delivery notes for all appropriate elements Design One of the following indicating that the material will comply with the relevant EMS standards (see issue for further information). • • • EMS (or equivalent) certificate from the manufacturers at the process stage OR Signed letter from the manufacturers at the process stage confirming EMS (or equivalent) certification details OR Letter of intent from the developer to use a manufacturer at the process stage, who has an EMS (or equivalent), if supplier is not yet appointed. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 298 Technical Checklist A5 Tier Criteria Examples of compliant schemes Checklist of documentation required Post Construction One of the following indicating that the material will comply with the relevant EMS standards (see issue for further information). • • EMS certificate (or equivalent) from the manufacturers at the process stage OR Signed letter from the manufacturers at the process stage confirming EMS (or equivalent) certification details. * Performance ratings for schemes compliant with BES6001:2008 (or similar) can only be used to demonstrate compliance with the criteria of this issue where certification covers the key process and supply chain processes for the material being assessed. ** ‘Verified’ is the name of a scheme To view a list of products approved to BES6001:2008 (including copies of their certificates) visit: www.greenbooklive.com/page.jsp?id=169 Where ANY non certified timber is used (even if only a small quantity) the following must also be provided in ALL cases: • Written confirmation from the timber supplier(s) (or at the design stage of assessment, the developer where a supplier is not yet appointed) confirming that all timber species and sources used in the development are not listed on any of the CITES appendices for endangered and threatened species (see issue for further information). • Written confirmation from the timber supplier(s) (or at the design stage of assessment the developer where a supplier is not yet appointed) confirming that all timber is to be legally sourced (see issue for further information). SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Technical Checklist A5 299 Table 27 Diagram of how the required EMS relates to the process and extraction phases Stage of production Extraction Process Manufacture process Stone Bricks Materials Aggregate (sand, limestone etc.) Hematite Cement or alternative Bauxite Metals Clay Other materials (plastic etc) Raw materials - other Pre-cast concrete Concrete / blocks Glass Composites 1 point Points available 1.5 points As this issue is looking at responsible sourcing, currently the manufacture stage is not considered. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 300 Technical Checklist A5 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 NOTE TO ASSESSORS This list is included for information, you are not expected to evaluate whether a scheme complies with this criteria. All new schemes claiming to meet the criteria listed below will be evaluated by BRE, and will be included in the list of compliant schemes where appropriate. Table 28 Features of a top tier (1) comparable certification scheme: Standard setting When setting standards for a materials certification scheme the following should be addressed in order to be considered comparable to Tier 1/2 of this issue. • The scheme must include a third party chain of custody certification scheme covering all stages of the product throughout the supply chain • The scheme must verify that all local and national legislative criteria are met. • The process for policy and standards development is transparent, clear and accessible. • The scheme is independent and standards are developed in a way which balances the interests of all stakeholders. This should be done through a rigorous consultation process which makes best use of the stakeholder knowledge, methodically and comprehensively considering all feedback and after such consideration, aims to implement all feasible stakeholder suggestions • The scheme is inclusive, striving to involve all interested people and groups in the development of the scheme’s policies and standards. • Monitoring and assessment must be integral to the scheme and conducted appropriate to the scale and intensity of the industry/ materials assessed by the scheme. This requirement is likely to be fulfilled by the incorporation of an EMS such as ISO14001 or BS8555 for SME’s. • The scheme should contain principles by which the scheme should be governed. These should be specific to industry/materials but should also be composed of the fundamental issues related to the environment. These issues should focus on specific practices associated with sourcing virgin and other materials. • The scheme should assess that initiatives are in place to ensure continuous performance and environmental improvement. • The scheme should provide for small to medium sized business as well as larger businesses. SME’s grouping together to achieve group certification should be an option. This could, for example, take place on a regional or other relevant basis. • The scheme should include a mechanism to revise the standard within a defined, suitable time frame to ensure that the current knowledge or upcoming robust scientific or other professional evidence can be incorporated (in good time) into the standard as an update. It should ensure that all updates are well adapted to the local/regional and/or global conditions. • The scheme should also aim to consider social and economic aspects widening the scope to sustainability under the umbrella of a Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR). This is in line with the future aims of BREEAM and could be assessed within this issue in the future. NOTE: The scheme may be generic for the materials industries or specific for individual materials sectors. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Technical Checklist A5 301 Differences between Tier 1&2 Tiers 1 and 2 follow the standard setting process outline above, however there are differences in the rigour of the two schemes which is why they fall into two different categories. These are outlined below: 1. The top tier category schemes comprehensively address a consultation process with local community. This is done at source via a management company, as the focus is on sustainable project management at source. 2. The top tier category must have no reservations/uncertainty/pending charge or indictment identified by any professional bodies in the relevant materials sectors. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 302 Technical Checklist A6 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 14.6 Technical Checklist A6: Guidance for relating ecologist’s report to BREEAM Before completing this form please read the following: 1. This guidance document is to be used for BREEAM 2008 assessments, where an ecologist has been appointed and produced an ecology report as part of a proposed development. 2. As an ecologist may have been appointed to carry out ecological site surveys and produced an ecology report without being aware that a BREEAM assessment has been, or is to be conducted, the purpose of this document is to help assist assessors relate the contents of such a report to the land use and ecology criteria of BREEAM. 3. The assessor is to request that the appointed ecologist complete all sections of this guidance and return it to the BREEAM assessor along with all relevant documentation required to demonstrate compliance with the BREEAM criteria. 4. The assessor is to use this completed document in conjunction with the latest version of the relevant BREEAM technical guidance manual and information provided by the developer / client to carry out the assessment of the land use and ecology BREEAM issues. • There are 6 sections (sections A - F) in this document. • Section A requires contact details for the ecologist and developer / client. • Section B1 determines whether the appointed ecologist is ‘suitably qualified’ (under BREEAM); and if not, section B2 determines whether the report has been verified by an ecologist who is ‘suitably qualified’. • Section C determines whether the findings of the report have been based on data collected from site surveys conducted at appropriate times of the year to determine whether different species are evident. • If ‘no’ is recorded for either Section B or C then the contents of the ecology report cannot be used to determine compliance with the BREEAM criteria. • Section D provides the BREEAM assessor with the necessary information to complete the assessment of the ecology related BREEAM issues. • Section E provides details of the documentation / information required by BREEAM as evidence of compliance. • Section F requires the signature of the appointed ecologist who has completed this document. Please note: it is only the appointed qualified and licensed BREEAM assessor who can award or withhold a credit for all BREEAM assessments. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Technical Checklist A6 303 Section A: Contact Details Ecologist’s Details Company name: Company address: Contact name: Contact telephone number: Ecology report reference: Developer / Client Details Company name: Company address: Contact name: Contact telephone number: SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 304 Technical Checklist A6 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Section B1: Ecologist’s Qualifications 1. Do you hold a degree (or equivalent qualification, e.g. N/SVQ level 5) in ecology or related subject? Yes No If yes, please provide details…………………………………………………………………………………. …………………………………………………………………………………………………......................... …………………………………………………………………………………………………......................... 2. Are you a practising ecologist with a minimum of 3 years relevant experience within the last 5 years? Relevant experience must clearly demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting ecology in relation to construction and the built environment and will include acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations for ecological protection, enhancement and mitigation measures, e.g. ecological impact assessments. Yes No If yes, please provide details…………………………………………………………………….… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Technical Checklist A6 305 3. Are you bound by a professional code of conduct and subject to peer review*? i.e. a full member of one of the following organisations will be deemed suitable: Chartered Institution of Water and Environmental Management (CIWEM); Institute of Ecology and Environmental Management (IEEM); Institute of Environmental Management and Assessment (IEMA); Landscape Institute (LI). Yes No If yes, please provide details……………………………………………………………………….. …………………………………………………………………………………………………………. * Peer review is defined as the process employed by a professional body to demonstrate that potential or current full members maintain a standard of knowledge and experience required to ensure compliance with a code of conduct and professional ethics. If ‘no’ has been answered for any question in Section B1 then the BREEAM requirement for a ‘suitably qualified ecologist’ has not been met. The ecology report CANNOT be used to assess the BREEAM Ecology issues unless it is verified by an individual who is ‘suitably qualified’ (see section B2 below). SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 306 Technical Checklist A6 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Section B2: Report Verification Details on verifying an ecology report for a BREEAM assessment: 1. The individual verifying the report must provide written confirmation that they comply with the definition of a ‘suitably qualified ecologist’ (as detailed in Section B1 above). 2. The verifier of the report must confirm in writing they have read and reviewed the report and found it to: • represent sound industry practice • report and recommend correctly, truthfully, and objectively • be appropriate given the local site conditions and scope of works proposed • avoid invalid, biased, and exaggerated statements. Written confirmation from the third party verifier on all the points detailed under 1 and 2 above (for section B2) must be included in an appendix to this guidance (see section E). If the appointed ecologist does not meet the criteria of a ‘suitably qualified ecologist’ and the report has not been verified by an individual who does meet these criteria, then the report CANNOT be used as evidence of compliance with the ecology related BREEAM. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Technical Checklist A6 307 Section C: Site Survey 1. Have the findings of the ecology report been based on data collected from a site survey(s)? The site visit(s) and survey(s) must be conducted at appropriate times of the year when it is possible to determine the presence, or evidence of the presence, of different plant and animal species. Yes No If yes, please provide details to justify this (e.g. date(s) and scope of site survey(s)) ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… If ‘no’ has been answered to question 1 of Section C then the ecology report CANNOT be used to determine compliance with the criteria of the relevant BREEAM ecology issues. Note to suitably qualified ecologist and BREEAM assessor: the contents of the ecology report must be representative of the site’s existing ecology prior to the commencement of initial site preparation works, i.e. before RIBA stage K, Construction to Practical Completion, and after RIBA stage B, Design Brief. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 308 Technical Checklist A6 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Section D: Site Survey Details LE3 Ecological value of land and protection of ecological features 1. Is the land within the ‘construction zone' deemed by the suitably qualified ecologist to be of low ecological value? The construction zone is defined as any land on the site which is being developed (and therefore disturbed) for buildings, hard standing, landscaping, site access, plus a 3m boundary in either direction around these areas. It also includes any areas used for temporary site storage and buildings. Yes No If yes, please provide a brief statement explaining how it has been deemed to be of low ecological value: ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2. Are there any features / areas of ecological value that fall within the site, but outside the construction zone? If you have deemed this area to be of low ecological value then there will be no features of ecological value to protect. However, if there is a feature(s) or area(s) of low ecological value you wish to advise be retained and enhanced, e.g. a species-poor hedgerow to a species-rich hedgerow, then full details of the protection and enhancement advice should be entered under LE5 Enhancing site ecology. Yes No p.t.o SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Technical Checklist A6 309 If yes, please provide a brief statement outlining the advice / recommendations given for protecting all existing features and areas of ecological value: ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… LE4 Mitigating ecological impact 3. Are you able to provide the following information for before and after construction: • habitat types • An estimate of the number of floral species present per habitat type (based on appropriate census techniques and confirmed planting regimes)? Yes No a. If yes a brief description of the landscapes and habitats surrounding the development site ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2 b. The total site area (in m ). This will be the same before and after development. ……………………………. p.t.o SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 310 Technical Checklist A6 c. BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Please fill in the table below with site details before development1: Habitat Type* Area of type (m2) No. of plant species per habitat type d. Please fill in the table below with site details after development1: Habitat Type* Area of type (m2) No. of plant species per habitat type * Habitat types will include natural areas, e.g. various grasslands and woodlands; as well as areas of the built environment, e.g. buildings, hard landscaping. The area of each habitat type when added together must always equal the total area of the development site. 1 Note to assessor (and ecologist where requested to carry our calculations); the information contained in tables c. and d. above can be used to calculate both LE4 Mitigating ecological impact and LE5 Enhancing site ecology issues. p.t.o SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Technical Checklist A6 311 4. Has the client / developer requested you to carry out the calculation for LE4 Mitigating ecological impact and /or LE5 Enhancing site ecology (where relevant)? The calculations must be carried out in line with the methodology provided in the current version of the relevant BREEAM scheme’s technical guidance manual. Yes No If yes, please provide all stages of calculations and state what the total change in ecological value is: a. Calculation of ecological value before development: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… b. Calculation of ecological value after development: …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 312 Technical Checklist A6 c. BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Change in ecological value (c = b – a): …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………… LE5 Enhancing site ecology 5. Has the client / developer required you to provide advice and make recommendations for enhancing site ecology? Note: these are to include, and go beyond, compliance criteria for all current EU and UK legislation relating to protected species and habitats. Yes No If yes, please provide a brief statement outlining the advice / recommendations given on enhancing and protecting the ecological value of the site: ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Technical Checklist A6 313 LE6 Long term impact on biodiversity 6. Were you appointed prior to commencement of development work activities on site? Yes No Don’t know 7. Has the client / developer given you the responsibility to confirm whether all current EU and UK legislation relating to protection and enhancement of ecology has been (or will be) complied with during the design and construction process? Yes No If yes, please provide details on all current EU and UK legislation that relates to the site: ……………………………………………………………………………………………................ ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ……………………………………………………………………………………………................ ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ……………………………………………………………………………………………................ ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 314 Technical Checklist A6 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 8. Has the developer / client appointed you to produce an appropriate landscape/site ecology management plan covering at least the first 5 years after project completion? Yes No EITHER: a. If yes, and the management plan has already been produced does it include the following: • management of any protected features on site • management of any new, existing, or enhanced habitats • a reference to the current or future site level Biodiversity Action Plan? Yes No OR b. If yes, but the management plan is still to be produced (due to it being too early in the design/construction phase), have you provided the following information to the developer / client: • scope of management plan • key responsibilities, and with whom these responsibilities lie, e.g. owner, landlord, occupier? Yes No If you have answered ‘yes’ to either question 8a or 8b please provide a brief explanation outlining the details ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Technical Checklist A6 315 9. Has the client / developer required you, as part of your responsibilities, to provide recommendations and advice to minimise detrimental impacts on site biodiversity? Yes No N/A If yes, or not applicable, please briefly explain your reasoning: ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 10. Do your responsibilities to the client / developer include providing advice and recommendations for the protection of ecological features? Yes No N/A If yes, or not applicable, please briefly explain your reasoning: ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 316 Technical Checklist A6 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 11. Do your responsibilities to the client / developer include providing advice on the creation of a new ecologically valuable habitat, which is appropriate to the local area and is either nationally, regionally, or locally important, or supports nationally, regionally, or locally important biodiversity? Yes No N/A If yes, or not applicable, please briefly explain your reasoning: ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 12. Do your responsibilities to the client / developer include providing advice and recommendations on when site works are to be avoided so as to minimise the disturbance to wildlife? Yes No N/A If yes, or not applicable, please briefly explain your reasoning ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Technical Checklist A6 317 Section E: Schedule of Evidence Copies of the following documentation are required to support the above statements and act as evidence of compliance with the BREEAM ecology criteria: • The suitably qualified ecologists site/project specific report • Written confirmation from the verifier of the ecology report (where necessary) • Any supplementary documentation e.g. maps, plans, drawings, letters / emails of correspondence, etc. Please include these details along with the appropriate reference to each document in the table below: Document Reference Section F: Statement of Verification I confirm the information provided on this document is truthful and accurate at the time of completion. Name of ecologist: ………………………………………………………………………… Signature of ecologist:: ………………………………………………………………………… Date: ………………………. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 318 Schedule of Changes to the standard BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 15.0 Schedule of Changes to the Scheme Document The table below details the changes/additions to each issue of this BREEAM 2008 Scheme Document, the table also outlines the issue number (and therefore date) the change came into affect. Where an Assessor/user has been using or referencing an issue of the Scheme Document that has subsequently been superseded, they may continue to use and reference that issue of the Scheme Document through to certification. Or alternatively, they may switch to the latest issue for the purposes of completing and certifying the building. When submitting a certification report the BREEAM Assessor is asked to stipulate in the report which issue of the Scheme Document they have used to complete the assessment of the building. If two different issues were used throughout the course of the assessment, reference the latest issue used. Issue number 1.0 Date of issue 02/01/2009 2.0 01/05/2010 2.1 25/05/2012 Key (Type of Change) Administrative change e.g. typo, re-wording of text, minor addition to the A text. An addition/insertion, deletion or alteration to the scope, assessment C criteria, Compliance Notes, evidence required or relevant definitions. An addition/insertion, alteration or deletion to the additional guidance and AG supporting information/references. Issue ID / Section Front Cover Type A Front cover A Scope C Scoring and weighting C Scope A Change The front cover and inside page has been updated with the updated BREEAM logo and certification mark. The text on the inside page about BRE Global Ltd has been updated. The front cover and inside page has been updated. The Standard number has been replaced with a Scheme Document number. Section 2.2 Type of projects that can be assessed using BREEAM has been updated, specifically: A definition of New Construction has been added. The definition of major and minor refurbishment has been amended to provide additional guidance on the appropriate use of BREEAM for these types of project. Guidance has been added to section 3.3 (minimum standards) concerning the application and exemption of the minimum standards to refurbishment and fit out projects. This is in accordance with the communication in the March 2010 BREEAM Assessors process note. The text in the ‘stages of assessment’ section relating to the timing of the post construction assessment has been changed from: “A PCS assessment is carried out after practical completion of the building works, before handover and occupation of the building.” To: SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 Issue no. 2.1 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID / Section Technical sections Type C Schedule of Changes to the Standard Change “A final PCS assessment is completed and certified after practical completion of the building works.” The following presentational changes have been made to the technical sections: 319 Issue no. 2.0 The credit criteria boxes and compliance requirements have been merged to create one section for each issue called “Assessment Criteria”. The header and footers in the technical sections have been amended. The issue ID information, numbers of credits available and minimum standards requirements now appear only at the top of each BREEAM issue requirement (as opposed to the header on every page under issues 1.0 and 2.0). References AG Scoring & weighting C Man 1 C Man 1 C Man 2 C Man 2 C Hea 8 AG Hea 9 C Hea 9 C Hea 11 C The references section for each issue has been moved to a compiled references section at the back of the Scheme Document. References used in the assessment criteria text are numbered and correspond to a number in the new references section. In addition, other publications are referenced by BREEAM issue for further reading/guidance in a new section Additional Sources of Information. The text in the Innovation part of the scoring and weighting sections has been modified to reflect the insertion of Section 13 Innovation. 2.0 Second credit - seasonal commissioning: Requirement b) has been added to list of criteria for simple systems. This brings the criteria for simple systems in line with those for complex systems with respect to actions following on from the initial seasonal commissioning review. The compliance note concerning ‘commissioning manager (simple systems)’ has been modified to remove the ambiguity over the monitor / manager role. The exemplary level criteria for this issue have been re-worded for clarity and consistency with the main BREEAM criteria. The requirement itself i.e. CCS benchmark to achieve the innovation credit, remains unchanged. A compliance note has been added on the issue of which CCS monitors report to use for the purpose of determining the number of BREEAM credits, where there have been multiple CCS monitor visits and reports. The reference to the definition of occupied space in the relevant definitions section has been removed as ‘occupied space’ is not referred to in the criteria. The following paragraph has been removed from the Additional Information section: "Wood products that contain phenolformaldehyde (PF) generally emit formaldehyde at considerably lower rates than those containing urea-formaldehyde (UF). Although formaldehyde is present in both types of resins, pressed woods that contain PF would be preferable to those containing UF resin." A compliance note has been added concerning floor finishes and compliance with BS EN 14041 in relation to Formaldehyde emissions and the reference to BS EN 13986 has been updated. A definition of ‘separate occupant control’ has been added. 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 320 Schedule of Changes to the standard Issue ID / Section Ene 1 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue no. 2.0 Type C Change The compliance note ‘Extensions to existing buildings’ has been modified to avoid confusion over the scope of the energy modelling and therefore CO2 Index for the purposes of BREEAM. Ene 2 Ene 4 AG C 2.0 2.0 Ene 5 C Reference added to CIBSE TM39 Building Energy Metering. The compliance note ‘CSH assessed Dwelling’ has been amended to clarify the circumstances in which compliance with CSH issue Ene 6 meets the requirements of BREEAM Multi-residential issue Ene 4 A compliance note and relevant definition has been added concerning the types of biofuels that BREEAM will and will not recognise with respect to this BREEAM issue. Ene 5 C 2.0 Ene 18 C The compliance note ‘Calculation of the CO2 emissions saved’ has been amended to provide more clarity on the assumptions that should be used when modelling the building without the specified renewable technologies to determine the percentage reduction in CO2 emissions. Requirement 1 has been removed as this wasn't a specific requirement as such, but compliance guidance (adequately covered in the compliance notes table). Tra 1 C 2.0 Tra 3 C Tra 3 C Tra 3 C Additional text added to the compliance note concerning ‘Compliant public transport node’ to clarify that national public transport services should not be included in the calculation of AI. A compliance note has been added giving guidance for projects where a proprietary (manufactured) cycle system has been specified. This note is in accordance with the guidance published in the June 2009 Assessors Process note. The wording in the compliance note ‘Building users’ has been amended to clarify further, that it is the number of staff that will work within the building that should be used to determine the number of compliant cycle facilities that must be provided to achieve the credit. The wording in the compliance note ‘compliant changing facilities and lockers’ has been changed from: ‘For each shower provided, there is a minimum of 1m2 of changing space adjacent to the shower(s) with hooks for hanging clothes.’ Wat 1 C Wat 1 C To: ‘The assessor can use their judgement to determine whether the changing area is appropriate given the number of cycle storage spaces/showers provided. As guidance to aid the assessor, where a shower/changing cubicle is provided there should be a minimum of one square metre of changing space adjacent to the shower(s) with a bench seat and hooks for hanging clothes. Where there is more than one shower provided there should be a minimum of one square metre of changing space per shower, subject to a minimum changing area of four square metres. Where there are no showers specified, but there is a changing facility, there is a minimum of one square metre of changing space for every 10 cycle storage spaces, subject to a minimum of four square metres of changing area with a bench seat and hooks for hanging clothes.’ The additional credit in the multi-residential scheme for Water Recycling has been moved to Wat 5 Water Recycling issue (to bring Multi-res in line with other BREEAM schemes). ‘Purchase orders‘ added to the list of evidence types that can be provided for demonstrating compliance with the criteria at the post construction stage of assessment. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID / Section Wat 3 Type C Wat 2 C Wat 5 C Mat 1 C Mat 1 C Mat 1 AG Mat 1 AG Mat 5 C Mat 5 C Mat 5 AG Mat 5 C Mat 5 C Schedule of Changes to the Standard Change Criteria requirement 2b stated "….a flow rate above a pre-set minimum for a pre-set period of time", the word "minimum" has been changed to "maximum" in accordance with the objective of the requirement. The first exemplary level requirement has been amended to confirm the minimum percentage water demand that must be met by an individual item of water consuming plant or building area to achieve the innovation credit. A compliance note has also been added in support of this requirement. Issue applicable to Multi-residential scheme (as per note above for Wat 1.) Compliance note added explaining how the Exemplary level criteria requirements should be assessed where the building contains no upper floor. Definition and Compliance note added concerning the new Online Green Guide Calculator. Information added to the Additional Information section concerning floor finishes, specifically guidance on selecting the appropriate floor finishes category on the Green Guide online. A definition of element number has been added to the Additional Information section. BRE Global’s responsible sourcing framework standard BES6001:2008 has been added to tiers 1 and 2 of Table 13 Responsible Sourcing Tier Levels and Criteria. The Green Dragon Environmental Standard® added as an EMS compliant scheme (tiers 3 and 4 of responsible sourcing table) for small companies. The schedule of evidence table for this issue has also been updated accordingly. Tier 2 in the responsible sourcing table has been split in to tier 2a and 2b. This is in accordance with the guidance in December 2009 BREEAM Assessor’s process note, to differentiate certification schemes that achieve a Good rating from those that achieve a Pass rating under BES:6001 Responsible Sourcing Standard. The calculation procedure for the Mat 5 calculator tool in the additional guidance section of issue Mat 5 has been updated in accordance with the communication in the December 2009 BREEAM Assessor's process note and the introduction of an online responsible sourcing tool. A definition added for the online Responsible Sourcing Calculator A note has been added alongside the Responsible Sourcing Criteria and Tier Levels table regarding PEFC International's endorsement of the MTCC scheme and therefore the circumstances in which MTCC certified timber can be considered as a tier 1 compliant scheme. This change is in accordance with the guidance communicated to assessors in the July 2009 edition of the Assessors Process note. The note concerning in-situ concrete in the table of responsible sourcing tier levels and criteria has been updated to clarify the requirement for concrete mixed on site. Also, a note has been added at the bottom of the responsible sourcing table containing guidance on the need for a certified EMS for products/manufacturers certified against BES6001:2008. This is in accordance with the communication to BREEAM Assessors in the September 2009 process note. 321 Issue no. 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 322 Schedule of Changes to the standard Issue ID / Section Mat 5 Type C Wst 5 C Mat 1 AG Mat 1 A Mat 5 C Mat 8 C Wst 3 C LE1 C LE4 C LE3 C LE5 C BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Change A compliance note has been added concerning the responsible sourcing of insulation materials, specifically making the reader aware that this is covered in BREEAM issue Mat 6 Insulation. The compliance note "Home composting facilities" has been removed, as this did not include any further guidance that was not explicit in the criteria. A note in the Additional Information section has been added concerning the Green Guide flooring category and Indoor Air Quality. A note has been added to the schedule of evidence table concerning Green Guide element numbers. The text ‘Future RSM certification schemes & standards’ in the additional guidance section has been replaced with text concerning the BRE Global responsible sourcing standard BES6001:2008. Text and tables in the additional guidance section concerning Responsible Sourcing calculations and tier levels has been removed and replaced with a reference directing the reader to BREEAM issue Mat 5 (where the relevant text and tables can be found). This has been done to avoid repetition. The word “up to” has been replaced by the words “with an” in requirement 2c to read: “An additional 2m2 per 1000m2 of net floor area where catering is provided (with an additional minimum of 10m2 for buildings ≥5000m2)”. The text in the schedule of evidence table for requirement 1 of this issue has been changed from “previous land use” to “Type and duration of previous land use”. The following text has been added to the compliance note ‘Number of plant species’: ‘Where an ecologist has been appointed actual number of plant species (before and after construction), based on the ecologists site survey should be used to determine the change in ecological value.’ The following text has been added to the compliance note ‘Use of a suitably qualified ecologist’ as a clarification: ‘Where a suitably qualified ecologist is employed and has, using their professional judgement, defined the site as land of low ecological value, this assessment/judgement overrides any assessment determined using checklist A4.’ The following has been added to the compliance note ‘Site clearance prior to purchase of the site’ as a clarification: ‘Where it is not possible for the ecologists to determine that the site was of low ecological value prior to the site clearance then the credit must be withheld.’ The compliance note ‘Native Species’ has been re-named ‘Plant Species’. The text in the compliance note has been modified from: ‘Only native floral/plant species and those with a known attraction or benefit to local fauna can be considered for the purpose of increasing the number of species on site, as well as general enhancement.’ To: ‘Only native floral/plant species, and/or those contributing to a local or UK Biodiversity Action Plan or those with a known attraction or benefit to local fauna can be considered for the purpose of increasing the number of species on site, as well as general enhancement. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 Issue no. 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Issue ID / Section Type LE6 C Pol 2 C Pol 2 C Pol 4 C Pol 4 C Pol 5 C Innovation C Inn 1 AG Inn 1 AG Inn 1 C Inn 1 C Checklist A5 Checklist A3 C C Schedule of Changes to the Standard 323 Issue no. Change The Natural History Museum has an online Postcode Plants Database which generates lists of native plants and wildlife for any specified postal district in the UK. http://www.nhm.ac.uk/natureonline/life/plants-fungi/postcode-plants/index.html’ In the compliance note: "Not all additional items are applicable" where there are only four items applicable, the requirements to achieve one credit has been amended from "three additional items" to "two additional items" to bring in line with the standard requirement for achieving the first credit available for this issue. A compliance note has been added concerning appropriate action for refrigeration systems that use ammonia as a refrigerant. The compliance note concerning awarding the credit by default where Carbon Dioxide has been used as the refrigeration has been updated to include a requirement that the system must comply with the BS EN 378 and Institute of Refrigeration code of practice for Carbon Dioxide. The factor given for converting figures in mg/MJ to mg/kWh is subject to a formatting error. Previous issue stated that figures in mg/MJ should be divided by 3.6, when in fact they should be multiplied. This has been amended. A formula has been added to the additional information section for determining NOx emissions from heat pumps. Requirement 3 referred to notes 6 & 7, this should refer to the compliance notes. The reference to notes 6 & 7 is a legacy from the BREEAM 2006 version. The guidance has been amended accordingly. The Innovation section has been added (section 13). This section summarises the three methods of achieving innovation credits in BREEAM. The definition of an Accredited Professional has been updated. The text "Procedure for reviewing applications for BREEAM Innovations" in the additional guidance section has been updated. The Suitably Qualified Assessor route as a means of achieving the relevant two BREEAM Innovation credits has been removed. The credits can now only be achieved through the use of a BREEAM AP. In accordance with the communication in the November 2009 BREEAM Assessors process note. Text added to the schedule of evidence required table to confirm the type of information required for demonstrating compliance with requirement 7 at the interim design stage for the appointment and use of a BREEAM AP The checklist has been updated to reflect the inclusion of BES6001:2008 in to the responsible sourcing tiers. The wording in requirement f) of checklist A3 referred to the use of materials and refrigerants with a “high” global warming potential. This has been changed to read materials & refrigerants with a “low” global warming potential. 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 324 Additional Sources of Information BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 16.0 Additional Sources of Information Information listed by BREEAM issue. Man 1 • AG16/2002 - Variable flow water systems: design, installation and commissioning guidance • Photovoltaics in buildings - Testing, commissioning and monitoring guide, S/P2/00290/REP. Man 3 • Sustainability Action Plan (or Achieving Sustainability in Construction Procurement); Government Construction Client’s Panel (GCCP), Office of Government Commerce (OGC). • Guidelines for Company Reporting on Greenhouse Gas Emissions, Annex 6 Transport conversion tables, DEFRA 2002. • COPERT II Computer programme to Calculate Emissions from Road Transport - Methodology and Emissions Factors, Technical report No 6. http://reports.eea.eu.int/TEC06/en • Good Practice Guide (GPG) 273, Computerised Routing and Scheduling for Efficient Logistics, Freight Transport Association, 2000. • BS8555 2003 Environmental Management Systems – Guide to the phased implementation of an environmental management system including the use of environmental performance evaluation, BSI 2003. • http://www.smartwaste.co.uk Man 4 • Construction (Design and Management) Regulations 1994. • BRE Digest 474 HOBO protocol - Handover of Office Building Operations, 2003. • CIBSE Building Log Book Toolkit (CD-ROM) 2003. • Carbon Trust : www.thecarbontrust.co.uk/carbontrust/ Hea 1 • Lighting Guide 10 Daylighting and window design, CIBSE, 1999. • Site layout planning for daylight and sunlight, A guide to good practice, P. J. Littlefair, BRE Press, 1998. Hea 2 • Computers and Eyestrain, E. Lawrence Bickford, O.D, The EyeCare Reports, 1996. Hea 3 • Lighting Guide 10 Daylighting and window design, CIBSE, 1999. • Lighting Guide 3 The visual environment for display screen use, CIBSE, 1996. • The Building Regulations 2000 Approved Document F Means of Ventilation, ODPM, 2005. • Good Practice Guide 290 Ventilation and cooling option appraisal, a clients’ guide, The Carbon Trust. Hea 8 • CIBSE TM 21 Minimising pollution at air intakes, 1999. • Guide B Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning and Refrigeration, CIBSE, 2005. • Guide A Environmental Design, CIBSE, 1999. Hea 9 • Statutory Instrument 2005 No. 2773. The Volatile Organic Compounds in Paints, Varnishes and Vehicle Refinishing Products Regulations 2005, ISBN 0 11 073431 9. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Additional Sources of Information 325 Hea 10 • Report 345 BRE’s Environmental Design Guide for Naturally Ventilated and Daylit Offices. • CIBSE Guide J Weather, solar and illuminance data, CIBSE, 2002. • ClassCool, DfES; 2006: www.teachernet.gov.uk/iaq Hea 12 • AG 10/94.1 Efficient humidification in buildings, KM Bennett, BSRIA. • Health and Safety Executive, Legionnaires disease: http://www.hse.gov.uk/legionnaires/ Hea 20 • Office of the Deputy Prime Minister: Planning Policy Guidance, Note 8: Telecommunications (2001). Hea 21 • BS EN ISO 717-1 Acoustics – Rating of sound insulation in buildings and of building elements. Part 1. Airborne sound insulation, BSI, 1997. • BS EN ISO 717-2 Acoustics - Rating of sound insulation in buildings and of building elements. Part 2. Impact sound insulation, BSI, 1997. • BS EN ISO 140-7 Acoustics – Measurement of sound insulation in buildings and of building elements. Part 7. Field measurements of impact sound insulation of floors, BSI, 1998. • BS EN ISO 140-4:1998 Acoustics – Measurement of sound insulation in buildings and of building elements. Part 4. Field measurements of airborne sound insulation between rooms, BSI, 1998. Ene 1 • Improving the energy efficiency of our buildings: A guide to energy performance certificates for the construction, sale and let of non-dwellings, Communities and Local Government, 2008. http://www.communities.gov.uk/archived/publications/planningandbuilding/guidancenondwellingss • Scottish Technical Handbooks: Non-Domestic – Section 6: Energy, Scottish Building Standards, 2007. Ene 2 • CIBSE TM39 Building energy metering - A guide to energy sub-metering in non-domestic buildings, CIBSE, 2006. Ene 4 • Lighting Guide 007 Installers’ Guide to the Assessment of Energy Efficient Lighting Installations, Carbon Trust, 2004. Ene 5 • Planning Policy Statement 22: Renewable Energy, ODPM, 2004 • Planning for Renewable Energy: A Companion Guide to PPS22, ODPM, 2004 • London Renewables Toolkit, available to download from http://www.london.gov.uk/mayor/environment/energy/renew_resources.jsp Tra 1 • Transport Assessment Best Practice; Guidance Document, Transport for London, 2006. Tra 2 • Planning Policy Guidance Note 13 – Transport, Department for Transport, 2002. Tra 3 • Providing for cyclists - A code of practice, Sustrans/cyclists' Public affairs group/CTC, 1997. • Transport for London Street Management, Cycle Parking Standards TfL Proposed Guidelines, TFL. • London Cycling Design Standards, Transport for London, 2005. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 326 • Additional Sources of Information BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 BS 5489-1:2003 Code of practice for the design of road lighting, Lighting of roads and public amenity areas, BSI. Tra 5 & 6 • A travel plan resource pack for employers, DfT, 2000. • A good practice guide to green travel plans BCO, 2004. • The Essential Guide to Travel Planning, DfT, 2008. • Transport Energy Best Practice, A Guide on Travel Plans for Developers, DfT, 2005. • Traffic Advisory Leaflet 2/00, Framework for a local walking strategy, DETR, 2000. • BS 8300:2001 Design of buildings and their approaches to meet the needs of disabled people – code of practice, BSI, 2001. • Approved Document Part M Access to and Use of Buildings, ODPM, 2006. • Guidance on the use of Tactile Paving Surfaces, DETR & the Scottish Office, 1998. • Building Sight, RNIB, 1995. Wat 5 • Reclaimed water systems – information about installing, modifying or maintaining reclaimed water systems, 902-04, WRAS 1999. • BS EN 12056-3:2000: Gravity drainage systems inside buildings. Roof drainage, layout and calculation, 2000. Mat 1 & Mat 2 • The Green Guide to Specification: www.thegreenguide.org.uk Mat 5 • FERN - European NGO campaigning for forests (www.fern.org) • ProForest (www.ProForest.net) • WWF (www.panda.org) • UK Tropical Forest forum (www.forestforum.org.uk) • Greenpeace Ancient Forest Campaign (www.greenpeace.org.uk) • Forests Forever Campaign (www.forestsforever.org.uk) • UK Woodland Assurance Scheme (www.forestry.gov.uk/ukwas) • Wood for Good (www.woodforgood.com) • TFT - Tropical Forest Trust publication, Good Wood, Good Business (www.tropicalforesttrust.com) • Good Wood Guide, Friends of the Earth/ Flora and Fauna International, 2002 (www.goodwoodguide.com) • The Environment in Your Pocket, DEFRA, 2001. • Certification of Forest Products, BRE, 1999. • Briefing Sheet – The UK’s Footprint: The UK Timber Industry and its Impact on the World’s Forest, Friends of the Earth, 2000. • Saving the Wood, Building for a Future (Autumn 2001) • EU Eco-Management and Audit Scheme (EMAS) (www.emas.org.uk/aboutemas/mainframe.htm) (http://europa.eu.int/comm/environment/emas/index_en.htm) • International Standards for Organisation (ISO) www.iso.org/iso/en/ISOOnline.frontpage • EU Forest Law Enforcement, Governance and Trade (FLEGT) Action Plan (http://europa.eu.int/) • SGS timber tracking programme (http://www.sgs.com/forest_services_?serviceId=8535&lobId=5548) • Tropical Forest Trust (http://www.tropicalforesttrust.com/) • Scottish Procurement Policy Note (SPPN (09)), Procurement of Timber and Timber Products, Scottish Procurement Directorate, 2005. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Additional Sources of Information 327 Wst 1 • For information and further advice on Site Waste Management Plans and to freely download BRE’s new SMARTWaste Plan tool visit: www.smartwaste.co.uk • Environment Agency guidance on waste: www.environment-agency.gov.uk/subjects/waste/ and www.netregs.gov.uk • DEFRA provides information and associated guidance on the Site Waste Management Plan Regulations 2008: www.defra.gov.uk/constructionwaste • For help in finding local waste management companies and opportunities to reuse and recycle materials try BREMAP free of charge at: www.bremap.co.uk • Both WRAP and Envirowise can provide advice and guidance on SWMPs: www.wrap.org.uk/construction and www.envirowise.gov.uk • www.remade.org.uk • Waste Management Regulations Scotland www.aggregain.org.uk/waste_management_regulations/waste_management_regulations_scotland/index.html Wst 2 • AggRegain website (managed by WRAP) has many case studies, guidance and specifications for using recycled and secondary aggregates: www.aggregain.org.uk • BREMAP and Salvo Materials Information Exchange can help identify sources of recycled and secondary aggregates: www.bremap.org.uk and www.salvomie.co.uk • MINRES website has technical information and case studies relating to the use of recycled and secondary aggregates in a number of high value applications e.g. bricks, concrete etc., and can also help users to locate sources of secondary aggregates: www.minres.co.uk Wst 3 • Metric handbook – Planning and design data, Adler, Architectural Press, 2nd Ed., 1999. LE2 • CLEA Overview Documents (These and other documents relating to CLEA are available from the Environment Agency’s website: www.environment-agency.gov.uk): § CLR 7: Assessment of risks to human health from land contamination; an overview of the development of Soil Guideline Values and related research. • § CLR 8: Potential contaminants for the assessment of land. § CLR 9: Contaminants in soil: collation of toxicological data and intake values for humans. § CLR 10: The Contaminated Land Exposure Assessment (CLEA) model: technical basis and algorithms. Further advice and technical publications are available for download from the Environment Agency’s website: www.environment-agency.gov.uk, including; • § Remedial methods for contaminated groundwater. § Verification of treatment performance – How sure can you be? § Issues for the selection of remedial strategies, good practice guidance. § Process-based remediation of land contamination. Approved Document C Site Preparation and Resistance to contaminants and moisture, 2004 edition, ODPM. http://www.communities.gov.uk • Environment Agency Guidance on Criteria for Land Contamination Reports, Environment Agency, 2005. • Scottish Environment Protection Agency (SEPA) www.sepa.org.uk SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 328 Additional Sources of Information BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 LE3 • Institute of Ecology and Environmental Management's Guidelines for Ecological Impact Assessment in the United Kingdom www.ieem.net/ecia/index.html • British Standard BS5837 Trees in relation to construction, BSI, 2005. • The Hedgerows Regulations 1997, Office of Public Sector. • Environmental good practice on site (CIRIA C502): Guidance on how to avoid causing environmental damage and the financial penalties that can follow, CIRIA, 1999. • Environmental good practice on site (CIRIA C503): Practical advice on how to carry out construction works without harming the environment, CIRIA, 1999. • Working with wildlife site guide (CIRIA C567): Guidance to understand and implement good practice in relation to wildlife on development and construction projects, CIRIA, 2005. • RSPB Good Practice Guide for Prospective Developments – General Principles, RSPB, 1997: www.rspb.org.uk. • Pollution Prevention Guideline (PPG) 5 Works in, near, or liable to affect watercourses, Environment Agency. • Pollution Prevention Guideline (PPG) 6 Working at construction and demolition sites, Environment Agency. LE5 • The Association of Wildlife Trust Consultancies www.awtc.co.uk • Chartered Institution of Water and Environmental Management www.ciwem.org • The Institute of Ecology and Environmental Management www.ieem.org.uk • The Institute of Environmental Management and Assessment www.iema.net. • Landscape Institute www.landscapeinstitute.org LE6 • Earthwatch Europe: www.businessandbiodiversity.org • Construction Industry Key Performance Indicators: www.kpizone.com • Natural Environmental and Rural Communities Act, 2006: www.opsi.gov.uk • A Handbook of Good Practice for Public Bodies Dealing with Best Value and Biodiversity in Scotland, The Scottish Government, 2004. • Delivering the Scottish Biodiversity Duty: www.biodiversityscotland.gov.uk/duty/index.htm • Action for Scotland Biodiversity, Scottish Biodiversity Group. Pol 1 • Guidance note 1 New CFC’s, HCFCs, HFC’s and halons, Professional and practical guidance on substances that deplete the ozone layer, CIBSE, 2000. • Code of practice for the minimisation of refrigerant emissions from refrigerating systems, Institute of Refrigeration, Institute of Refrigeration, 1995. • BS EN378-1:2000 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps – Safety and environmental criteria – Part 1: Basic criteria, definitions, classification and selection criteria, BSI, 2000. • Institute of Refrigeration: www.ior.org.uk • F-gas regulations: http://www.defra.gov.uk/environment/climatechange/uk/fgas/pdf/fluorgasreg-guidance.pdf Pol 2 • Code of practice for the minimisation of refrigerant emissions from refrigerating systems, Institute of Refrigeration, 1995. • Guidance Note 01 – New CFC’s, HCFC’s, HFC’s and halons, Professional and practical guidance on substances that deplete the ozone layer, CIBSE, 2000. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 • • Additional Sources of Information 329 GPG 178 Cutting the Cost of Refrigerant Leakage, Carbon Trust, 1997. BSEN 378 1-4 Refrigerating Systems and Heat Pumps – Safety and Environmental Requirement, British Standards Institution, British Standards Institute, 2000. Pol 4 • British Standards EN 297:1994. A1:1995, A2:1996, A3:1996, A5:1998 and A6:2003 Gas-fired central heating boilers, page 42, table 14, section 3.6.2 • The United Kingdom’s Programme and National Plan for Reducing Emissions of Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) and Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) from Existing Large Combustion Plants, Department of the Environment, Scottish Development Department, Welsh Office, Department of the Environment for Northern Ireland, (1990). • Nitrogen Dioxide in the United Kingdom, Defra, 2004.. • Summary report also available on the National Atmospheric Emissions Inventory website at www.naei.org.uk Pol 5 • C623 Standards for the repair of buildings following flooding, CIRIA, 2005. • C523 Sustainable urban drainage systems – best practice manual for England, Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland, CIRIA, 2001. • C697 The SUDS Manual, CIRIA, 2007. • Flood estimation handbook, Centre for ecology and hydrology, National Environmental Research Council, 1999. • Flood estimation for small catchments, Marshall DCW and Bayliss AC. IOH Report No.124. Institute of hydrology, Wallingford, 1994. • BRE Good Repair Guide 11 Repairing Flood Damage, Part 1-4, BRE Press, 1997. • Development and Flood Risk A Practice Guide Companion to PPS25 - A Consultation Paper, CLG, 2007. • Planning Policy Wales Technical Advice Note 15: Development and flood risk, Welsh Assembly Government, 2004. • Scottish Planning Policy 7 Planning and flooding, Scottish Executive, 2004. • Planning Policy Statement 15 Planning and flood risk, DOE, 2006. • BRE Digest 365 Soakaway design, BRE, 1991. • BRESOAK Soakaway design software (2007) http://www.brebookshop.com/details.jsp?id=376 • The Environment Agency Flood Information: http://www.environment-agency.gov.uk/subjects/flood/ • Scottish Environment Protection Agency: www.sepa.org.uk/flooding/mapping • The Met Office (incl. figures for UK rainfall): www.met-office.gov.uk Pol 6 • Pollution Prevention Guideline (PPG) 1 General guide to the prevention of pollution, Environment Agency/SEPA/Environment & Heritage Service. • Groundwater Protection Policy, Environment Agency, 2007. • BS EN 752-4 Drain and sewer systems outside buildings – Hydraulic design and environmental considerations, British Standards Institute,1998. • BS EN 12056-3 Gravity drainage inside buildings – Roof drainage, layout and calculation, British Standards Institute, 2000. • Figures for UK rainfall are available from the Met Office www.met-office.gov.uk • BRE Digest 365 Soakaway design, BRE 2003. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 330 Additional Sources of Information BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 Pol 7 • Guide on the Limitation of the effects of obtrusive light from outdoor lighting installation, International Commission on Illumination (CIE), 2003. • Night blight! Campaign to Protect Rural England (CPRE) www.cpre.org.uk/campaigns/landscape/light-pollution SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 References 331 17.0 References 1 2 BSRIA Commissioning Guides: • Application Guide 1/91 - Commissioning of VAV systems in Buildings • Application Guide 20/95 - Commissioning of Pipework Systems • Technical Memoranda 1/88.1 - Commissioning HVAC Systems • Application Guide 3/89.3 - Commissioning of Air Systems in Buildings • Application Guide 1/2001.1 - Pre-commission Cleaning of Pipework Systems • Application Guide 2/89.3 - Commissioning of Water Systems in Buildings • Application Guide 2/89.3 – Commissioning water systems application principles • Application Guide 5/2002 - Commissioning Management CIBSE Commissioning Codes: Set of Seven Codes (2003) • CIBSE Commissioning Code A: Air Distribution Systems • CIBSE Commissioning Code B: Boilers • CIBSE Commissioning Code C: Automatic Controls • CIBSE Commissioning Code L: Lighting • CIBSE Commissioning Code M: Management • CIBSE Commissioning Code R: Refrigeration • CIBSE Commissioning Code W: Water Distribution Systems 3 Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Flora and Fauna (CITES) http://www.cites.org/ 4 Construction site impacts - BRE Publications: • Control of Dust from Construction and Demolition Activities”. V Kukadia, S Upton, D Hall BRE Press, 2003. • Controlling particles, vapour and noise pollution from construction sites” - set of five Pollution Control Guides. V Kukadia, S Upton, C Grimwood, BRE Press, 2003. • Construction Site Transport: The Next Big Thing, 2003, BRE and DTI. Available from: www.bre.co.uk/pdf/constructiontraffic.pdf 5 6 Construction site impacts - Environment Agency publications: • PPG 1 – General guide to the prevention of pollution. Environment Agency • PPG 5 – Works in, near or liable to affect watercourses. Environment Agency • PPG 6 – Working at demolition and construction sites. Environment Agency • http://www.netregs.gov.uk/netregs/resources/278006/277807/?version=1&lang=_e DTI Construction Industry KPI Pack includes Methods of Measurement, Handbook, KPI Wall Chart, 2005. www.constructingexcellence.org.uk 7 Secured by Design: • http://www.securedbydesign.com/professionals/guides.aspx • Car parks: http://www.securedcarparks.com and http://www.britishparking.co.uk 8 Lighting Guide 10 Daylighting and window design, CIBSE, 1999. 9 BS 8206 Lighting for buildings - Code of practice for daylighting, Part 2, 1992. 10 Site layout planning for daylight and sunlight, A guide to good practice, P. J. Littlefair, BRE Press, 1998. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 332 References 11 Information Paper IP 23/93 Measuring daylight, BRE, 1993. 12 Code for Lighting, CIBSE, 2006. BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 • Lighting Guide 1 The Industrial Environment. • Lighting Guide 2 Hospitals and Health Care Buildings (including 2006 addendum) • Lighting Guide 3 The visual environment for dispaly screen use (including 2006 addendum) • Lighting Guide 4 Sports (including 2006 addendum) • Lighting Guide 8 Lighting for Museums and Art Galleries • Lighting Guide 9 Lighting for Communal Residential Buildings 13 Lighting Guide 7 Office Lighting, CIBSE 2005. 14 Lighting Guide 6 The Outdoor Environment, CIBSE 1992. 15 AM10 Natural Ventilation in Non Domestic Buildings, CIBSE, 2005. 16 BCO Guide 2005, Best Practice in the Specification of Offices, BCO, 2005. 17 Approved Document Part F – Ventilation, 2006, ODPM. 18 BS EN 13986:2004 Wood-based panels for use in construction – Characteristics, evaluation of conformity and marking. 19 BS EN 14080:2005 Timber structures – Glued laminated timber – Criteria. 20 BS EN 14342:2005 Wood flooring – Characteristics, evaluation of conformity and marking. 21 BS EN 14041:2004 Resilient, textile and laminate floor coverings. Essential characteristics. 22 BS EN 13964:2004 Suspended ceilings. Criteria and test methods. 23 BS EN 13999-1:2007 Adhesives – Short term method for measuring the emission properties of low-solvent or solvent-free adhesives after application – Part 1: General procedures. 24 BS EN 233:1999. Wallcoverings in roll form – Specification for finished wallpapers, wall vinyls and plastics wallcoverings. 25 BS EN 234: Specification for wallcoverings for subsequent decoration. 26 BS EN 259-1:2001 Wallcoverings in roll form – Heavy duty wallcoverings – Part 1: Specifications. 27 BS EN 266:1992 Specification for Textile wallcoverings. 28 BS 3046:1981 Specification for Adhesives for hanging flexible wallcoverings. 29 BS EN 13300:2001 Paints and varnishes – water-borne coating materials and coating systems for interior walls and ceilings – Classification. 30 Directive 2004/42/CE of the European Parliament and of the Council of 21 April 2004 on the limitation of emission of volatile organic compounds due to the use of organic solvents in certain paints and varnishes and vehicle refinishing products and amending Directive 1999/13/EC. Official Journal of the European Union L.143/87, 30.4.2004. 31 BS EN 717-1:2004 Wood-based panels Determination of formaldehyde release. Formaldehyde emission by the chamber method. 32 BS EN 13999-2:2007. Part 2: Determination of volatile organic compounds. 33 BS EN 13999-2:2007. Part 3: Determination of volatile aldehydes. 34 BS EN 13999-2:2007. Part 4: Determination of volatile diisocyanates. 35 BS EN 12149:1997 Wallcoverings in roll form – Determination of migration of heavy metals and certain other elements, of vinyl chloride monomer and of formaldehyde release. 36 BS EN ISO 11890-2:2006 Paints and varnishes. Determination of volatile organic compound (VOC) content. Gas-chromatographic method. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 37 References 333 BRE Digest 464 VOC Emissions from Building Products - Part 1: "Sources, testing and emission data", Chuck Yu, Derrick Crump, CRC Ltd, 2002 38 CIBSE Applications Manual AM11 Building energy and environmental modelling, CIBSE, 1998. 39 CIBSE Guide A Environmental Design, 7th Edition, Issue 2, CIBSE, 2007. 40 Legionnaires' disease - The control of legionella bacteria in water systems. Approved Code of Practice and guidance, 3rd ed. HSE, 2000. 41 TM13 ‘Minimising the risk of Legionnaires disease’, CIBSE, 2002. 42 Building Regulations Approved Document M, Access to and use of buildings, ODPM, 2004. 43 Building Regulations Approved Document E, Resistance to the passage of sound, ODPM, 2003. 44 Building Regulations Approved Document L1a Conservation of Fuel and Power (New Dwellings), 2006, ODPM. 45 Building Regualtions Approved Document L2a: Conservation of fuel and power (New buildings other than dwellings), ODPM, 2006. 46 Balancing the needs for energy conservation with those of building conservation: an Interim Guidance Note on the application of Part L, English Heritage, 2004. 47 Thermal insulation: avoiding risks, C Stirling, BRE Press, 2002. 48 TM39 Building Energy Metering, CIBSE, 2009. 49 GIL065 Metering and Energy Use in New Non-Domestic Buildings - A Guide to help designers meet Part L2 of the Building Regulations, Carbon Trust, 2002. 50 General Information Leaflet 65, Metering energy use in new non-domestic buildings, BRECSU, 2002. 51 BS 5489 Part 1 Code of practice for the design of road lighting: lighting of roads and public amenity areas, BSI, 2003. 52 Quality Assurance for Combined Heat and Power: http://www.chpqa.com/ 53 Sustainable Bioenergy: a framework for decision makers, United Nations – Energy, 2007. 54 Metric handbook – planning and design data, Adler, Architectural Press 3rd Ed. 2007. 55 BS5489-1:2003 Lighting of roads and public amenity areas, BSI. 56 The National Cycle Network, Guidelines and Practical Details issue 2, Sustrans, 1997. www.sustrans.org.uk/default.asp?sID=1149001882109 57 http://www.sustrans.org.uk/webfiles/guidelines/appendix.pdf 58 LTN 2/04 Adjacent and Shared Use Facilities for Pedestrians and Cyclists, DfT, 2005. www.dft.gov.uk/consultations/archive/2004/ltnwc/ltn204adjacentandsharedusefa1692?page=1 59 Rainwater and Greywater Use in Building, Best Practice Guidance, CIRIA, 2001. 60 www.cites.org/ 61 BES6001:2008 Issue 1 Framework Standard for the Responsible Sourcing of Construction Products, BRE Global, 2008. 62 UK Government Timber Procurement Policy, Definition of ‘legal’ and ‘sustainable’ for timber procurement, Second Edition, CPET, 2006. 63 BS 5234-2: Partitions (including matching linings) – Specification for performance criteria for strength and robustness including methods of test, BSI1992. 64 65 www.cites.org/ A Report on the Demolition Protocol, commissioned by London Remade prepared by EnviroCentre Ltd. www.ice.org.uk SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2010 334 References BREEAM Multi-residential 2008 The following downloads are uncontrolled copies used with permission of BRE Global. All rights reserved. Please visit www.breeam.org for more information 66 Planning Policy Guidance (PPG) 3: Housing. www.planningportal.gov.uk. Scottish Planning Policy Guidance (SPPG) 3: Housing. www.scotland.gov.uk/ 67 Data from the Countryside Survey can be accessed through the Digest of Environmental Statistics: http://www.defra.gov.uk/environment/statistics/wildlife/wdcs.htm http://www.countrysidesurvey.org.uk/archiveCS2000/ 68 UK BAP: www.ukbap.org.uk 69 Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments, ASHRAE, 2004. 70 BS EN 378:2008 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps. Safety and environmental requirements, BSI. 71 Carbon Dioxide as a Refrigeration Code of Practice, Institute of Refrigeration, 2009. 72 Ammonia Refrigeration Systems Code of Practice, Institute of Refrigeration, 2009. 73 Interim Code of Practice for Sustainable Drainage Systems (SUDS), CIRIA, 2004. 74 C624 Development and flood risk, guidance for the construction industry, Lancaster et. al, CIRIA, 2004. 75 Planning Policy Statement 25: Development and Flood Risk, CLG , 2006. 76 BS EN 752-4: 2008, Drain and sewer systems outside buildings, British Standard Institute, 2008. 77 BS EN 12056-3: 2000, Gravity drainage inside buildings – Part 3: Roof drainage, layout and calculation, British Standard Institute, 2000. 78 Pollution Prevention Guideline (PPG) 3 Use and design of oil separators in surface water drainage systems, Environment Agency/SEPA/Environment & Heritage Service, 2006. www.environment-agency.gov.uk/business/topics/pollution/39083.aspx 79 C697 The SUDS Manual, CIRIA 2007. 80 Pollution Prevention Pays, Environment Agency/SEPA/Environment & Heritage Service, 2004. www.environment-agency.gov.uk/business/topics/pollution/36641.aspx 81 GN01 Guidance notes for the reduction of obtrusive light, Institution of Lighting Engineers (ILE), 2005. www.ile.org.uk 82 Technical Report No. 5: The Brightness of Illuminated Advertisements, Institution of Lighting Engineers (ILE), Third Ed, 2001. 83 Guidance Note Controlling Light Pollution and Reducing Lighting Energy Consumption, Scottish Executive, 2007. SD5064 issue 2.1 Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2012 Tel: +44 (0)191 490 1547 Fax: +44 (0)191 477 5371 Email: [email protected] Website: www.heattracing.co.uk www.thorneanderrick.co.uk
* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
advertisement
© 2021